NOTES- PROE DRAWING & SKETCHER

Table of ContentsFundamentals of Drawing

INTRODUCTION 1-1PRODUCTION DRAWINGS IN PRO/ENGINEER......................................................... 1-2

Using Drawing Templates..................................................................................................1-2

Using Configuration Files ..................................................................................................1-3

Files Automatically Loaded by the System........................................................................1-6

Editing the Configuration File During a Pro/ENGINEER Session ....................................1-6

Using Drawing Setup Files.................................................................................................1-7

LABORATORY PRACTICAL ......................................................................................... 1-9

EXERCISE 1: Setting Up for Detailing .............................................................................1-9

MODULE SUMMARY ................................................................................................... 1-13

CREATING VIEWS 2-1VIEW CREATION ............................................................................................................ 2-2

Creating Different View Types ..........................................................................................2-2

Controlling the View Display.............................................................................................2-5

Adding Cross-Sections .......................................................................................................2-6

Specifying the View Scale..................................................................................................2-8

CONFIGURATION FILE OPTIONS................................................................................ 2-8

DRAWING SETUP FILE OPTIONS ................................................................................ 2-9

LABORATORY PRACTICAL ....................................................................................... 2-13

EXERCISE 1: Creating a Drawing of the Plunger ...........................................................2-13

EXERCISE 2: Creating a Drawing of the Barrel .............................................................2-22

MODULE SUMMARY ................................................................................................... 2-28

ASSEMBLY AND MULTI-MODEL DRAWINGS 3-1ASSEMBLY DRAWINGS ................................................................................................ 3-2

Adding Exploded Views.....................................................................................................3-2

MULTI-MODEL DRAWINGS ......................................................................................... 3-2

Adding the Model to the Drawing......................................................................................3-3


EXERCISE 1: Displaying Multiple Models in a Drawing .................................................3-5

MODULE SUMMARY ................................................................................................... 3-12

- For University Use Only -Commercial Use Prohibited

MODIFYING VIEWS 4-1MANIPULATING VIEWS ................................................................................................4-2

Changing View Location, Orientation, and Origin ............................................................ 4-2

Controlling Hidden Line Display....................................................................................... 4-4

Removing Views from a Drawing ..................................................................................... 4-4

Modifying the View Scale ................................................................................................. 4-5

Modifying View Boundaries and Callouts......................................................................... 4-5

Changing a Cross-Section.................................................................................................. 4-7

Altering Assembly Views .................................................................................................. 4-8

CONFIGURATION FILE OPTIONS ..............................................................................4-12

DRAWING SETUP FILE OPTIONS...............................................................................4-13

LABORATORY PRACTICAL........................................................................................4-16

EXERCISE 1: Manipulating Views................................................................................. 4-17

EXERCISE 2: Altering the Display of Views.................................................................. 4-24

EXERCISE 3: Modifying the Scale of Views.................................................................. 4-27

MODULE SUMMARY....................................................................................................4-35

SHOWING DIMENSIONS 5-1DRAWING DETAILS .......................................................................................................5-2

Showing Detail Items......................................................................................................... 5-2

Manipulating Detail Items ................................................................................................. 5-4

Changing the Display of Dimensions in a Drawing........................................................... 5-5

Hole Charts ........................................................................................................................ 5-9


EXERCISE 1: Showing Dimensions on a Drawing......................................................... 5-12

EXERCISE 2: Showing Dimensions in Symbolic Form ................................................. 5-23

EXERCISE 3: Displaying Dual Dimensions ................................................................... 5-28

MODULE SUMMARY....................................................................................................5-32

CREATING DIMENSIONS 6-1ADDING DIMENSIONS TO A DRAWING.....................................................................6-2

Creating Driven Dimensions.............................................................................................. 6-2

Creating Reference Dimensions......................................................................................... 6-3

Modifying the Dimensioning Scheme................................................................................ 6-3

Creating Draft Dimensions ................................................................................................ 6-3

CONFIGURATION FILE OPTIONS ................................................................................6-4

LABORATORY PRACTICAL..........................................................................................6-6

EXERCISE 1: Creating Dimensions on a Drawing ........................................................... 6-7

EXERCISE 2: Modifying the Dimensioning Scheme ..................................................... 6-12

MODULE SUMMARY....................................................................................................6-15


CREATING NOTES 7-1ADDING NOTES TO A DRAWING................................................................................ 7-2

Specifying the Content of a Note .......................................................................................7-2

Drawing Labels ..................................................................................................................7-2

User-Defined Symbols .......................................................................................................7-3

Manipulating Notes ............................................................................................................7-3

Creating Style Libraries......................................................................................................7-7




EXERCISE 1: Creating Notes on a Drawing ...................................................................7-10

EXERCISE 2: Creating Parametric Notes........................................................................7-16

MODULE SUMMARY ................................................................................................... 7-18

TOLERANCES ON DRAWINGS 8-1LINEAR TOLERANCES .................................................................................................. 8-2

Showing Linear Tolerances................................................................................................8-2

Changing Linear Tolerances...............................................................................................8-3

GEOMETRIC TOLERANCES.......................................................................................... 8-3

Creating a Geometric Tolerance.........................................................................................8-3

Geometric Tolerances in Assembly Drawings ...................................................................8-6

Modifying a Geometric Tolerance .....................................................................................8-6


Drawing Setup File Options ...............................................................................................8-8


EXERCISE 1: Using Linear and Geometric Tolerances ....................................................8-9

MODULE SUMMARY ................................................................................................... 8-16

DRAWING STANDARDS 9-1SETTING UP YOUR DRAWING STANDARDS............................................................ 9-2

Setting Up Your Configuration File ...................................................................................9-2

Setting Up Your Drawing Setup File .................................................................................9-2



CREATING DRAWING TEMPLATES ........................................................................... 9-8

Model Requirements ..........................................................................................................9-9

Template View Definition..................................................................................................9-9

Dimension and Balloon Priority .......................................................................................9-11

View Symbol....................................................................................................................9-11



EXERCISE 1: Setting Drawing Standards through the Drawing Setup File ................... 9-12

EXERCISE 2: Creating a Drawing Template .................................................................. 9-16

MODULE SUMMARY....................................................................................................9-19

DRAWING TABLES 10-1PURPOSE OF DRAWING TABLES ..............................................................................10-2

Creating a Drawing Table ................................................................................................ 10-2

Manipulating a Drawing Table ........................................................................................ 10-3

Adding Text to the Cells .................................................................................................. 10-5

Repositioning Drawing Tables......................................................................................... 10-6


EXERCISE 1: Creating and Modifying a Drawing Table ............................................... 10-7

MODULE SUMMARY..................................................................................................10-14

COSMETIC FEATURES 11-1COSMETIC SKETCHES.................................................................................................11-2

Working with Regular Sections ....................................................................................... 11-2

Working with Projected Sections..................................................................................... 11-2

Showing Cosmetic Sketches on a Drawing...................................................................... 11-3

COSMETIC THREADS...................................................................................................11-3

Creating Cosmetic Threads.............................................................................................. 11-3

Creating Cosmetic Threads using Standard Hole............................................................. 11-7

USER-DEFINED FEATURES.........................................................................................11-8

Creating a UDF ................................................................................................................ 11-8

Placing a UDF................................................................................................................ 11-11

Summary of Technique for Creating Cosmetic Threads................................................ 11-13

LABORATORY PRACTICAL......................................................................................11-14

EXERCISE 1: Creating a Cosmetic Sketch ................................................................... 11-14

EXERCISE 2: Creating Cosmetic Threads.................................................................... 11-17

EXERCISE 3: Cosmetic Threads Using Standard Holes............................................... 11-25

MODULE SUMMARY..................................................................................................11-27

2-D DRAFTING 12-12-D DRAFTING CAPABILITIES ...................................................................................12-2

Creating Draft Geometry.................................................................................................. 12-2

Manipulating Draft Geometry.......................................................................................... 12-4

Modifying Draft Geometry .............................................................................................. 12-5

DRAWING SETUP FILE OPTIONS...............................................................................12-5



EXERCISE 1: Using the 2-D Drafting Functionality.......................................................12-7

EXERCISE 2: Updating a 2-D Drawing ........................................................................12-16

MODULE SUMMARY ................................................................................................. 12-20

SYMBOLS 13-1CREATING DRAWING SYMBOLS.............................................................................. 13-2

Creating Symbol Geometry..............................................................................................13-2

Adding Text to a Symbol .................................................................................................13-2

Grouping Symbols............................................................................................................13-3

Controlling Symbols.........................................................................................................13-4

Storing Symbols ...............................................................................................................13-5

PLACING SYMBOLS ON A DRAWING...................................................................... 13-6

Defining the Relationship Between the Symbol Instance and Original Symbol ..............13-6

Changing Variable Text Values in a Symbol Instance .....................................................13-7

Selecting Groups to Include in the Instance .....................................................................13-7

REDEFINING EXISTING SYMBOLS........................................................................... 13-8

Updating a Redefined Symbol in a Drawing....................................................................13-8

USING WELDING SYMBOLS ...................................................................................... 13-9

USING SURFACE FINISH SYMBOLS......................................................................... 13-9

DRAWING SETUP FILE OPTIONS ............................................................................ 13-10

LABORATORY PRACTICAL ..................................................................................... 13-11

EXERCISE 1: Creating a Symbol with Variable Text ...................................................13-11

EXERCISE 2: Creating Symbol Groups ........................................................................13-17

MODULE SUMMARY ................................................................................................. 13-22

USING LAYERS TO CONTROL DRAWING DISPLAY 14-1PURPOSE OF LAYERS.................................................................................................. 14-2

Creating a Layer in a Drawing .........................................................................................14-2

Creating the Layer ............................................................................................................14-3

Associating Items to Layers .............................................................................................14-3

Specifying the Display of a Layer ....................................................................................14-4

Controlling Layer Display in the Drawing .......................................................................14-5

DRAWING SETUP FILE OPTIONS .............................................................................. 14-7


EXERCISE 1: Using Layers to Control Drawing Display ...............................................14-8

MODULE SUMMARY ................................................................................................. 14-13

RESOLVING REGENERATION PROBLEMS 15-1RESOLVING FEATURE FAILURES ............................................................................ 15-2


Identifying the Failed Feature .......................................................................................... 15-2

Determining the Cause of the Failure .............................................................................. 15-3

Fixing the Failure ............................................................................................................. 15-4

Tips on Resolving Regeneration Failures ........................................................................ 15-5


EXERCISE 1: Resolving Failed Features........................................................................ 15-6

MODULE SUMMARY..................................................................................................15-10

DRAWING FORMATS 16-1CREATING A DRAWING FORMAT ............................................................................16-2

Importing a Format from Another System....................................................................... 16-2

Creating a Format with 2-D Drafting............................................................................... 16-3

Creating a Format in Sketcher Mode ............................................................................... 16-4

ADDING INFORMATION TO A FORMAT..................................................................16-4

Including Parametric Information in a Format................................................................. 16-4

CONFIGURATION FILE OPTIONS ..............................................................................16-6


EXERCISE 1: Creating a Multi-Sheet Drawing Format.................................................. 16-7

MODULE SUMMARY..................................................................................................16-15

CREATING A BILL OF MATERIALS 17-1CREATING A BOM USING PRO/REPORT..................................................................17-2

Generating a BOM Report ............................................................................................... 17-2

Manipulating a BOM Report ........................................................................................... 17-3

Showing the Correct Quantity.......................................................................................... 17-6

Calculating a Total Cost................................................................................................... 17-6

Continuing the Table on the Next Page ........................................................................... 17-8

Showing BOM Balloons .................................................................................................. 17-8

DRAWING SETUP FILE OPTIONS.............................................................................17-10

LABORATORY PRACTICAL......................................................................................17-11

EXERCISE 1: Creating an Automatic BOM ................................................................. 17-11

MODULE SUMMARY..................................................................................................17-20

FAMILY TABLES 18-1ADVANTAGES OF USING FAMILY TABLES ...........................................................18-2

Saving Space with Instances ............................................................................................ 18-2

Reducing Development Time .......................................................................................... 18-2

CREATING A FAMILY TABLE ....................................................................................18-2

Creating the Generic Part ................................................................................................. 18-2


Specifying Items for the Table to Drive ...........................................................................18-3

Creating New Instances....................................................................................................18-3

Verifying the Validity of the Model Instances .................................................................18-5

USING FAMILY TABLES IN DRAWING MODE ....................................................... 18-5

Creating a Parts Catalog ...................................................................................................18-5

Creating a Separate Drawing for Each Instance ...............................................................18-9

DRAWING SETUP FILE OPTIONS ............................................................................ 18-11


EXERCISE 1: Creating a Family Table .........................................................................18-12

EXERCISE 2: Showing Family Tables on a Drawing ...................................................18-18

EXERCISE 3: Creating Separate Drawings for Each Instance ......................................18-21

MODULE SUMMARY ................................................................................................. 18-22

WORKING WITH LARGE DRAWINGS 19-1MANAGING LARGE DRAWINGS............................................................................... 19-2

Drawing Retrieval Process ...............................................................................................19-2

APPROACHES TO PERFORMANCE IMPROVEMENT............................................. 19-3

Configuration File Settings...............................................................................................19-3

Model Simplification........................................................................................................19-4

View Manipulation...........................................................................................................19-6

Erasing Views...................................................................................................................19-7

Cross-Section Manipulation .............................................................................................19-7

Drawing Rep Tool ............................................................................................................19-8

Merging Drawings............................................................................................................19-8

View Only Retrieval.........................................................................................................19-9


EXERCISE 1: Reducing Regeneration and Repaint Time .............................................19-10

EXERCISE 2: Creating Simplified Representations ......................................................19-15

EXERCISE 3: Merging Two Drawings into One...........................................................19-17

MODULE SUMMARY ................................................................................................. 19-20

PLOTTING 20-1PLOTTING A DRAWING .............................................................................................. 20-2

Plotting Interactively ........................................................................................................20-2

Plotting Using the Pro/BATCH Utility.............................................................................20-5

CONFIGURATION FILE OPTIONS.............................................................................. 20-7


EXERCISE 1: Creating Plot Files for Drawings ............................................................20-10

MODULE SUMMARY ................................................................................................. 20-13


MARKUP MODEL 21-1ENGINEERING MARKUPS ...........................................................................................21-2

Creating a Markup ........................................................................................................... 21-2

Saving and Viewing a Markup......................................................................................... 21-3

Retrieving Markups.......................................................................................................... 21-3

OVERLAYS .....................................................................................................................21-3


EXERCISE 1: Creating a Markup on a Drawing............................................................. 21-5

MODULE SUMMARY....................................................................................................21-9

CREATING ISO-STANDARD DRAWINGS A-1CONFIGURATION FILES AND DRAWING SETUP FILES ........................................A-2

Using Configuration File Options to Create ISO-Standard Drawings .............................. A-2

Using Drawing Setup File (.dtl) Options to Create ISO-Standard Drawings.................... A-3

TOLERANCE TABLES....................................................................................................A-5

Using Tolerance Tables for ISO Standards....................................................................... A-5

ISO SURFACE FINISH SYMBOLS ................................................................................A-7

LABORATORY PRACTICAL.........................................................................................A-9

EXERCISE 1: Creating a Drawing in Accordance with the ISO Standard....................... A-9

MODULE SUMMARY...................................................................................................A-22

INFO BILL OF MATERIALS MENU B-1PLACING A BOM USING THE INFO MENU ...............................................................B-2

Manipulating the Format of a BOM Report...................................................................... B-3

Dividing a BOM into Sections.......................................................................................... B-3

Specifying Information and Format .................................................................................. B-3

Calculating a Total Value ................................................................................................. B-5

SKETCHER BASICS C-1THE SKETCHER ENVIRONMENT................................................................................C-2

The Sketcher Interface .......................................................................................................C-2

Intent Manager ...................................................................................................................C-3

Pop-Up Menus ...................................................................................................................C-4

SKETCHER MODE FUNCTIONALITY.........................................................................C-5

Sketcher Menus..................................................................................................................C-5

Specifying References........................................................................................................C-6

Creating Geometry.............................................................................................................C-6

Dimensioning.....................................................................................................................C-8

Constraining.....................................................................................................................C-10


Additional Sketcher Tools............................................................................................... C-11

SETTING SKETCHER PREFERENCES....................................................................... C-14

SKETCHER PHILOSOPHY .......................................................................................... C-17

Rules of Thumb ............................................................................................................... C-17

LABORATORY PRACTICAL ...................................................................................... C-19

EXERCISE 1: Sketching Basics...................................................................................... C-19

EXERCISE 2: Sketching in Steps ................................................................................... C-25

EXERCISE 3: Sketching a Hexagon............................................................................... C-30

MODULE SUMMARY .................................................................................................. C-33

PTC GLOBAL SERVICES: TECHNICAL SUPPORT D-1FINDING THE TECHNICAL SUPPORT PAGE ............................................................ D-2

OPENING A TECHNICAL SUPPORT CALL................................................................ D-2

Opening a call via email: ...................................................................................................D-2

Opening a call via telephone: ............................................................................................D-3

Opening calls on the PTC Web Site: .................................................................................D-3

Sending Data to Technical Support ...................................................................................D-3

CALL / SPR FLOW CHART AND PRIORITIES ........................................................... D-4

REGISTERING FOR ON-LINE SUPPORT .................................................................... D-5

ON-LINE SERVICES....................................................................................................... D-6

FINDING SOLUTIONS IN THE KNOWLEDGE BASE................................................ D-6

GETTING UP-TO-DATE INFORMATION.................................................................... D-8

CONTACT INFORMATION ........................................................................................... D-8

Internet ..............................................................................................................................D-8

Telephone ..........................................................................................................................D-9

ELECTRONIC SERVICES ............................................................................................ D-14

USING PTC.HELP E-1PTC HELP OVERVIEW ...................................................................................................E-2

PTC HELP FEATURES ....................................................................................................E-2

USING THE PRO/ENGINEER HELP SYSTEM .............................................................E-2

Getting Help While Performing a Task............................................................................. E-2

GETTING HELP THROUGH THE PTC HELP SIDEBAR.............................................E-3

PTC HELP MODULE LIST ..............................................................................................E-4




Page 1-1

Module

IntroductionIn this module, the concept of using a drawing template to document

a model is introduced. The use of configuration and drawing setup

files to change various characteristics of the drawing is introduced

as well.

Objectives

After completing this module, you will be able to:

• Create and modify configuration files.

• Create and modify drawing setup files.

• Use an existing drawing template.

For University Use Only - Commercial Use Prohibited

Page 1-2 Fundamenta ls of Drawing

NOTES

PRODUCTION DRAWINGS IN PRO/ENGINEERWith Pro/ENGINEER, you can create a detailed drawing from your 3-Dmodel that is fully associated to the part. That is, when you make a changeto the part, the system reflects that change in the drawing; likewise, whenyou make a change to the drawing, it reflects that change in the associatedpart.

Before creating a drawing, you should first modify your configuration fileand drawing setup file to customize the appearance of your drawings.Through these files, you can specify such characteristics as the number ofdecimal places that you would like to display for each dimension, thedefault units, and the linear tolerance format.

Using Drawing TemplatesUsing the new drawing templates, you can create drawings automaticallyand define the layout of views, set view display, place notes, define tables,create snap lines, and show dimensions.

For University Use Only - Commercial Use ProhibitedFor University Use Only - Commercial Use Prohibited

In t roduct ion Page 1-3

NOTES

Figure 1

These drawing templates will typically be created and maintained by asystem administrator. The creation of drawing templates will be discussedin a later chapter. Once these templates are created, they are appliedduring drawing creation.

Using Configuration FilesUsing Pro/ENGINEER configuration files, you can customize yourworking environment by specifying startup values for environment optionsand other global settings. For example, you can turn the bell on or off,select a suitable background color, or set the model display to hidden linemode.



NOTES

Table 1 lists some of the configuration file options that affect theappearance of a drawing. For a complete listing of the configuration fileoptions available in Pro/ENGINEER, refer to PTC HELP.



NOTES

Table 1: Configuration File Options Affecting DrawingsOption Value Description

drawing_file_editor editor

protab

Sets the editor that youcan use to edit drawingsetup files (.dtl).

drawing_setup_file filename.dtl Points the system to thefile containing drawingsetup parameters. Allnew drawings use this fileas the default setup file.

drawing_models_read_

only

no

yes

Makes the model (part, orassembly) read-only in adrawing.

draw_points_in_model_

units

no

yes

If set to “yes,” the systemdefines the current draftcoordinate values asmodel units rather thandrawing units.

dwg_select_across_

pick_box

no

yes

Controls the defaultoption from the PICKMANY menu. If set to“yes,” the default isAcross Box. If set to“no,” the default isInside Box.

mapkey keystroke Sets up macros, allowingyou to press one or twokeys to execute a set ofcommands.

pro_dtl_setup_dir directory path Specifies the directory inwhich the system shouldstore drawing setup files.If you do not set it, thesystem uses the defaultsetup directory.

rename_drawings_with_

object

none

part

assem

both

Controls whether thesystem copies associateddrawings automaticallywith parts and assemblies.

save_objects changed_and_specified

changed

all

Controls whether thesystem stores an objectand its dependent objects(such as a part used in anassembly).



NOTES

Files Automatically Loaded by the SystemPro/ENGINEER can read configuration files from several areas. If aparticular option is present in more than one configuration file, however, ituses the latest value. When the system initially starts, it reads inconfiguration files from the following directories, in the order in whichthey are listed:

• Config.sup in the loadpoint/text directory (the directory in whichyou install Pro/ENGINEER) – Usually, only the system administratorhas the ability to change the options in this file because they aregenerally company standards and you cannot override them with otherconfiguration files. Use this file to lock in certain requirements for allusers.

• Config.pro in the loadpoint/text directory (the directory in whichyou install Pro/ENGINEER) – The system administrator also managesthis file to set global search paths to library directories. Otherconfiguration files can override the options in this file.

• Config.pro in the your home directory – This file is located in yourhome directory. If the system encounters an option in this file that isthe same as one in the loadpoint config.pro file, it uses this option,overriding the option in the other file.

• Config.pro in the current directory – This file is located in thedirectory from which you launched Pro/ENGINEER. If the systemencounters an option in this file that is the same as one in the loadpointconfig.pro directory or the home directory config.pro, it uses thisoption, overriding the others.

Note:

If you do not set an option in any of these configuration files,the system uses the default value for that option.

Editing the Configuration File During aPro/ENGINEER SessionIn general, you should set the options in your configuration file before youstart a Pro/ENGINEER session.



NOTES

Global Considerations

Keep in mind that configuration file options impact your model globally—that is, they affect the model in all modes of Pro/ENGINEER and theyaffect every associated drawing. To control the appearance of anindividual drawing, you can modify your drawing setup file.

Using Drawing Setup FilesTo change (or customize) the current drawing only—without affectingother modes of Pro/ENGINEER or other drawings—you can modify thedrawing setup file. When you create a drawing, Pro/ENGINEER providesyou with a default setup file with default values. You can change thesevalues to customize the characteristics of the current drawing such asdimension and note text height, text orientation, geometric tolerancestandards, font properties, drafting standards, and arrow lengths.

Specifying Your Default Drawing Setup File

Before starting your drawing, you should specify your default drawingsetup file by setting the configuration file drawing_setup_file Youcan change the values in this file for individual drawings at any time.Table 2 lists a few of the drawing setup file options available. For acomplete listing, see PTC HELP.



NOTES

Table 2: Drawing Setup File OptionsOption Value Description

Drawing_units inch

feet

mm

cm

m

Specifies the units for alldrawing parameters.

Drawing_text_height 0.15625

value

Specifies the default textheight for all text in thedrawing using the units setby the configuration fileoption drawing_units.

text_thickness 0.000000

0<value<0.5

Specifies the defaultthickness for new text.

text_width_factor 0.80000

0.235<value<8

Specifies the default ratiobetween the text width andthe text height. Thesystem maintains this ratiountil you change the widthusing the Text Widthoption.



NOTES

LABORATORY PRACTICAL

Goal

To customize Pro/ENGINEER by creating a configuration file and

drawing setup file.

Method

In this exercise, a configuration file is created in the current workingdirectory. A drawing setup file is also created and the default values foroptions are modified.

EXERCISE 1: Setting Up for Detailing

Task 1. Customize your working session by creating a configurationfile.

1. Change the working directory to FUND_DRAW_310. Click File >Working Directory > FUND_DRAW_310 > OK.

2. Create a default configuration file for the current session. ClickUtilities > Preferences. The PREFERENCES dialog box appearson the screen.

3. In the OPTION box of the PREFERENCES dialog box, beginentering the first option listed in the table below. The system willcomplete the option. Select the VALUE from the drop down list.Click Add/Change. Do the same for each option.

Table 3: Configuration File OptionsOption Value

bell NO

display HIDDENVIS

highlight_new_dims YES

parenthesize_ref_dim YES

4. Save the configuration file to a new name. Click , for thename type [ my_config ] and click OK.



NOTES

5. Click OK from the PREFERENCES dialog box.

Task 2. Create a new drawing using a drawing template.

1. Change the Working Directory to INTRODUCTION.

2. Click File > New > Drawing.

3. Type [X123456 ] for the name and click OK. Ensure the UseDefault Template checkbox is checked. You will need to browsefor both the Default Model and template.

4. Make sure the NEW DRAWING dialog box options are selected asshown in Figure 2. The model and the template are both stored inyour current directory.

Figure 2: New Drawing Dialog Box

5. Click OK. The drawing should appear as in Figure 3.

6. Save the drawing.



NOTES

Figure 3: The Initial Drawing

Note:

The template specified the following actions to take placeautomatically:

- Place four views

- Set the scale of all views to .500

- Set the display of the isometric view to No Hidden

- Set the display of the planar views to Hidden Line

- Place a standard note on the drawing

- Create snap lines offset a predefined distance from the views

- Show the dimensions for the model with a view locationpriority of FRONT, RIGHT and TOP .

-Locate the dimensions on the snap lines



NOTES

Task 3. Edit the drawing setup file.

1. Modify the existing drawing setup file. Click Advanced > DrawSetup. The PREFERENCES dialog box appears with the initialsettings for the drawing setup file.

2. Change the options as shown in Table 4. Scroll down through thelist, select the option, enter the value and click Add/Change.

Table 4: Drawing Setup File OptionsOption Value

drawing_text_height 0.2

crossec_arrow_length 0.25

crossec_arrow_width 0.1

witness_line_offset 0.15

draw_arrow_style filled

circle_axis_offset 0.25

3. Save the changes to the file. Click , for the name type[my_dtl ]and click OK.

4. Click OK from the PREFERENCES dialog box.

5. Zoom-in to view the changes to the arrow head styles.

Task 4. Add an option to the configuration file so that the systemalways loads the drawing setup file that you just created for all newdrawings .

1. Click Utilities > Preferences. The default configuration file isCURRENT_SESSION.

2. Open the file MY_CONFIG.PRO. Click , selectMY_CONFIG.PRO, and click Open.

3. For option, type [drawing_setup_file] click Browse, selectMY_DTL.DTL, and click Open. Click Add/Change.

4. Click OK to close the PREFERENCES dialog box.

5. Close the current window. Click Window > Close Window.



NOTES

MODULE SUMMARYYou have learned that:

• You can create and modify configuration files.

• You can create drawing setup files.



Page 2-1

Module

Creating ViewsIn this module, you learn about the different view types and how to

place them on a drawing.

Objectives


• Create a drawing and place different view types.

• Create different types of cross-section views on a drawing.



NOTES

VIEW CREATIONIn the previous chapter you were introduced to drawing templates. Thesetemplates will allow you to jump-start the drawing creation process. Therewill be many cases where you will still need to create and manipulate newdrawing views and detail items.

There are several different types of views you can add to aPro/ENGINEER drawing such as general, detailed, projection, auxiliary,and revolved as shown in Figure 1. As you create each view type, you canspecify how much of the model should be visible in the drawing, andwhether the view should be of a single surface on the model or have across-section.

Figure 1: View Types

Creating Different View TypesGeneral Views

When a drawing is created without a template, the first view of a modelthat the system places on a drawing is a general view. These types ofviews are unique in that they allow you to specify any orientation of the

Projection View General View Detailed View

GeneralView

RevolvedView

AuxiliaryView


Creat ing Views Page 2-3

NOTES

model for the view. Initially, the system places a general view in itsdefault orientation; you can then reorient it using default datum planes orpredefined named views.

Orienting General Views Using Predefined Named Views

You can define the orientation of a general view by using a named viewthat has been saved previously in a Part or Assembly. When creatingsaved views, you should use default datum planes as the referencesbecause they are the only references on your model that will never change.

Orienting General Views Using Default Datum Planes

When manually orienting a general view, you should specify top, bottom,left, right, front, or back as the primary direction (corresponding to thedirection of your computer screen such as front of the screen, top of thescreen, etc.). You should use default datum planes as the referencesbecause they are the only references on your model that will never change.

When specifying datum planes for references, keep in mind that theyellow side of the datum plane faces the side of the screen that you pick.For example, if you select top and DTM2, the yellow side of DTM2 facesthe top side of the screen

Projection Views

A projection view is an orthographic projection seen from the top, bottom,left, or right of a selected drawing view. To create it, you specify alocation with respect to another drawing view and Pro/ENGINEERautomatically determines how to project it. Once it determines a suitableview, it automatically orients and positions it correctly.

Once you have placed a projection view, the system associates it with theview from which it projected it. If the parent view moves, the projectionview maintains its alignment.

Auxiliary Views

An auxiliary view is a projection of another view 90 degrees from aninclined surface, a datum plane, or along an axis. Consider an auxiliaryview to be a projection at an odd angle, as opposed to the right, left, top, orbottom.



NOTES

• If you pick an edge as the reference, the view shows the surface towhich the edge belongs, parallel to the computer screen.

• If you pick a datum plane, the view shows the datum plane parallel tothe computer screen.

• If you pick a datum axis, the view looks along the datum axis. Thiswould be useful for looking through a hole on a model.

As with projection views, once you have placed an auxiliary view, thesystem associates it with the view from which it is projected. If the parentview moves, the auxiliary view maintains its alignment.

Detailed Views

A detailed view displays a portion of an existing view in a larger scale,making it easier to see the geometry and dimensions. To create a detailedview, you must specify:

• A location for the detailed view

• A reference point on the model to define the location of interest.

• A view boundary. You will sketch a spline around the area that youwant to show.

• A location for the callout note

Pro/ENGINEER relates a detailed view to the view from which you createit, but you can move the detail view independently of its parent.

Revolved Views

A revolved view is a section view revolved 90 degrees about the cuttingplane line and offset along its length. The section is an area cross-section,showing only material cut by the cutting plane.

Graph Views

A graph view shows a datum graph on a drawing to associate a functionwith the part. Once you have created the datum graph feature, you canshow it in your drawing, as shown in Figure 2.



NOTES

Figure 2: Graph View

Controlling the View DisplayIn addition to determining which type of view to place, you can alsocontrol how much of the model the system shows in the view by usingthese options in the VIEW TYPE menu, as shown in Figure 3:

• Full View – Displays the entire model in the view.

• Half View – Displays only a portion of the model using a datum planeto control how much is visible.

• Broken View – Displays a portion of a large model by removing anarea of the model from the display and brings the pieces of the modelon either side of the removed area closer together.

� Several options exist for defining what the break will look like.You can manually sketch the break geometry or choose S-curve or heartbeat break geometry.

• Partial View – Shows a localized portion of the model using the sametechnique that you would use to create a detailed view.

Figure 3: View Options

Broken View Partial View

Full View Half View



NOTES

Adding Cross-SectionsYou can add the following types of cross-sections to a view, as shown inFigure 4:

• Full – Displays the entire view as a cross-section.

• Half – Displays the cross-section on one side of a datum plane withoutaffecting the other side.

• Local – Displays the cross-section in localized areas by sketching aboundary (using the same techniques that you would use to createdetailed and partial views).

• Full and Local – Displays the entire model as one cross-section whilea local area displays another.

Note:

Use the Of Surface option in the VIEW TYPE menu to showonly one surface in a particular view.

Figure 4: Cross-Section Types

Note:

In version 2000i2 of Pro/ENGINEER, a new type of crosssection engine is available that will dramatically reduce thenumber of occurrences when a cross section view cannot becreated. The new style of cross section can be enabled usingthe detail setup option crossec_type.

Full cross-section Half cross-section

Local cross-section Full & Local cross-section



NOTES

Full Cross-Sectional Views

Using the XSEC TYPE menu, you can manipulate full cross-sectionalviews in the following ways:

• Use Total Xsec to show all edges of a full cross-section, includingthose behind the cutting plane, as shown in Figure 5.

• Use Total Align to show a total cross-section that is unfolded aroundan axis, as shown in Figure 6.

• Use Total Unfold to show a total cross-section unfolded so that thecutting planes are parallel to the screen, as shown in Figure 7.

• Use Area Xsec to show only the geometry at the cutting plane, asshown in Figure 5.

• Use Align Xsec to show an area cross-section that is unfolded aroundan axis, as shown in Figure 6.

• Use Unfold Xsec to show an area cross-section unfolded so that thecutting planes are parallel to the screen, as shown in Figure 7.

Figure 5: Total versus Area Cross-Section

Figure 6: Aligned Cross-Section

Total cross-section Area cross-section



NOTES

Figure 7: Unfolded Cross-Section

Specifying the View ScaleWhen you create a view in a drawing, the scale of the view appears at thebottom of the graphics area. Pro/ENGINEER determines the scale basedon the model and drawing sheet size. When creating a general view, youhave the option to specify a unique scale for the new view only.

CONFIGURATION FILE OPTIONSTable 1 lists configuration file options that affect view display. The defaultvalues are shown in italics.

Table 1: Configuration File Options Affecting View DisplayOption Value Definition

default_draw_scale no

value (positive)

Sets the default drawingscale for views added withthe No Scale option.When set to “no,” thesystem does not set adefault scale. You can setthis option to a positivenumber to predefine thescale when you choose NoScale.

make_proj_view_notes no

yes

Adds view namesautomatically forprojection views in theformat “VIEW viewname-viewname.”

orientation trimetric

isometric

user_default

Establishes the vieworientation as isometric,user-defined, or trimetric.



NOTES

selection_of_removed_

entities

yes

no

Controls the selection ofentities in front of a cross-section. If set to “yes,” youcan select entities even ifthey are in front of thecross-section, clipped, orerased with the EDGEDISP menu.

DRAWING SETUP FILE OPTIONSTable 2 lists the drawing setup file options that affect view display. Thedefault values are shown in italics.

Table 2: Drawing Setup File Options Affecting View DisplayOption Value Definition

broken_view_offset 1.0

value

Sets the offset distancebetween the two halves ofa broken view.

crossec_arrow_length 0.0625

value

Sets the length of thecross-section cuttingplane arrow heads.

crossec_arrow_width 0.1875

value

Sets the width of thecross-section cuttingplane arrows.

crossec_arrow_style tail_online

head_online

Sets the arrowheaddisplay, either head onlineor tail online.



NOTES

crossec_text_place after_head

before_tail

above_tail

above_line

no_text

Sets location of the cross-section text.

cutting_line_adapt no

yes

If set to “yes,” the systemuses adaptive line fonts todisplay cross-sectionarrows; that is, they beginand end in the middle of acomplete line segment.

def_view_text_height 0

value

Sets the default textheight for view namesand arrows in cross-section and detailedviews.

def_view_text_thickness 0

value

Sets the default textthickness for view namesand arrows in cross-section and detailedviews.

detail_circle_line_style solidfont

font_name

Sets the line style forcircles indicating adetailed view in adrawing. The value forthis option can be anyavailable system-definedor user-defined line styles.

detailed_view_circle on

off

Controls the display of thecircle encompassing thedetailed view.



NOTES

half_view_line solid

symmetry

none

Controls the display of thehalf view. If set to “solid,”system draws solid lineswhere material is present.If set to “symmetry,”system draws a centerlineextending beyond the partand acting as a break line.If set to “none,” thesystem draws the object ashort distance past thesymmetry line. You mustspecify a datum to createthe half view and use acenterline to indicate theactual half.

projection_type third_angle

first_angle

Specifies the projectiontype: first or third angle.

show_total_unfold_seam yes

no

Controls the display ofseams in a total unfoldedcross-section.

view_scale_denominator 0

integer

Determines the view scaledenominator for the viewscale before you simplifythe fraction.

Symmetry None



NOTES

view_scale_format decimal

fractional

ratio_colon

Determines whether thesystem expresses a scaleas a decimal, fraction, orratio.



NOTES

LABORATORY PRACTICALGoal

To create a drawing and place different views types on the drawing.

Method

In the first exercise, a new drawing of a plunger part is created anddifferent view types are created.

In the second exercise, a new drawing of a barrel part is created and viewsare created. The barrel part is modified, and the associative drawing alsoupdates.

EXERCISE 1: Creating a Drawing of the Plunger

Figure 8: Plunger Body Drawing



NOTES

Task 1. Retrieve the plunger part to become familiar with its geometry.

1. Click File > Open > PLUNGER_BODY.PRT > Open.

2. Spin the model to review the geometry.

3. Click Window > Close Widow.

Task 2. Create a new drawing named PLUNGER_BODY.DRW asshown in Figure 8. Use PLUNGER_BODY.PRT as the model. Place afirst general view and two projection views.

1. Click File > New > Drawing, type [PLUNGER_BODY] as drawingname. Clear the Use default template checkbox and click OK.

2. Accept the defaults in the New Drawing dialog box and click OK.

3. Click Views, accept the defaults and click Done. Locate the viewby centering it at the bottom of the drawing.

4. Orient the view as shown in Figure 9. Accept defaults and pickDTM1 on the screen for the Front and DTM2 on the screen for theTop. Click OK.

Figure 9: First View

Note:

You should use default datum planes to orient general views.When picking datum planes to face in a particular direction,the yellow side of that datum should face in the specifieddirection.



NOTES

5. Place a projection view to the left of the first view, as shown inFigure 10. Click Add View, accept the defaults and click Done.Locate the view to the left of the first view.

Figure 10: First Projection

6. Place a second projection view above the first projection view thatyou just created, as shown in Figure 11. Click Add View, acceptthe defaults and click Done. Locate the view above the projectionview.

Figure 11: Second Projection

Task 3. Create a general view with a cross-section cutting through themiddle of the model.

1. Click Add View > General > Full View >Section > No Scale >Done.

2. To define the type of cross-section, accept the defaults and clickDone. Locate the view above the first view.



NOTES

3. Orient the view as shown in Figure 12. Expand the Saved Viewslist, select FRONT and click Set > OK.

Figure 12: Cross-section A-A

4. Click Create, accept the defaults and click Done. Type [A] as thecross-section name.

5. Specify DTM3 as the plane to use for the cross-section. Pick DTM3from the MODEL TREE.

6. Pick the second projection view in the upper left corner of thescreen as the view in which to locate the cutting plane arrows.

Task 4. Create a detailed view that displays the tab in the lower rightcorner of View 3.

1. Click Add View > Detailed, accept the defaults and click Done.Locate the view on the right side of the sheet, as shown in Figure13. Type [4] as the scale.



NOTES

Figure 13: DETAIL 1

2. Zoom in on the second projection view and pick the lower rightcorner of the model as shown in Figure 14.

Figure 14: DETAIL 1 Center Point

3. Sketch a spline that encompasses both the center point and thegeometry for the detailed view. (Refer to Figure 13). Click themiddle mouse button to complete the spline.

4. Type [1] as the name.

5. Click Circle and locate the note for the detail to the left of thecircle.



NOTES

Task 5. Create a detailed view displaying the geometry of two of thecooling fins on the plunger body shown in Section A-A.

1. Click Add View > Detailed, accept the defaults and click Done.Locate the view on the right side of the sheet, as shown in Figure15.

Figure 15: DETAIL 2

2. Type [4] as the scale of the detailed view.

3. Zoom in on Section A-A and pick the edge of the flange that issecond from the right as the center point, Figure 16.

Figure 16: DETAIL 2 Center Point

4. Sketch a spline that encompasses both the center point and thegeometry for the detailed view. (Refer to Figure 15). Type [2] asthe name of the detailed view.

5. Click Circle and locate the note for the detail to the upper left ofthe callout.

Pick the edgeof this flangefor the centerof the detailboundary



NOTES

Task 6. Create a partial view that displays the cross-sectional geometryof one of the tabs on the plunger body.

1. Click Add View > General > Partial View > Section > Scale >Done.

2. Click Done to accept the default values for the type of section tobe created.

3. Locate the view on the right side of the sheet, as shown inFigure 17. Type [4] as the scale for the partial view.

Figure 17: Cross-Section B-B

4. Orient the view using the FRONT saved view. Click OK.

5. Create a planar cross-section through the hole of one of the tabs onthe plunger body. Click Create, accept defaults, and click Done.Type [B] as the name of the cross-section.

6. Click Make Datum and create a datum that goes through the axisin the tab and parallel to DTM3. You may find it helpful to selectDTM3 from the model tree.



NOTES

Tips & Techniques:

When creating a datum using the Make Datum option, youcan specify an axis or a datum plane even if it is not visible onthe drawing. Simply turn on the display in theENVIRONMENT dialog box and use Query Select to pickapproximately where to locate the axis or datum plane.

7. Pick the projection view in the upper left corner of the screen tospecify the view in which to place the cross-section arrows.

8. Specify the center point for the outer boundary on the current view.Pick an edge of the through hole, as shown in Figure 18, andsketch a spline that encompasses both the center point and thegeometry for the partial view.

Figure 18: Partial View Center Point

Task 7. Create a 3-D view in an isometric orientation.

1. Click Add View > General > Done. Locate the view in the upperright corner of the drawing.

2. Orient the view similar to the view shown in Figure 19.Temporarily orient the model to the FRONT saved view.

3. From the TYPE pull-down list select ANGLES. From theREFERENCE pull-down list select VERTICAL as the firstreference, type [-45], and click Apply.

4. Click Add to add a second rotation. From the TYPE pull-down listselect HORIZONTAL as the reference and type [35] and clickApply.

5. If the view is oriented correctly as shown in Figure 19, click OK. Ifthe orientation is not correct, repeat steps 2 through 5 of this task.

Select this edgefor the centerpoint of thepartial boundary



NOTES

Figure 19: Isometric View

6. Click Views > Move View and reposition the views as shown inFigure 8.

7. Save the drawing. Click File > Save and accept default name.

8. Close the window.



NOTES

EXERCISE 2: Creating a Drawing of the Barrel

Figure 20: Barrel Drawing

Task 1. Retrieve BARREL.PRT to become familiar with its geometry.

1. Spin the model to obtain a good view of the part.

2. Close the active window.



NOTES

Task 2. Create a new drawing and place a general view on the drawing.

1. Create a new drawing named BARREL.DRW. Click File > New >Drawing. Enter [barrel] for the name. Clear the Use defaulttemplate checkbox, then click OK.

2. The model for the drawing in the NEW DRAWING dialog boxshould be BARREL.PRT. Accept defaults and click OK.

3. Click Views, accept the defaults and click Done. Locate the viewin the upper left corner of the drawing.

4. Orient the view as shown in Figure 21. Pick DTM2 on the screenfor the Front. Select BOTTOM from the REFERENCE 2 drop-downlist, pick DTM3 on the screen and click OK.

Figure 21: First View

Task 3. Create a projection view with an align cross-section through thepatterned holes to the right of the first view.

1. Click Add View > Section > Done.

2. Specify the cross-section type. Click Align XSEC > Done. Locatethe view to the right of the first view, as shown in Figure 22.

Figure 22: Section A-A



NOTES

3. Click Create > Offset > Done to create an offset cross-sectionthrough the center hole and two of the patterned holes.

Note:

The One Side/Both Sides options define which way thesystem cuts the cross-section: in one or both directionsperpendicular to the sketching plane. In this case, you coulduse either one because of DTM2 position, but you should usethe default Both Sides.

4. Type [A] as the name of the cross-section. The barrel part appearson the screen. Pick DTM2 as the sketching plane and click OK toview the sketching plane from above.

5. You may have to show the DTMS_PART_DEF layer to see theaxes. Click View > Layers and show the layer. Repaint the screento see the axes and close the LAYERS dialog box

6. For the reference plane click Bottom and pick DTM3.Pro/ENGINEER orients the view and places you in IntentManager. Close the Sketcher Enhancement- Intent Managerwindow if it appears.

7. Create the section as shown in Figure 23. For additional references,pick the axes and cylindrical surface of the barrel from the screenas shown in Figure 23.

8. Close the REFERENCES dialog box when you have selected thereferences needed for this sketch.

9. Sketch the two lines shown.



NOTES

Figure 23: Sketch for Align Cross-Section

10. Click Sketch > Done to complete the section.

11. Pick axis A_1 in the right view as the axis to unfold around.

12. Press the middle mouse button to abort section arrow creation.

Task 4. Place a projection view to the right of cross-section A-A. Afterplacing the view, retrieve the model and modify the number of holes.Return to the drawing to observe how the drawing updated and verify thatthe cross-section is still valid.

1. Click Add View from the VIEWS menu, then click Projection >Done. Locate the view to the right of Section A-A, as shown inFigure 24.

Figure 24: Projection View Location

Sketch these lines

Pick Axis A_2 asa reference

PickAxis A_1 as areference

Pick Axis A_5 as areference

Pick the outside surface as areference



NOTES

Task 5. Retrieve the barrel part and modify the number of holes in thebarrel to verify that the cross-section updates correctly.

1. Open the barrel part.

2. Click Modify, pick one of the 5 patterned holes and pick theparameter controlling the number of instances in the pattern.

3. Type [7] and click Regenerate.

4. View the updated drawing. Click Window > BARREL.DRW. Thereare now seven holes and the align cross-section updated correctly.

5. Click Window > BARREL.PRT and change the number of holesback to five

6. Set BARREL.DRW active.

Task 6. Create a detailed view that displays the geometry of one of theoval shaped slots.

1. Create a detailed view that displays one of the slots in the firstview. Click Views > Add View > Detailed, accept the defaultsand click Done.

2. Locate the view in the lower left corner of the sheet, as shown inFigure 25. Type [2] as the scale.

Figure 25: Detailed View Location



NOTES

3. Specify the center point for the detail on an existing view. Pick theedge of one of the oval slots in the first view.

4. Sketch a spline that encompasses both the center point and thegeometry for the detailed view. Click the middle mouse button tocomplete the spline.

5. Type [1] as the name of the detailed view.

6. To define the callout to use for this detailed view, click Circle andlocate the note for the detail to the lower left of the circle.

7. Save the drawing and close all windows.



NOTES


• You can create different view types on a drawing.

• Views can contain all of the model geometry, a portion of thegeometry, or a planar section of the geometry.

• Drawing views are associative and will update to reflect changes in themodel.


Page 3-1

Module

Assembly and Multi-Model DrawingsIn this module, you learn how to create a drawing of an assembly

model. You also learn how to create a drawing with two or more

models in the same drawing.

Objectives


• Create a drawing of an assembly and display exploded views in thedrawing.

• Create a drawing to display views of more than one model in thesame drawing.



NOTES

ASSEMBLY DRAWINGSTo create a drawing of an assembly, you must specify an assembly as themodel for your drawing. The system then displays the name and type ofthe model along the bottom of the window.

Adding Exploded ViewsWhen placing an exploded view of an assembly, you can place it in thedefault explode state, as shown in Figure 1. However, if the assembly hasmultiple explode states, the system allows you to specify which one todisplay. If you place the default exploded view on the drawing, itautomatically updates with any changes that you make to the explode statein the assembly. You can also modify the exploded view on the drawing.

Figure 1: An Exploded View

MULTI-MODEL DRAWINGSIn some cases, you may need to use two or more models on the samedrawing, as shown in Figure 2. For example, you may want to create adrawing of a component and the assembly in which it is used. By creatinga multi-model drawing, you can display an assembly and all of itscomponent parts. You can also do the following:

• Clearly show all part and assembly dimensions in the same drawing.


Assembly and Mul t i Model Drawings Page 3-3

NOTES

• Display several members of the same family with different sets offeatures.

• Work with detail items, tables, repeat regions, and so on, that belong toany one of the models.

Figure 2: Multi-Model Drawing

Adding the Model to the DrawingBefore you can use a model in a view, you must add it to the drawing;however, adding a model to a drawing does not place a view of thatmodel—it only enables the drawing to reference the model so that you canplace a view. After you add the model, the system retrieves the part orassembly when you retrieve the drawing.

Setting the Active Model

To add views of a particular model, you must set that model as active, butonly one model on the drawing can be the active model at any given time.The system references the active model any time that it needs a defaultmodel to perform an operation, such as when you add views or regeneratea model. The last model that you add to a drawing becomes the currentmodel.

The system sets the drawing scale of each model independently. You maynotice the scale value at the bottom-left corner changing when you setdifferent models. To modify the scale for each model, it must be active.



NOTES

Tips for Working with Multiple Models in a Drawing

Pro/ENGINEER allows you to use as many models on a drawing as youneed; however, you must add all models that are shown in the drawing tothe drawing before you can display them as views.

When working with multi-model drawings, keep in mind the following:

• The system retrieves all part and assembly files when it retrieves thedrawing. This may dramatically increase your retrieval time for thedrawing.

• Deleting the views of a model does not disassociate the model fromthe drawing. Once you add a model to a drawing, the system associatesthat drawing to it, regardless of whether any views are showing. Todisassociate a model, you must delete that model from the drawing.

• When you add relations, the system adds them to the current model;therefore, you should select a model before adding a relation.



NOTES


Goal

To create drawings of assembly models and drawings with more than

one model.

Method

This exercise creates a new drawing of an assembly and creates thedrawing views including exploded views. We also add a second model tothe drawing and create views of second model.

EXERCISE 1: Displaying Multiple Models in aDrawing

Figure 3: Upper Housing Drawing



NOTES

Task 1. Retrieve the end cap part and the upper housing assembly toview the models that you are going to include in this drawing.

1. Retrieve PLUNGER_CAP.PRT and become familiar with itsgeometry.

2. Shade and spin the model to view all sides of the part.


4. Retrieve UPPER_HOUSING.ASM and become familiar with itsgeometry.

5. Shade and spin the model to view all sides of the part.


Task 2. Create a new drawing called UPPER_HOUSING that includesthe upper housing assembly and the end cap part, as shown in Figure 3.

1. Type [UPPER_HOUSING] as the drawing name. Clear the Usedefault template check box. Confirm thatUPPER_HOUSING.ASM is the drawing model and specify a C-size sheet and landscape orientation.

Task 3. Place a cross-sectional exploded view of the upper housingassembly on the drawing. The cross-section should be planar and passthrough the middle of the housing.

1. Click Views > Section > Exploded > Done. For the cross-sectiontype, accept the defaults and click Done.

2. Place the view in the bottom right corner of the sheet and select thedefault exploded view. From the SEL STATE menu, confirm thatthe Default check box is selected and click Done.



NOTES

Figure 4: Exploded View

3. Once you have placed the view, orient it to look like the viewshown in Figure 4. From the ORIENTATION dialog box, clickSaved Views to display any views that have been. From the list ofsaved views, select SIDE and click Set > OK.

4. Create a new cross-section that passes through the middle of theassembly parallel to the screen. Click Create, accept the defaults,and click Done. Type [A] as the cross-section name. Pick datumplane ADTM3 to create the cross-section. Select ADTM3 byclicking Sel By Menu > Sel By Menu > Datum > Name >ADTM3.

5. Do not display arrows on the drawing at this time. Press the middlemouse button to continue drawing creation without displaying anycross-section arrows for section A-A.

6. After you have placed the view on the drawing, turn off the displayfor the datum planes and coordinate systems.

Task 4. Place a projection view of the upper housing assembly to theleft of the first view. Explode the view without a cross-section. Place asecond projection view directly above section A-A. Unexplode the viewwithout a cross-section.

1. Create an exploded projection view to the left of section A-A, asshown in Figure 5. Click Add View > Exploded > Done. Locatethe view to the left of section A-A.

2. Create an unexploded projection view above section A-A, asshown in Figure 5. Click Add View > Done. Locate the viewabove section A-A.



NOTES

Figure 5: Projection Views

Task 5. Add the plunger cap part as a second model to the drawing.Place a general view of this model in the upper left corner of the drawingand orient the view, then place a projection view to the right of the firstview of the plunger cap.

1. Click Dwg Models > Add Model. A dialog box lists all of theparts and assemblies in the current directory. SelectPLUNGER_CAP.PRT and click Open.

2. Add a general view of the plunger cap to the drawing. Place theview in the upper left corner of the sheet. Click Add View > Done.Locate the view in the upper left corner of the sheet.

3. Orient the view as shown in Figure 6. From the REFERENCE 1drop-down list, select BACK and pick DTM2 on the screen. Fromthe REFERENCE 2 drop-down list, select RIGHT and pick DTM1.After orienting the view correctly, click OK.



NOTES

Figure 6: Plunger Cap

Note:

Although you turned off the display of datum planes earlier,the system temporarily turned them back on when orientingthe view. After you place the view, the system automaticallyturns off the datum plane display.

4. Create a projection view of the plunger cap to the right of the firstview, as shown in Figure 7. Click Add View > Done. Locate theview to the right of the first view of the plunger cap.

Figure 7: Projection View



NOTES

Task 6. Add a 3-D view of the upper housing assembly by setting theupper housing as the active model. Any views that you add to a drawingare for the active model only.

1. Click Dwg Models > Set Model. Select UPPER_HOUSING fromthe list of models associated with the drawing. It is now the activemodel.

Note:

You can only add views of the active model. Before placing aview on a drawing that contains multiple models, make surethat the correct model is active. Pro/ENGINEER displays thename and type of the active model at the bottom of the screen.

2. Create an exploded view in a 3-D orientation, as shown inFigure 8. Click Add View > General > Exploded > Scale >Done.

Figure 8: 3-D View Location


Assembly and Mult i Model Drawings Page 3-11

NOTES

3. Place the view on the left side of the sheet and select the defaultexploded view. Locate the view on the left side of the drawing.From the SEL STATE menu, confirm the Default check box isselected and click Done. Type [.75] as the view scale.

4. Retain the view in the default orientation. From the ORIENTATIONdialog box, click OK.

5. Save the drawing and close the window.



NOTES


• You can create a drawing of an assembly and display exploded viewsin the drawing.

• You can create a drawing to display views of more than one model inthe same drawing.


Page 4-1

Module

Modifying ViewsIn this module, you learn about various ways to modify drawing

views.

Objectives


• Change view location, orientation, and origin.

• Remove views from a drawing.

• Modify view boundaries and callouts.



NOTES

MANIPULATING VIEWSAfter you initially place views in your drawing, you should manipulatethem so that they accurately reflect the associated part and dimensions.

Changing View Location, Orientation, and OriginOften, you must change the location, orientation, or origin of a view inorder to improve the appearance of your drawing.

Location

You can easily move a view from one place to another within a drawing;however, you should consider if it is a parent or child of any other view inthe drawing. By default, moving the parent view will cause the child viewto move accordingly. In version 2000i2, you can unalign projected viewsand move them away from the parent view. This may be useful in caseswhere there is limited space on the drawing.

Alignment

You can now align a general view to another general view or projectionview. This will establish a parent/child relationship between the views andcause them to move together.

Orientation

You can change the initial orientation of a general view at any time afteryou create it, but keep in mind that the change also affects the orientationof any dependent views. When reorienting a general view,Pro/ENGINEER warns you that the change is also going to affect the childviews as well and highlights them on the screen.

Note:

When you reorient a general view that has a cross-section, thecross-section must remain parallel to the screen. If the changein orientation does not allow for this, Pro/ENGINEER does notreorient the general view.


Modi fy ing Views Page 4-3

NOTES

Origin

Every view has an origin, which controls how the system moves andlocates the view, and how the view is affected by changes in the model.By default, the origin of a drawing view is at the intersection of the twodiagonals connecting the corners of the view extent, as shown in Figure 1.

Figure 1: View Origin

As an example, you may want to prevent a projection view fromoverlapping other views when the size of the model changes, as shown inFigure 2. To set the origin of a drawing view, you can parametricallyreference model geometry and the selected point on the model will remainfixed as the view changes.

Note:

The setting of the view origin does not change the currentposition of the view. The change in origin is only noticeablewhen views update to changes in the model geometry.

Figure 2: Changing the View Origin

View origin

Original views

Origin setat edge

Views overlap with defaultViews have no overlap with edge set as origin



NOTES

When specifying a new view origin, keep in mind the following:

• For a general view, the point on the geometry becomes fixed.

• If the feature you reference becomes suppressed or deleted, the systemautomatically issues a warning and indicates the name of the view withthe missing origin.

• For a projection or auxiliary view, the system transfers the selectedpoint onto a ray passing through the origin of the parent view in thedirection of the projection. This projected point becomes the origin ofthe view.

• You should control the location of the view origin when entities arerelated to a view. For example, if draft geometry is related to a view,locate the geometry with respect to the view origin, not the geometryof the model in the view.

Controlling Hidden Line DisplayThe prefered method for controlling hidden and tangent line display onyour drawing views is to manually set the display of the individual views.This will allow you to override the environment display settings, whichmay vary each time the drawing is opened, Figure 3.

Figure 3: Display Modes

Removing Views from a DrawingYou can remove views from a drawing by either permanently deletingthem or temporarily erasing them from the display. You can only delete aview if it does not have any child views dependent on it.

WireframeTangent Solid

Hidden LineTangent Centerline

No HiddenTangent Phantom



NOTES

Tips & Techniques:

Erasing and resuming views is an effective technique forimproving the view regeneration and repaint times ofcomplicated drawings.

When erasing views, keep in mind the following:

• If a note or symbol is attached to the erased view as well as otherviews, the system also erases the leaders attached to the erased view.When you resume the view, the leaders reappear.

• You cannot show dimensions on another view if you showed them onthe erased view.

• If you erase the parent of a detailed view that contains a local areacross-section, the system transforms the local cross-section in thedetailed view into a full cross-section.

Modifying the View ScaleWhen you place a view on a drawing, the system controls the scale in oneof two ways: by giving it its own separate scale value or by using thedrawing scale. Pro/ENGINEER uses the drawing scale in the lower leftcorner of the screen to control all views that are created without anindependent scale. Modifying this global value will cause all views usingit to update automatically. In addition, when you create any new viewsusing the drawing scale, the system uses this value.

When placing a detailed or a general view, you can specify a separatescale value to control only that view and any associated child views.

Modifying View Boundaries and CalloutsUsing various methods, you can change the:

• Boundaries of a detailed view, partial view, or local cross-section toshow more or less detail.

• Shape of the detailed view callout.

• Geometry that the view displays.

Changing the Boundary

By redefining the boundary, you can modify a view to show more or lessgeometry. In addition, you can also show the boundary in the detailed or



NOTES

partial view or erase it from those views. Figure 4 shows one detailed viewwith the outer boundary and another without it.

Figure 4: Manipulating the View Boundary

Changing the Callout

The size of the spline that you use to create the detailed view determinesthe size of the callout. Therefore, to modify the size of the callout, youmust modify the spline. You are presented with several options to definethe shape of the callout to be used, Figure 5.

Outer boundary shown Outer boundary erased



NOTES

Figure 5: Detailed View Callout

Moving the Reference Point

You can move the reference point of the view to a new location to changethe geometry that is displayed in the view. The reference point is attachedto specific model geometry; if the geometry moves, the view boundarymoves with it.

Changing a Cross-SectionIn Pro/ENGINEER, you can modify cross-sections in the following waysto achieve the correct display:

• Change the boundary, reference point, and outer display of a localcross-section to show greater or lesser detail of a particular area.

• Remove it from the view entirely or replace it with another cross-section.

• Change the direction in which the cutting arrows point.

• Add a cross-section to a view that was originally placed without one.

• Change the cross-hatching to display correctly for the material to beused for this model.



NOTES

Changing Cross-Hatching

You can modify the cross-hatching displayed for a cross-section bychanging the angle, spacing, line style, and offset distance between thelines, as well as adding or removing lines. After you have defined a cross-hatching pattern, you can save it in a library for future use on otherdrawings.

Assembly Cross-Hatching

When modifying the cross-hatching in an assembly view, you can alter thecross-hatching displayed for each component intersected by the cuttingplane, Figure 6.

Figure 6: Modified Assembly Cross-Hatching

Altering Assembly ViewsIn many cases, you many need to create a drawing of an assembly or showa view of the assembly on a part drawing in order to visualize the part.When you alter an assembly view for this purpose, keep in mind thefollowing:

• The system must now retrieve every model that it uses in the assemblywhen it retrieves the drawing. If the assembly is large, the retrievaltime could be significant. To avoid this problem, you can create asnapshot.



NOTES

• The view may be cluttered by too many hidden lines, which couldmake it more difficult to visualize the model. To change the linedisplay, you can use several options.

• You may not be able to view the components on the default explodedview, but you can modify an exploded assembly view.

Creating a Snapshot

When you want to show an assembly view on a part drawing withouthaving to retrieve the assembly and all of its parts, you can convert theassembly view to a snapshot—a collection of 2-D draft entities that are notassociated to the corresponding model. You can then delete the assemblymodel from the drawing because none of the drawing views reference it.

When you convert a view into a snapshot, the following changes occur:

• All visible geometry, axes, datums, and other entities in the viewbecome draft entities.

• All draft entities that were previously associated to the view becomefree.

• All attached drawing items (notes, gtols, symbols, draft dimensions,etc.) become unattached.

• All visible model dimensions become draft dimensions.

• The system deletes the original view from the drawing.

• If you select a view that has child views, the system also makes thoseinto snapshots and deletes the original views.

• If you select a view that has erased children, the system deletes thoseas well.

Note:

Once you convert a view to a snapshot, the system no longerparametrically associates it to the original model in any way.Therefore, if you change the model, the snapshot geometrydoes not update to reflect the changes.

Removing Entities

You can remove entities from a view by controlling the display ofmembers in an assembly or by using Z-Clipping to exclude geometrybehind a specified plane.



NOTES

Controlling the Display of Assembly Members

By setting the display for each component in an assembly individually, asshown in Figure 7, you can display some members in Hidden Line modeand others in No Hidden mode, as well as blank individual componentsfrom the screen. You can also manipulate individual edges of the modelby blanking them or changing their display.

Figure 7: Changing Member Display

Excluding Geometry Behind a Specified Plane

Using Z-Clipping, you can modify the view display by excluding all thegeometry behind a specified plane. This technique is useful if you want tosee some of the hidden lines but not all of them, as shown in Figure 8.Using Z-Clipping, you can remove many background lines quickly. Whenyou perform Z-Clipping in a view, keep in mind the following:

• If the system cannot regenerate the reference for the clipping plane, Z-Clipping does not take effect for the view (it displays an errormessage).

• You cannot perform Z-Clipping in the following types of views:unfolded cross-sectional, area cross-sectional, exploded, andperspective.

Original assembly Assembly members changed toPhantom Transparent



NOTES

• The Z-Clipping of a detailed view is always the same as that of itsparent. You cannot modify it individually.

• You can place the Z-Clipping reference point on any view.

Figure 8: Using a Z-Clipping Plane

Creating Exploded Views

When you place an assembly view on a drawing, you can place it in adefault-exploded state. In Drawing mode, you control which componentsexplode, as well as the actual explode distance, as shown in Figure 9.

Figure 9: Assembly Explode Modification

Complex fan assembly before applying plane Complex fan assembly after applying plane

Default explode View after modification



NOTES

When modifying an exploded view, you must specify preferences, thedirection of movement, and the components to move:

• Setting up preferences – Preferences enable you to control whetherthe components move incrementally or smoothly, the number ofcomponents to move at a time (one or many), and whether childcomponents should move with the parent components.

• Controlling the direction of movement – While changing theexplode distances for a component, you can select a variety of modelreferences to set the explode direction.

• Specifying the components to move – You can drag all componentsto a new location at the same time so that the system offsets them atthe same explode distance.

Note:

If you modify an exploded view in the drawing, the viewbecomes independent of the exploded view of the assembly. Ifyou make changes to the exploded state in the assembly, thesystem does not reflect them in the modified drawing view.

CONFIGURATION FILE OPTIONSTable 1 lists the available configuration file options that you can use tomodify views in a drawing.



NOTES

Table 1: Configuration File Options Controlling ViewModificationOption Value Description

drawing_view_origin_csys none

name of CSYS

Specifies a coordinatesystem as the origin of anewly created view.

hlr_for_quilts no

yes

Includes or excludes quiltsfrom the hidden lineremoval process (notcross-sectional views).

pro_crosshatch_dir directory path Specifies the defaultdirectory for a library ofcross-hatching patterns.

variant_drawing_item_

sizes

no

yes

If set to “no,” all itemsmoved or copied to adifferent sheet retain thesame size on paper.

If set to “yes,” some itemsscale and/or reposition tobe the same size orposition on the paper,while other items scaleand/or reposition to be thesame size or position onthe screen.

DRAWING SETUP FILE OPTIONSTable 2 lists the available drawing setup file options that you can use tomodify views in a drawing.



NOTES

Table 2: Drawing Setup File Options Controlling ViewModificationOption Value Description

axis_line_offset 0.1

value

Sets the default distancethat a linear axis extendsbeyond its associatedfeature.

circle_axis _offset 0.1

Value

Sets the default distancethat a circular cross-hairaxis extends beyond thecircular edge.

datum_point_shape cross

dot

circle

triangle

square

Controls the shape of adatum point.

datum_point_size .3125

value

Controls the size of thedatum points and sketched2-D points.



NOTES

radial_pattern_axis_circle no

yes

Sets display mode for axesof rotation that areperpendicular to the screenin radial pattern features. Ifset to “no,'' displays axislines (Figure a). If set to“yes,'' a circular sharedaxis appears, and axis linespass through the center ofa rotational pattern (Figureb).



NOTES


To improve the display and clarity of drawing views.

Method

In the first exercise, the drawing views of the plunger body aremanipulated. You move views, reorient views, and modify the cross-hatching of cross-section views.

In the second exercise, the drawing views of the barrel are manipulated,the scale of the sheet and individual views are modified, and the display ofeach view in the drawing is made independent of the environment settings.

In the third exercise, you alter the display of views on a multi model andassembly drawing by modifying the explode distances and cross-hatching.



NOTES

EXERCISE 1: Manipulating Views


Task 1. Clean up the drawing display by changing the scale of the viewsand repositioning the views and cross-sectional arrows.

1. Retrieve PLUNGER_BODY.DRW.

Note:

If you did not finish the plunger body drawing earlier, retrievePLUNGER_BODY_MOD_VIEWS.DRW.



NOTES

2. If the datum planes and datum coordinate systems appear on thescreen, turn them off using the icons on the toolbar and repaint.

3. Click Modify from the DETAIL menu and pick the scale value inthe lower left corner of the screen. Type [2.00] as the new scalevalue.

4. Reposition the views, as shown in Figure 10. Click Views > MoveView. Pick a view from the screen to move; the system highlightsthat view and its child views. Place the views in the correctposition.

Tips & Techniques:

To access the ASYNCHRONOUS pop-up menu, hold downthe right mouse button. Select MODIFY ITEM and pick aview. Pick the view again to move it.

5. Move the cross-sectional arrows displayed in the upper left view tothe positions shown in Figure 11. Click Move from the DETAILmenu and pick one of the arrows. Move the arrows to the correctposition.

Figure 11: Cross-Section Arrow Locations

6. For Detail 1, Detail 2, Section A-A, and Section B-B, repositionthe view names to place them directly beneath the correspondingviews. Click Move and pick one of the view names. Place itunderneath the correct view.



NOTES

Task 2. To prevent the environment settings for the hidden and tangentline display from affecting the drawing, set the display of each view.

1. Click Views > Disp Mode > View Disp. Select the 3-D view, bothcross-sectional views, and both detail views, then click Done Selto display the DISP MODE menu.

Tips & Techniques:

To speed up the selection process, you can press the middlemouse button instead of clicking Done Sel.

2. Click No Hidden > Tan Solid. Click Det Indep to set the displaymode of the detailed views differently from that of their parentsthen click Done.

3. Pick the remaining views on the drawing and press the middlemouse button. Click Hidden Line > Tan Solid > Done.

Task 3. Decrease the scale of the 3-D view of the plunger.

1. Click Modify View > View Type and select the 3-D view.

2. Click Scale > Done.

3. Type [.8] as the scale value.

Task 4. Modify the location of the tab in the upper-left view. Notice thatthe detailed view no longer displays the correct geometry. Redefine thereference point that you used for the detailed view so that it is attached tothe tab.

1. Retrieve PLUNGER_BODY.PRT.

Note:

If you used PLUNGER_BODY_MOD_VIEWS.DRW in thisexercise, retrieve PLUNGER_BODY_MOD_VIEWS.PRTinstead.

2. Modify the tab shown in Figure 12, change the horizontal 0.50location dimension to [0.25], and click Regenerate.



NOTES

Figure 12: Modify the Tab Location

3. Click Window > PLUNGER_BODY.DRW. DETAIL 1 shoulddisplay as shown in Figure 13.

Note:

The tab is no longer centered in the detailed view because thereference point for the boundary of that detail was not anappropriate choice. You picked the side edge of the plungerbody instead of the edge of the tab.

Figure 13: New Tab Location

4. Move the reference point of DETAIL 1 to the edge of the tab.Click Views > Modify View > Ref Point and pick DETAIL 1 asthe view to alter. The original reference point displays in the upperleft view. Pick the edge of the tab as the new reference, as shownin Figure 13. Click Done Sel > Done.

5. Activate the window for the PLUNGER_BODY.PRT.

6. Modify the location of the tab back to [0.50].

Modify the locationof this tab

Original referencepoint

New referencepoint



NOTES

7. Activate the window for the PLUNGER_BODY.DRW and noticethe change that occurred in DETAIL 1.

Task 5. Reduce the amount of geometry shown in the DETAIL 2 view.Modify the view boundary to include only one of the flanges.

1. Click Views > Modify View > Boundary and pick DETAIL 2.

Figure 14: Original Detailed View

2. Press the left mouse button to sketch a spline around one of theflanges. Use the middle mouse button to finish the splineboundary. Click Done from the VIEW BNDRY menu. Repaint thescreen, if necessary. Click Done/Return from the VIEWS menu.

Figure 15: New Detailed View

Task 6. Modify the cross-hatching shown in Sections A-A, B-B, andDETAIL 2. Create new cross-hatching and save it for future drawings.

1. Click Modify > Xhatching. Pick Section A-A and Section B-B,then click Done Sel.



NOTES

2. Add a second line to the cross-hatching. Click Add Line, type [45]as the angle, type [.1] as the offset value, type [.44] to define thedistance between each segment of the new line.

3. In the MODIFY LINE STYLE dialog box select CENTERLINE fromthe STYLE drop-down list. Select DOTFONT from the LINE FONTdrop-down list. Click Apply > Close.

4. Decrease the spacing of the cross-hatching. Click Spacing and useHalf and Double to achieve spacing similar to that shown in Figure16.

Figure 16: User-Defined Cross-Hatching

5. Save this cross-hatching for future use in other drawings. ClickSave, type [user_def] and click Done.

Note:

The system automatically updates the cross-hatching onDETAIL 2 because a detailed view obtains its cross-hatchingfrom its parent view by default.

6. Decrease the spacing of the cross-hatching of DETAIL 2. ClickXhatching, pick DETAIL 2, and click Done Sel.

7. The MOD XHATCH menu appears with most of the optionsunavailable because the cross-hatching of a detailed view is thesame as its parent view by default. Click Det Indep to make thedetailed view independent of its parent view.

8. Click Spacing > Half. If the cross-hatching is acceptable, clickDone > Done/Return.



NOTES

Figure 17: Detailed View Cross-Hatching

9. Save the drawing and close all the windows.



NOTES

EXERCISE 2: Altering the Display of Views




NOTES

Task 1. Retrieve BARREL.DRW and change the scale of the sheet andthe detailed view. If the views are too close, move them to new positions.

Note:

If you did not finish the barrel drawing earlier, retrieveBARREL_MOD_VIEWS.DRW.

1. Modify the scale of the sheet .to [1.25].

2. Modify the scale of DETAIL 1 to [2.5].

3. Position the view names directly beneath the views.

Task 2. Modify the cross-hatching in Section A-A, retrieve the cross-hatching that you saved in the previous exercise and add cross-sectionalarrows to the view in the upper right corner of the sheet.

1. Click Modify > Xhatching. Pick Section A-A and click Done Sel.

2. Click Retrieve > user_def >Open. Click Done from the MODXHATCH menu.

3. Click Views > Modify View > Add Arrows. Pick Section A-A andthen pick the upper right view to place the arrows. ClickDone/Return.

4. Move the arrows so that they display as shown in Figure 19.

Figure 19: New Cross-Hatching and Arrows



NOTES

Task 3. Set the display of each view on the drawing so that it isindependent of the environment settings.

1. Click Views > Disp Mode > View Disp. Select all of the views onthe drawing, then click Done Sel.

2. Click Hidden Line > Tan Solid > Done.

3. Save and close the drawing.



NOTES

EXERCISE 3: Modifying the Scale of Views




NOTES

Task 1. Set the display of each view on the drawing so that it isindependent of the environment settings using UPPER_HOUSING.DRW.

1. Retrieve UPPER_HOUSING.DRW. (If you did not complete thisdrawing, retrieve UPPER_HOUSING_MOD_VIEWS.DRW.)

2. Click Views > Disp Mode > View Disp. Pick the two views of theplunger cap and click Done Sel.

3. Click Hidden Line > Tan Solid > Done to display hidden lines inthese views and tangent lines as solid lines.

4. Pick the upper housing views and press the middle mouse button.Click No Hidden > Tan Phantom > Done.

Task 2. Modify the scale of the views. Move some of the views to anew sheet and change their positions.

1. Click Dwg Models > Set Model > PLUNGER_CAP >Done/Return.

2. Click Modify and select the scale value in the lower left corner ofthe screen, type [3.00] and click Done/Return to modify the sheetscale for the plunger cap.

3. Make the UPPER_HOUSING assembly the active model.

4. Change the sheet scale for the upper housing to [1.25].

5. From the DRAWING menu, click Sheets > Switch Sheets, pickthe two plunger cap views and the 3-D assembly view, click DoneSel > Done > Done/Return.

6. Click Move View and select a view to move. Position the views asshown in Figure 20.

Task 3. Alter the right side projection of the plunger cap part to includea cross-section. The cross-section should cut through the center of the part.After you create the cross-section, change the cross-hatching.

1. Click Views > Modify View > View Type. Pick the right sideprojection of the plunger cap part and click Section > Done.

2. If the datum planes do not appear, turn them on. Repaint thescreen.



NOTES

3. Click Full > Total Xsec > Done.

4. Click Create > Planar > Done.

5. Type [B] as the name, select DTM1 as the cutting plane and pickthe left view for the arrows.

Figure 21: Section B-B

6. Turn off the datum planes.

7. Click Modify > Xhatching. Pick Section B-B and click Done Sel.

8. Decrease the default spacing of the cross-hatching by half. ClickSpacing > Half, then click Done.

Task 4. Modify the orientation of the 3-D view of the upper housingassembly. Retrieve the assembly and spin the model to an appropriate 3-Dview. Save the orientation as a named view and use it in the drawing.

1. Retrieve the UPPER_HOUSING.ASM. (If you retreived theUPPER_HOUSING_MOD_VIEWS.DRW at the start of thisexercise, retrieve UPPER_HOUSING_MOD_VIEWS.ASM instead.)

2. Spin the model to an orientation similar to the one shown in Figure22.



NOTES

Figure 22: New 3-D Orientation

3. Click View > Orientation. Expand Saved Views in theORIENTATION dialog box to display any saved views. Type [3D]for the name and click Save > OK.

4. Click Window > Close Window. Click Window > Activate toactivate the drawing window.

5. Click Views > Modify View > Reorient.

6. Pick the upper 3-D assembly view to reorient. From the list ofsaved views, select 3D and click Set > OK.

Task 5. Change the explode distances of the components in the upperhousing assembly. Set the preferences to allow the movement of all fourbolts at the same time.

1. Click Mod Expld, select the isometric view, and click Redefine >Position.

2. Click Preferences, select MOVE MANY, and click Close.

3. Set the direction of movement to be normal to the top of the upperhousing part. From the MOTION REFERENCE drop-down list,select PLANE NORMAL, click Query Sel, and pick the top surfaceof the upper housing, as shown in Figure 23. When the correctsurface highlights, click Accept to finish.



NOTES

Figure 23: Plane Normal Surface

4. Reposition the plunger assembly below the upper housing. ClickQuery Sel and pick the plunger assembly inside the cavity of theupper housing. Click Next until the plunger assembly is selected,then click Accept > Done Sel. Press the left mouse button anddrag the plunger assembly to a position similar to the one shown inFigure 24.

Figure 24: New Explode Positions in 3-D View

5. Pick the four bolt components and click Done Sel. Press the leftmouse button and drag the bolts to their new position.

Select this topsurface to movenormal to theplunger assemblyand the bolts

Locate theplunger assemblyhere

Normal surfacefor the plungercap

Plunger assembly

Plunger cap



NOTES

6. Move the plunger cap as shown in Figure 24. In the MOTION

REFERENCE area of the dialog box, click and pick a suitablenormal surface for the plunger cap.

7. Pick the plunger cap and click Done Sel. Drag the plunger cap toits new position and press the left mouse button to finish the move.Click Done Sel > OK.

8. Return to sheet one and move the views so they are evenly spacedon the drawing. Click Sheets > Previous > Done/Return.

9. Modify the explode distances on the views of the upper housingassembly. Click Modify View > Mod Expld, then pick the view inthe lower right corner of the drawing.

10. Click Redefine > Position.

11. Click Preferences, select MOVE MANY, and click Close.

Note:

The system does not save the preferences that you use tomodify an exploded view. You must redo the preferences thenext time that you modify explode distances.

12. Set the direction by picking a vertical edge on the plunger bodypart. From the MOTION REFERENCE pull-down list selectENTITY/EDGE, then pick the vertical edge of the plunger body partas shown in Figure 25.

Figure 25: Vertical Motion Reference

13. Change the positions of the components as shown in Figure 26.

Select this edgefor the motionreference.



NOTES

Figure 26: New Explode Positions

Task 6. Modify the explode distances in the lower left view to match thedistances in Section A-A by changing the type of view to a general viewand then back to a projection view. The system recreates the projectionbased on the new positions of the components.

1. Click Views > Modify View > View Type. Pick the view in thelower left corner of the sheet, and click General > Done.

2. Click View Type and pick the same view again.

3. Click Projection > Done. Pick Section A-A as the view fromwhich to create the projection.

Figure 27: Exploded Projection



NOTES

Task 7. Modify the cross-hatching in Section A-A of the upper housing.For the plunger part in the upper housing assembly, retrieve a saved cross-hatching.

1. Click Modify > Xhatching, then pick Section A-A and click DoneSel.

2. Click Next Xsec until you highlight the cross-hatching in theupper housing part.

3. Click Spacing from the MOD XHATCH menu. Click Half twiceto decrease the cross-hatching spacing. Click Angle from theMOD XHATCH menu and select 135 to change the angle of thecross-hatching.

4. Click Next Xsec to make the plunger cap active. Click Spacing >Value and type [0.055].

5. Click Next Xsec > Retrieve, select the USER_DEF hatching andclick Open > Done.

Figure 28: Section A-A Cross-Hatching




NOTES


• You can change view location, orientation, and origin.

• You can remove views from a drawing.

• You can modify view boundaries and callouts.



Page 5-1

Module

Showing DimensionsIn this module, you learn how to show dimensions in a drawing and

manipulate their display.

Objectives


• Show detail items in a drawing.

• Change the location of dimensions and switch them to other views.

• Convert location dimensions to ordinate.

• Create a hole chart.



NOTES

DRAWING DETAILSYou can show detail items created in Part mode or Assembly mode on adrawing, keeping in mind the following:

• It is generally quicker to show a dimension on the drawing and move itthan to recreate the dimension.

• Because of Pro/ENGINEER’s associativity, you can modify thedimension value at the drawing level and the system reflects it at thepart or assembly level.

• Drawing templates can be used to initially show dimensions, createsnap lines offset from the view border and perform Clean Dimensionoperations.

Showing Detail ItemsBefore you create new dimensions in your drawing, you should showdimensions (and other detail items) that were created at the part or theassembly level.

Specifying the Type of Detail Item to Show

The SHOW/ERASE dialog box, as shown in Figure 1, allows you to showdifferent types of detail items in a drawing. You can show any number ofdetail items at one time, but it easier to show one type in the drawing at atime.


Showing Dimens ions Page 5-3

NOTES

Figure 1: Show/Erase Dialog

Specifying Items to Show

• Feature – Shows detail items for a selected feature in a viewdetermined by the system. This option is useful if you did not build themodel yourself. You can use the MODEL TREE to make sure that youselect every feature.

• View – Shows detail items for a selected view.

• Feat & View – Shows detail items for a selected feature and view. Thisoption gives you the most control in displaying items.

• Part – Shows detail items in specific parts within an assemblydrawing.

• Part and View – Shows detail items in a specific part and view withinan assembly drawing.

• Show All – Shows all detail items in all views. If you use this methodto show items, you should also preview the drawing.

Note:

When showing part dimensions in an assembly drawing, theView and Show All options do not display part dimensions.



NOTES

Using Filtering Options

• Erased – Show only items that have been previously erased from thedrawing, without showing items that have never been shown before

• Never Shown – Show items that have never been shown on thedrawing.

Previewing Detail Items

You can view detail items in the drawing and decide if you want to showthem. You can show all of them, erase all of them, or select individualitems to display.

Manipulating Detail ItemsAfter you show detail items in a drawing, you can erase them, change theirlocation, and locate them on snap lines.

Erasing Detail Items

To erase dimensions and other detail items from a drawing, you would usethe same technique that you use to show dimensions

Changing the Location

The quickest way to manipulate dimensions and other detail items is toaccess the pop-up menu in an asynchronous mode

Using Snap Lines

You can define snap lines on individual drawings to locate detail itemssuch as dimensions, notes, geometric tolerances, symbols, and surfacefinishes. The system positions the snap lines relative to the view outline,or a selected model edge or datum plane.

You can manipulate snap lines by changing the offset distances,modifying the length, or deleting them from the drawing.

When working with snap lines, keep in mind the following:

• You can place snap lines on layers and blank them, but once you blankthem, you cannot add new items to them. Existing items continue tosnap.



NOTES

• When you delete a view, the system deletes its snap lines also.

• You cannot add entities of one view to another view’s snap line.

• If you place a dimension at the intersection of two snap lines, you cansnap to either or both of the snap lines.

Changing the Display of Dimensions in a DrawingCleaning Up the Display of Dimensions

You can improve or clean up a cluttered display of linear dimensions in adrawing. You can use this option after you initially display dimensions ona drawing to move those that are overlapping one another or to move themoff the model itself. You can also use this technique to automaticallylocate your dimensions according to exact specifications such as thefollowing:

• A certain distance away from a view.

• A certain distance away from each other.

• Centered in between the witness lines.

You can also use the CLEAN DIMENSIONS dialog box to flip thedimension arrows and create snap lines where the dimensions are located.

Note:

The Clean Dims option only affects linear dimensions. Youcannot use it to modify the display of diametric, radial, orangular dimensions.

Using Dual Dimensioning

Dual dimensioning allows you to show dimensions in English and metricunits at the same time. Through the drawing setup file, you can set thedimensions to dual and specify their format. The following drawing setupfile options affect dual dimensioning:

• dual_dimensioning

• dual_secondary_unit

• dual_digits_diff

• decimal_marker

• dual_dimension_brackets



NOTES

Placing Dimensions as Ordinate

You can place your dimensions in the drawing as ordinate dimensions orconvert them after you place them. Ordinate dimensions use a singlewitness line with no leader, and are associated with a baseline reference,as shown in Figure 2. When converting dimensions, you can also add a jogto the witness line to improve the spacing of the dimensions.

Figure 2: Ordinate Dimensions

Changing the Display of Ordinate Dimensions

The drawing setup file option iso_ordinate_delta improves thedisplay of the offset between an ISO-ordinate dimension and the witnessline. If you set it to yes, the system uses the drawing setup file optionwitness_line_delta. If you set it to no, the offset differs byapproximately 2 mm. The default value is no to preserve old drawings. Tospecify the orientation of ordinate dimensions, you can set the drawingsetup file option orddim_text_orientation to parallel orhorizontal.

Adding Text to a Dimension

Using the MODIFY DIMENSION dialog box, you can add a prefix (R) orpostfix (TYP) to a dimension, and change the dimension symbol. You canalso specify that the system always show the symbol, regardless of theother dimensions, by changing the dimension text from @D to @S. Thiswould be useful, for example, if you wanted to indicate the direction of thewidth of the model. You could change the symbol to width and specifythat Pro/ENGINEER always show the symbol instead of the value.



NOTES

Manipulating Dimension Arrows and Extension Lines

After you clean up the dimension display on a drawing, you can alsomanipulate the arrows and extension lines in the following ways:

• Flip arrows – You can change the direction of linear, radial, anddiametric dimension arrows, as shown in Figure 3.

Figure 3: Flipping Arrows

• Clip the extension lines – Pro/ENGINEER automatically determinesif it should clip extension lines when it performs an overlap checkwhen plotting, as shown in Figure 4. To check if extension lines areproperly clipped, you can plot to the screen.

Figure 4: Clipping Dimensions

• Make jogs – You can jog the extension line of dimensions or theleader of a note, as shown in Figure 5.

Figure 5: Making a Jog

• Add breaks – You can add simple breaks in individual extension linesand cutting lines as shown in Figure 6, or create parametric breaks

Arrows flipped



NOTES

around other extension lines so that they update when the modelchanges.

Figure 6: Simple Break

• Align sets of dimensions – You can line up sets of dimensions andmove them as a group. This option is very useful when working withordinate dimensions.

• Change the dimension type – You can change a diameter dimensionto a linear dimension, or vice versa, as shown in Figure 7.

Figure 7: Changing the Diameter Type

• Erase the witness lines – The system automatically displaysdimensions with witness lines, but you can easily remove them toreduce the clutter, as shown in Figure 8.

Break added aroundgeometry



NOTES

Figure 8: Line Display

• Change the arrow style – You can remove the dimension arrow, orchange it to a dot, double arrow, slash, integral, or box, as shown inFigure 9.

Figure 9: Various Arrow Styles

Hole ChartsYou can now automatically create hole charts that relate to drawings. Inaddition, you can create tables for axes and datum points. This newfunctionality automatically creates a table for drillable hole features in aspecified view.

Hole charts include:

• List Type: Holes, Datum Points, Datum Axes

• Location in X and Y coordinates (Z for datum points).

• Sort Setup: X, Y, Diameter, Default.



NOTES

• Hole Naming: Numerical versus Alphanumerical.

• Ability to add additional columns for user-defined parameters.

• Ability to paginate tables.

Figure 10: Hole Chart



NOTES


To show and manipulate dimension on a drawing.

Method

In the first exercise, dimensions are shown for features in any view and forfeatures in a selected view. After the dimensions are shown, they areswitched to different views, moved, and the default display is enhanced.

In the second exercise, dimensions are shown in their symbolic form andthe default symbolic name is modified.

In the third exercise, the dimensions on a multi-model and assemblydrawing are displayed as dual dimensions.



NOTES

EXERCISE 1: Showing Dimensions on a Drawing

Figure 11: Plunger Drawing

Task 1. Show dimensions on the plunger body drawing for a selectedfeature in any view.




NOTES

Note:

If you did not finish the plunger body drawing earlier, retrievePLUNGER_BODY_SHOW_DIMS.DRW.

2. Turn off all datum features.

3. Click Show/Erase. Accept Show, click , and acceptFeature as the Show By option.

4. Show the dimensions for the first protrusion. Click Query Sel andpick the outside surface of the cylinder in the front view, as shownin Figure 12.

5. When the system highlights the correct feature, click Accept.

Figure 12: Front View

6. Click Query Sel and pick the inside cut in the front view, asshown in Figure 12. When the system highlights the correctfeature, click Accept.

7. Repeat this for the small hole in the front view.

8. Show the dimensions for the small hole and the flat cut in theupper left view, as shown in Figure 13.

9. Click Done Sel > Accept All > Close.

First protrusionInside cut

Small hole



NOTES

Figure 13: Small Hole

Task 2. Manipulate the dimensions shown by switching them to otherviews and changing their location on the sheet.

1. Click Move from the DETAIL menu and pick the .750 dimensionin the front view. Move it to its new position, as shown in Figure14, and press the left mouse button to place it.

2. Pick the 1.50 dimension. While moving the dimension, press theright mouse button to flip the arrows. Move it to its new positionas shown in Figure 14 and press the left mouse button to place it.

3. Repeat this for the 1.125 and .250 diameter dimensions.

Figure 14: Dimension Locations

4. Pick the 3.00 dimension. Move it to its new position, as shown inFigure 14.

5. Repeat this for the .100 and the .300 linear dimensions.

Small hole

Flat cut



NOTES

6. Click Move Text and pick the .100 linear dimension to move thetext to the other side of the elbow.

7. Click Move and pick the .100 diameter dimension. Move it to itsnew position, as shown in Figure 14 and press the left mousebutton to place it.

8. To move the dimension text to the other side of the leader, clickMove Text and pick the dimension.

9. Switch the remaining dimensions in the lower left view to SectionA-A. Click Switch View and pick both dimensions. Press themiddle mouse button and pick Section A-A.

10. Once you have moved the dimensions to the new view, repositionthem as shown in Figure 14.

11. Click Flip Arrows and pick the remaining dimensions as necessaryso the drawing looks like Figure 14.

Task 3. Show dimensions for a selected feature in a selected view on thedrawing.

1. Click Show/Erase and select Feat_View.

2. Show the dimensions for the holes in Section B-B. Click QuerySel from the menu and pick the surface of the through hole. ClickAccept when the correct feature highlights.

3. Repeat this for the counterbore hole in Section B-B, as shown inFigure 15.

Figure 15: Section B-B

Through hole

Counterbore hole



NOTES

4. Click Query Sel from the menu and pick the surface of the tabfrom DETAIL 1, as shown in Figure 16. Click Next until the correctfeature highlights, then click Accept.

5. Repeat the previous step for the surface of the round in DETAIL 1,as shown in Figure 16. Click Done Sel > Sel To Remove. Pick the.500 dimension. Click Done Sel to finish the selections.

6. Clear the With Preview check box.

Figure 16: DETAIL 1

Task 4. Use the asynchronous pop-up menu to move the dimensionsdisplayed in Section B-B and DETAIL 1 to the locations shown inFigure 17.

1. Press the right mouse button, click Modify Item, and pick adimension.


Round

Tab



NOTES

2. Experiment with the dimension handles that are available for thedifferent dimension types.

3. Display the .05-radius dimension on the other side of the tab.While the asynchronous pop-up menu is still active, pick the .05dimension.

4. Press the right mouse button and click Mod Attach. The systemdisplays all possible locations in magenta. Pick the round surfaceon the other side of the tab and press the middle mouse button tofinish.

5. Move the dimension to the correct position and click Flip Arrowsto display the arrows correctly. Press the middle mouse button toexit the asynchronous pop-up menu.

6. Move and flip the arrows on the remain dimension for DETAIL 1and SECTION B-B so the drawing looks like Figure 17.

Task 5. Show the dimensions for the flanges in the upper left view.

1. Click Show/Erase > Show > . Select FEAT_VIEW. Pickthe flange shown in Figure 18 to show the dimension, then closethe dialog box.

Figure 18: Flange Dimensions

2. Move the dimensions to the positions shown in Figure 18 using thetechniques discussed earlier.

3. Click Switch View to display the .05 thickness dimension inDETAIL 2, then reposition it as shown in Figure 18.

Pick this flangeto displaydimensionsPick this

witness lineas thebaseline



NOTES

4. If the witness lines are extending too far, clip them back. ClickClip and pick the .05 dimension.

5. Press the middle mouse button to finish selecting. Drag one of thewitness lines to a more appropriate position and use the left mousebutton to place it.

6. Repeat the previous step for the second witness line.

Task 6. Convert the .650 and 1.700 dimensions in the upper left view toordinate.

1. Click Modify > Dim Params > Dim Type > Ordinate Dim.

2. Accept the default of Create Base and pick the 1.700 dimension.Specify a baseline by picking the witness line on the left side.

3. Pick the .650 dimension to convert it to ordinate.

4. Show the dimensions for the other flanges as ordinate dimensions.Click the Options tab and select SWITCH TO ORDINATE.

5. Pick the .00 as the ordinate baseline dimension and press themiddle mouse button to finish. Pick each flange to display thedimensions as ordinate. Close the dialog box.

6. Click Align and pick each ordinate dimension. Use the middlemouse button to finish selecting and place the dimension above theview.

7. Create a draft grid to locate some jog points. Click Modify > Grid> Draft Grid > Grid On.

8. Click Grid Params > X&Y Spacing and type [.2].

9. To turn the grid snap on, click Utilities > Environment. In theENVIRONMENT dialog box, select Snap to Grid and click OK.

10. Create jogs in the ordinate dimensions to increase the spacebetween them. Click Make Jog and pick the .650 dimension. Picka point on the witness line to start the jog and another to finish it.

11. Press the middle mouse button to finish creating the jog. Createjogs on the ordinate dimensions as shown in Figure 19.



NOTES

Note:

Once you have created jogs, you can use the Move option tochange the locations of the points.

Figure 19: Ordinate Jog Locations

12. Turn off the grid and the grid snap. Click Modify> Grid > DraftGrid > Grid Off > Done/Return to turn off the grid.

13. Click Utilities > Environment, then clear the Snap to Grid checkbox and click OK.

Task 7. Show dimensions for any feature in a selected view only, thenuse the Clean Dims option to clean up the dimension display quickly.

1. Click Show/Erase then select View for the SHOW BY option.

2. Pick the view in the upper left corner and the view in the lower leftcorner of the drawing. Close the dialog box.

3. Clean the dimension display by moving the dimensions off of theviews and one another. Click Tools > Clean Dims.



NOTES

4. Pick the upper and lower left views as the views to clean. Press themiddle mouse button to finish selecting.

5. Click Apply to apply the default settings and close the dialog box.

6. Using the options that you used earlier in this exercise, manipulatethe dimensions so that they display as shown in Figure 20. Youmust erase some of them.

7. Click Erase and select SELECTED ITEMS for the Erase Byoption. Pick the dimensions to erase, then click Close.

Tips & Techniques:

When you place a dimension near two snap lines, the systemprompts you to specify a snap line to which it should snap thedimension. You can use the Next option to highlight one orboth snap lines and then click Accept.


Task 8. Append text to the dimensions in DETAIL 2 to annotate themas being typical.

1. Click Modify > Dimension, then pick the .050 and .125dimensions in DETAIL 2. Click Done Sel to finish selecting.



NOTES

2. Click the Dim Text tab, then type [ TYP] in the POST FIX area.

3. Click OK.

4. Click Delete from the DETAIL menu and pick any unused snaplines.

5. Click Done Sel to finish.

6. Turn off the display of the snap lines. Click Utilities >Environment. Clear the Snap Lines check box, click OK to closethe dialog box and repaint the screen.

Note:

The system does not plot snap lines, regardless of whether theydisplay on the screen.

Task 9. Show the datum axes for the holes on the drawing, and thenmanipulate them to display them in the correct sizes.

1. Show axes by view. Click Show/Erase > Show > . Click

if it is currently selected. Select View for the SHOW BYoption. Click the Preview tab and click With Preview.

2. Pick the upper left view, then click Accept All.

3. Pick Section B-B. The system shows two axes, one on top of theother. Click Sel To Keep, pick one of the axes to retain, and clickDone Sel.

4. Pick DETAIL 1 and click Accept All.

5. Show the axes for the first protrusion. Select Feature for theSHOW BY option, pick the first feature protrusion listed in theMODEL TREE, then click Done Sel.

6. Click Sel To Remove and pick the axes in the 3-D view.

7. Show the axes for the tabs in the front view and the left side view.Select Feat_View for the SHOW BY option, pick the two tabsdisplayed in the front view, and click Done Sel. Click Accept Allto retain the displayed axes.

8. Repeat this for the axes of the tabs in the left side view.



NOTES

9. Show the axes for the .100 diameter hole in Section A-A and theleft side view. Pick the hole and click Done Sel. Pick Section A-Aas the view in which to show the axes and click Accept All toshow them.

10. Repeat the previous step for the left side view. Turn off thepreview, click the Preview tab and clear the With Preview checkbox. Close the dialog box.

11. Manipulate the lengths of the axis segments in the front view.Click Move and pick the segment of the axis that you want tomove. Place the axis in the new position. Notice that you onlymoved one segment.

Tips & Techniques:

To move all four segments of an axis perpendicular to thescreen, click Move and pick the name of the axis. The systemmoves all four segments together.

12. Use the techniques discussed previously to change the lengths ofthe axes on the drawing as shown in Figure 21 to turn off thedisplay of the axis names and repaint the screen.

Figure 21: Axis Locations




NOTES

EXERCISE 2: Showing Dimensions in SymbolicForm




NOTES

Task 1. Retrieve BARREL.DRW. Show the dimensions of the barrel byusing the Show All option, then switch them to the correct views.

Note:

If you did not finish the barrel drawing earlier, retrieveBARREL_SHOW_DIMS.DRW.

1. Click Show > from the SHOW/ERASE dialog box. Ifnecessary un-select the axes icon. Select Show All from the SHOWBY area. When the system asks you to confirm, click Yes, thenclose the dialog box.

Note:

When you use Show All, Pro/ENGINEER attempts to showthe dimensions in the first view that you created on thedrawing. If it cannot show a dimension in that view, it thenattempts to show it in the second view, etc.

2. Switch the dimensions for the oval cut to DETAIL 1. Click SwitchView and pick the .10 and the 1.38 radius dimensions. Press themiddle mouse button to finish selecting, and pick the DETAIL 1view. Note that the dimensions move to DETAIL 1, but they areattached to a pattern instance outside of the view’s boundary.

3. Click Erase from the SHOW/ERASE dialog box and clickSelected Items. Pick the .10 and the 1.38 radius dimensions andclick Done Sel.

4. Show the cut dimensions in DETAIL 1. Click Show and selectFeat_View, then pick the oval cut in DETAIL 1. Close the dialogbox, then move the dimensions to the positions shown inFigure 23.



NOTES

Figure 23: DETAIL 1 Dimension Locations

5. Switch the dimensions for the patterned holes to the view on theright side of the drawing. Click Switch View and pick the 1.25,.75, and 72.0 dimensions. Press the middle mouse button to finishselecting, then pick the view on the right. Reposition thedimensions as shown in Figure 24.




NOTES

6. From the SHOW/ERASE dialog box, click Erase > , andaccept Selected Items to erase the 90.0 dimension from thedrawing. Pick the 90.0 dimension.

7. Click Done Sel > Close to finish.

8. Reposition the remaining dimensions as shown in Figure 25.


Note:

The system does not display the width of the barrel and thehole depth dimensions because it cannot show dimensions inalign cross-sections, and no other view is suitable for thosedimensions.

Task 2. Set part of the dimension to display in symbolic form, thenchange the symbolic names of the dimensions so that they are moremeaningful.

1. Click Modify > Dimension, then pick the .75, and 4.00dimensions. Press the middle mouse button to finish.

2. Click the Dim Text tab from the MODIFY DIMENSION dialog boxto change the dimension text for the selected dimensions.

3. In the text area, remove the diameter symbol and change the @Dto an @S. Click OK to close the dialog box.



NOTES

4. Pick the dimension D7 in the upper right view and click Done Selto change the names of the displayed symbols.

5. From the MODIFY DIMENSION dialog box, click the Dim Text taband type [CYLINDER_DIA] for the name.

6. Click OK to close the dialog box. Repeat this step to change D2 to[BARREL_DIA].

Task 3. Show the datum axes for the holes on the drawing and thenmanipulate them.

1. Click Show > from the SHOW/ERASE dialog box. SelectView from the SHOW BY area.

2. Pick the right side, left side, and DETAIL 1 views. Close thedialog box.

3. Click Advanced > Draw Setup to change the axes to display at anangled orientation with a pattern circle.

4. In the drawing setup file, change the setting ofradial_pattern_axis_circle to yes and click OK.Repaint the screen to view the changes, as shown in Figure 26.

Figure 26: Axis Locations




NOTES

EXERCISE 3: Displaying Dual Dimensions




NOTES

Task 1. Retrieve UPPER_HOUSING.DRW. Show the dimensions ofthe end cap by using the By Feat option and selecting the features fromthe MODEL TREE.

Note:

If you did not finish the upper housing drawing earlier, retrieveUPPER_HOUSING_SHOW_DIMS.DRW.

1. Open the drawing and switch to sheet 2.

2. Click Views > Dwg Models > Set Model > PLUNGER_CAP to setthe plunger cap as the active model.

3. Click Show and ensure is the only item selected. ClickShow All > Yes > Accept All. Close the dialog box.

4. Click Tools > Clean Dims and pick the two views of the plungercap to clean the dimension display by moving them off the model.

5. Click Done Sel. Accept the default options and click Apply >Close.

6. Reposition the dimensions as shown in Figure 28.




NOTES

Task 2. Show some dimensions of the parts in the upper housingassembly and move them to other locations.

1. Switch back to Sheet 1.

2. Click Show > from the SHOW/ERASE dialog box. SelectPART_VIEW and pick the left bolt in the lower left view.

3. Select FEAT_VIEW and pick the outside surface of the plunger andthe tab on the upper housing in the lower right view.

4. Erase any dimensions that do not appear in Figure 29. Click Erasethen pick the dimensions. Click Done Sel to finish and close thedialog box.

Figure 29: Showing Part Dimensions

Task 3. Convert the dimensions on this drawing to dual dimensions sothat you can display English and metric values for each dimension.

1. Click Advanced > Draw Setup to retrieve the drawing setup file.

2. For dual_dimensioning, selectPRIMARY[SECONDARY]from the VALUE drop down list.Click Add/Change > OK.

3. Repaint the screen if needed.

4. Clean up the dimension display by moving dimensions, ifnecessary.



NOTES


Figure 30: The Finished Drawing



NOTES


• You can show detail items in a drawing.

• You can change the location of dimensions and switch them to otherviews.

• You can convert location dimensions to ordinate.


Page 6-1

Module

Creating DimensionsIn this module you learn how to create various types of dimensions.

Objectives


• Create driven, reference and draft dimensions.

• Modify the dimensioning scheme of the model.



NOTES

ADDING DIMENSIONS TO A DRAWING

Creating Driven DimensionsIf you want to view a specific dimension on a particular feature you cancreate a driven dimension, which is driven by the model geometry andreflects changes in the model. When you add them to a drawing, they donot alter the design intent of the model and you cannot modify them.

Ordinate Dimensions

Ordinate dimensions can drive the model or the model can drive thedimension. Pro/ENGINEER displays them in a drawing using a singlewitness line without a leader. The system associates ordinate dimensionswith a baseline reference of .00. For all dimensions to reference the samebaseline, they must share a common plane or edge that you can use as abaseline reference. You can erase the baseline reference from the drawingto improve the appearance. You can also delete it if none of the drawingdimensions are using it and you do not need it any longer.

Creating a Baseline Reference

You must have a baseline reference to show ordinate dimensions in yourdrawing. To create a baseline, you must convert a linear dimension toordinate and pick one of its witness lines as the baseline reference. Youcan then use it to show new dimensions in an ordinate form.

Tips & Techniques:

If a suitable baseline already exists, you can use it to convertdimensions to ordinate. If you create another baseline on top ofan existing one, the system displays both of them on thedrawing.

You can convert dimensions that are already showing on the drawing toordinate, as well as convert ordinate dimensions back to linear at any time.However, when converting ordinate dimensions back to linear, the systemdoes not automatically remove the baseline for that dimension from thedrawing. You must delete it manually.


Creat ing Dimensions Page 6-3

NOTES

Driven Ordinate Dimensions

You can create a driven dimension in an ordinate form initially by usingan existing dimension to create the baseline. You can then use thisbaseline to create any new driven dimensions as ordinate.

Note:

You can change a standard driven dimension to ordinate, butyou cannot convert an ordinate driven dimension back tostandard. To do this, you must delete it and create it again as astandard dimension.

Creating Reference DimensionsReference dimensions behave in the same manner as driven dimensionsexcept that they do not show tolerances. You can denote a referencedimension with parentheses ( ) or by appending REF after the dimensionvalue.

In some cases, reference dimensions already exist in the model. Thesystem automatically displays them when you use the SHOW/ERASEdialog box to show dimensions. You can create new reference dimensionsat the part level by using the Setup option in the PART menu. If youcreate them by setting up named views in the model, you can show thereference dimensions in their true size.

Modifying the Dimensioning SchemeTo change the design intent of the model while in Drawing mode, you canmodify the dimensioning scheme of the model. You can modify thedimensioning scheme, the shape of the section (of sketched features only),the depth type, the feature’s direction, etc.

Any dimensions that you deleted from the feature’s section disappear fromthe drawing. However, you must actually show any dimensions that youcreated in the section; the system does not display them automatically.

Creating Draft DimensionsUsing the method to create driven dimensions, you can also createreference, associative, or non-associative draft dimensions on a drawing to



NOTES

dimension draft entities. The system displays reference draft dimensionsand reference dimensions in the same way.

Associative Draft Dimensions

To create an associative draft dimension, you can use one of the followingthree methods:

• Set the drawing setup file option Associative Dimensioningto Yes and pick draft entities to dimension.

• Set the configuration file optionCreate_Drawing_Dimensions_Only to Yes and pick modelentities to dimension.

• Set the configuration file option Drawing_Models_Read_Only toYes and pick model entities to dimension.

Note:

If the dimensions are non-associative, you must perform theprocedures on them individually. If you move or rescale thedraft entity, the system does not update the dimension or moveit with the draft entity.

When a draft dimension is associative, you can perform the followingprocedures on a draft entity and its dimension at the same time:

• Delete items.

• Switch items to another sheet.

• Translate and rotate items.

• Rescale items, including changing drawing format size.

CONFIGURATION FILE OPTIONSTable 1 lists the available configuration file options that affect the creationof dimensions on a drawing.



NOTES

Table 1: Configuration File Options Affecting DimensionCreationOption Value Definition

create_fraction_dim no

yes

If set to yes, displays alldimensions as fractions.

create_drawing_dims_only no

yes

If set to yes, storesdimensions that you createin the drawing in the actualdrawing. If set to no, storesthem in the part.

drawing_models_read_

only

no

yes

Makes the model in adrawing read-only.

Highlight_new_dims yes

no

Highlights newly-createddimension in red; good fordrawings with many dims

parenthesize_ref_dims no

yes

If set to yes, displaysreference dimensionswithin parentheses. If setto no, appends thedimension with REF.



NOTES


Goal

To create driven and reference dimensions on a drawing and modify the

dimensioning scheme of the model.

Method

In the first exercise, you learn how to create dimensions on a drawing andlearn when it is appropriate to do so. You erase some model dimensionsand create some driven dimensions. You also modify the dimensioningscheme to change the design intent of the model.

In the second exercise, you modify the dimensioning scheme of the barrelfrom within the drawing and show any new dimensions on the drawing.



NOTES

EXERCISE 1: Creating Dimensions on a Drawing

Figure 1: Plunger Drawing

Task 1. Retrieve PLUNGER_BODY.DRW as shown in Figure 1, andcreate a reference dimension for the cut in the upper left view. If you didnot finish the plunger body drawing earlier, retrievePLUNGER_BODY_CREATE_DIMS.DRW.

1. If the datum planes, datum coordinate systems, and axis namesappear on the screen, turn them off.

2. Select Create > Ref Dim and pick the edge shown in Figure 2 withthe black end of the pointer. Locate the dimension by pressing themiddle mouse button. Use Move to reposition it, if necessary.



NOTES

Figure 2: Reference Dimension

Task 2. Change the dimensioning scheme in the lower left view toaccommodate manufacturing needs.

1. Select SHOW/ERASE. Select Erase > to erase thedimensions from the drawing that you no longer need, to avoidchanging the design intent of the part.

2. Pick the .300 dimension in the lower left view and the 1.750dimension in the upper left view. Select Done Sel to finishselecting and close the dialog box. This will remove theseparametric dimensions from view.

3. Move the .500 dimension on the left side of the upper left view tothe lower left view. Select Switch View and pick the .500dimension. Press the middle mouse button to finish selecting, andpick the lower left view as the view in which to display thedimension.

4. Convert the .500 and 3.000 dimensions in the lower left view toordinate. Select Modify > Dim Params > Dim Type >OrdinateDim and pick the 3.000 dimension. Pick the left side witness lineas the baseline, as shown in Figure 3. Pick the .500 dimension toconvert it, as well.

Select this edgeto dimension

Placedimensionhere



NOTES

Figure 3: Converting to Ordinate Dimension

5. From the DETAIL menu, select Align > Pick Many and create apick box around the two dimensions and the baseline to align theordinate dimensions. Press the middle mouse button to finishselecting, then place the dimensions.

6. Select Create > Dimension > Ordinate and pick the .00 baselinethat you already created to create driven dimensions to locate thecuts in the lower left view, as shown in Figure 4.

7. Pick the edge of the flat cut and press the middle mouse buttonwhere you want to display the dimension. Pick the second edgeand press the middle mouse button where you want to display thatdimension.

8. Select Align from the DETAIL menu and align all of the ordinatedimensions

.

Figure 4: Creating Ordinate Dimensions

Select thisas thebaseline

Select this dimensionfor the first drivendimension reference

Select this edge forthe second drivendimension reference.



NOTES

Task 3. To accommodate a change in the design intent, dimension thetabs on the open end of the plunger body from the other tabs. Modify thedimensioning scheme on the model and show any new dimensions on thedrawing.

1. Select Modify > Dim Params > Scheme. Select Query Sel andpick the tab shown in Figure 5.

2. Select Next until the tab highlights, then select Accept. A sub-window appears along with the dialog box for the tab elements.

Figure 5: Modify Dimensioning Scheme

3. Select SECTION and select Define. Select Sketch. Close anyinformation windows that appear.

4. Select Utilites > Sketcher Preferences, clear the Grid check boxand apply changes to turn off the sketcher grid display.

5. Select View > Default to change to the default view.

6. Select Sketch > Dimension >Normal and pick the center of thesketched arc to create a new dimension to locate the tab to theother tab on the left side of the model

7. Pick the cylindrical surface of the other tab on the front of themodel and place the dimension with the middle mouse button.Select Center and Close from the TYPE dialog box. Delete the.50 dimension.

8. Select Sketch > Done and OK to finish the section. Repaint thedrawing to show the changes.

Modify thescheme of thistab first

Modify thescheme of thistab second



NOTES

Note:

The .500 location dimension disappeared from the drawingbecause you deleted it. The system does not automaticallyshow the new dimension. To display it, you must show itagain.

9. Repeat the procedure for the tab in DETAIL 1. After changing thedimensioning scheme of the second tab, show the new dimensionon the drawing.

10. Select Show > and select FEAT_VIEW, then pick the tabshown in Figure 6. Close the dialog box and move the dimensionas shown in Figure 6.

Figure 6: New Dimensioning Scheme


Show dimensionsfor this tab



NOTES

EXERCISE 2: Modifying the Dimensioning Scheme


Task 1. Retrieve BARREL.DRW. The dimensioning scheme of theradial holes in the barrel includes a linear dimension from the center axisto the axis of the radial hole. Change the design intent to use a diameterdimension instead.

Note:

If you did not finish the plunger body drawing earlier, retrieveBARREL_CREATE_DIMS.DRW.



NOTES

1. Select Modify > Dim Params > Scheme to change thedimensioning scheme of the hole pattern from a linear dimensionto a bolt circle diameter

2. Select Query Sel and pick the hole shown in Figure 8.

3. Select Next until the hole is highlighted, then select Accept. Asub-window appears along with the dialog box for the hole.

Figure 8: Hole Dimensioning Scheme

4. From the dialog box select Diameter for the PLACEMENT TYPEdrop-down menu. Select the green checkmark to accept.

Task 2. Create two driven dimensions in Section A-A for the barrelwidth and hole depth.

1. Select Create > Dimension. Accept the defaults, then pick thebottom edge of the barrel in Section A-A. Press the middle mousebutton where you want to display the dimension.

2. Pick the horizontal edge of one of the blind holes and press themiddle mouse button to place the dimension. Use Move toreposition the dimension, if necessary.

3. Select Modify > Dimension then pick the 2.50 diameter dimensionand click Done Sel to change the dimension text that appears forthe new diameter dimensions.

Modify thescheme of thishole



NOTES

4. From the MODIFY DIMENSION dialog box, select the DIM TEXTtab. In the text area, remove the diameter symbol and change the@D to @S. In the NAME area, type [CENTERLINE_DIA], thenclose the dialog box.

5. Reposition the CENTERLINE_DIA dimension as shown inFigure 9.

6. Select Create > Dimension and pick the axes shown in Figure 9to create a driven dimension for the location of the patterned holes.Use the middle mouse button to place the dimension and repositionit, if necessary.

Figure 9: Angle Dimension


Pick this axisfrom which todimension

Pick this axis fromwhich todimension



NOTES


• You can create driven, reference and draft dimensions.

• You can modify the dimensioning scheme of the model.



Page 7-1

Module

Creating NotesIn this module, you learn how to create a drawing note, add it to a

drawing, and manipulate it in various ways. You also learn how to

use style libraries to store text styles for your drawings.

Objectives


• Create notes on a drawing.

• Manipulate drawing notes.

• Use style libraries to store text styles.



NOTES

ADDING NOTES TO A DRAWINGA drawing note is text that you add to a drawing as supportinginformation.

Specifying the Content of a NoteDrawing notes are composed of text. You can include parametricinformation in notes.

Dimensions and System-Defined Parameters

When you add model, reference, or driven dimensions, as well as system-defined parameters (number of instances in a pattern) to a drawing note,the system updates the note to reflect any changes that you make to theassociated model design. After you create a note in Pro/ENGINEER, thedimensions and parameters automatically convert to their symbolic form.

User-Defined Parameters

To associate specific information to a model (such as the color, cost, orvendor), you can create a user-defined parameter at the part, assembly, ordrawing level. To place a user-defined parameter in a drawing note, youmust precede the name of the parameter with an ampersand (for example,&total_holes).

Drawing LabelsYou can use the following drawing labels in a note, preceded by anampersand:

• &todays_date – Adds the date of the note’s creation. To control theformat of the date, set the configuration file optiontodays_date_note_format.

• &model_name – Adds the name of the model used in the drawing.

• &dwg_name – Adds the name of the drawing.

• &scale – Adds the scale of the drawing.

• &type – Adds the model type (part or assembly).

• &format – Adds the format size.


Creat ing Notes Page 7-3

NOTES

• &linear_tol_0_0 through &linear_tol_0_000000 – Adds lineartolerance values for one to six decimal places.

• &angular_tol_0_0 through &angular_tol_0_000000 – Adds angulartolerance values for one to six decimal places.

• &current_sheet – Adds the current sheet number.

• &total_sheets – Adds the total number of sheets in the drawing.

• &dtm_name – Adds the name of a datum plane.

User-Defined SymbolsYou can add a user-defined symbol to a note such as electronic symbol orwelding symbols by entering [&sym(symbol_name)]. For example, toinclude the symbol delta in a note, enter [&sym(delta)] using thekeyboard.

Special Symbols

You can add common drawing symbols to a note by selecting them fromthe Symbol Palette tool displayed on your screen during the note creationprocess.

Manipulating NotesOnce you have placed a note on a drawing, you can change it in variousways.

Cutting, Copying and Pasting Notes

You can manipulate detail items using the Cut, Copy, and Pastecommands. These commands use a clipboard to allow a variety of detailitems, such as notes, symbols, draft entities, and tables to be copied to thesame sheet, a different sheet, or a different drawing.

The Cut, Copy, and Paste commands are located under the new EDITmenu, or you can place them on the toolbar by customizing the screen.

Moving a Note

Using various techniques, you can change the location of a note in adrawing at any time, depending on the note type. To move a free note orone that has a standard leader, you can use the Move option to select the



NOTES

note text and move it to any location. If you created the note with a normalor tangent leader, the system constrains the note leader to a particularorientation, so when you select the text, you can only move it along theleader line. To rotate the note, you must modify the attachment of thearrow. Since the arrow must stay normal or tangent to the entity, if youmove the arrow, the note moves with it.

The quickest way to move a note is to access the pop-up menu inasynchronous mode. Hold down the right mouse button and pick the note.The system displays it in magenta and surrounds it with small "handles"atvarious locations. Each handle represents a particular movement, asillustrated in Figure 1. Press the right mouse button again to display a pop-up menu of available options. The default option is Move.

Figure 1: Asynchronous Move

Changing the Content of a Note

You can use the following methods to change the text that composes anote:

• Modify one line of text at a time – You can change a selected line oftext in the message area, but you cannot add or delete text lines in thenote.

• Modify the entire note through the system editor – Using thesystem editor, you can modify an entire note, add lines, delete lines, orchange the content of any text line.

• Modify the entire note through an editor in Pro/ENGINEER –Using the editor provided with Pro/ENGINEER, accessed through theasynchronous menu, you can add lines, remove lines, or change thecontent of any text line. You can also access the Symbol Palette tool,eliminating the need to use ASCII character representations forsymbols.

Free movement

Moveattachment

point of arrow

Move textwithout moving



NOTES

Attaching the Leader to Multi-Line Text

You can attach the note leader to any line of text by entering theplaceholder parameter @o (alphabetic character, not zero) at the beginningof that line, as shown in Figure 2. Once you add this placeholder to a line,the leader automatically attaches to that line. You can add the parameter tothe line as you create the note or add it later. If you add @o to more thanone line of note text, the system attaches the leader to the first linecontaining it.

Figure 2: Leader Attachment

Entering Superscripted and Subscripted Text

To add superscripted and subscripted text to a note, you can create itseparately or include it in a text line with regular text on either side of it.However, you can superscript or subscript only plain text and specialsymbols; you cannot do so with dimensions, instance numbers, otherparameter values, or geometric tolerances. The system positionssuperscripted and subscripted text by reference to the closest line ofregular text, whether that text belongs to another note, or to the note thatyou are currently creating.

• To create superscripted text, enter [@+text@#].

• To create subscripted text, enter [@-text@#].

• To create both super- and subscripted text, enter: [@+text@#@-text@#]

@o added to thebeginning of thesecond line



NOTES

Creating a Box Around a Note

You can enclose a note in a box by entering [@[text@]] The systemencloses only the text that you enclose in the bracket. If you place thebrackets on different text lines, it encloses a box around each line, asshown in Figure 3.

Figure 3: Boxed Note

Modifying the Text Style

Once you have placed a note on a drawing, you can change its text style.However, Pro/ENGINEER sometimes selects more than just the text thatyou specifically pick. For example, if you choose one word in the first lineof the note, the entire line might highlight because Pro/ENGINEERseparates the note into text fields that you can manipulate them separatelyfrom the rest of the note, as shown in Figure 4. The system breaks up textstrings into portions wherever there is a new line of text or a parameter(such as dimensions), and encloses each portion of the text in {} (braces),giving it an integer label. Labels identify the initial order of the text, andany attributes for that portion.

∅ 1.50 THROUGH HOLE {0:^An^B}{1:&d23}{2:THROUGH HOLE}

ONE PLACE {3:ONE PLACE}

Figure 4: Text Fields

To break the note into smaller fields, you can add braces and an integerlabel. When editing text or adding more lines, you can copy the attributesof a portion of text by using the same integer label. If you do not want tocopy the attributes of any existing lines, use an integer label that you havenot used already.

The system separates the attributes that you can define into two groups:those that only affect the selected fields and those that affect the entirenote, as shown in Table 1.

Table 1: Text Style AttributesAttributes Affecting

Selected Fields

Attributes Affecting

the Entire Note



NOTES

Text font Line spacing

Text height Placement angle

Text thickness Justification

Text width Color

Slant angle Mirroring

Underlining

Saving Notes

To avoid having to retype standard notes, you can save them for future usein other drawings. Using the configuration file option pro_note_dir,you can set up a library of standard notes that contain parameters, specialsymbols, and super- or subscripted text. However, you cannot includeinformation concerning characteristics such as text height, text width, textangle, and slant angle. You must change this information manually afterplacing the note. You can save a note using one of these methods:

• Use the same editor that you are using to modify it, but be sure to saveit as plain text with a .txt extension.

• Use the INFO pull-down menu at the top of the Pro/ENGINEER mainwindow to write it to a file. The system saves each selected note as aseparate file. When specifying the filename, do not add theextension—Pro/ENGINEER automatically appends a .1 to a uniquefilename. If you type the same filename, it increments this extensionautomatically to avoid overwriting an existing file.

Creating Style LibrariesYou often apply the same text style to many detail items on a drawing. Tosave time, you should store predefined styles in a style library so that youdo not have to specify attributes each time that you begin a new drawing.To define a style, you specify a name and attributes such as font, textheight, slant angle, etc. Pro/ENGINEER allows you to set up libraries on adrawing-by-drawing basis; that is, you cannot use a style library on morethan one drawing. To use a style library from one drawing on anotherdrawing, you can either use a table that has text using the different styles,or you can use a start drawing.

Using Tables to Access Styles

To use a style library from another drawing, create a table in a drawingthat uses the styles and save it; then retrieve it into the second drawing.Once you have brought the table into the second drawing, you can use its



NOTES

styles. You should then place the table on a layer and blank it so that itdoes not show on the drawing.

CONFIGURATION FILE OPTIONSTable 2 lists the available configuration file options that control drawingnotes.

Table 2: Configuration File Options Affecting Note CreationOption Value Definition

pro_note_dir directory_path Specifies a directory from whichto retrieve notes.

switch_dims_for_notes yes

no

Displays dimensions in theirsymbolic format during drawingnote creation.

symbol_palette_input yes

no

Controls display of the specialsymbol palette for note creation.

DRAWING SETUP FILE OPTIONSTable 3 lists the available drawing setup file options that control drawingnotes.

Table 3: Drawing Setup File Options Affecting Note CreationOption Value Definition

aux_font 1 filled

# font index name

Sets the auxiliary text font “#” asthe font identified in thespecified font index. Example:“2 leroy”

default_font font

font index name

Sets the default text font to thoselisted in the specified font index.

draw_attach_sym_height default

value

Sets the height of leader lineslashes, integral signs, and boxes.If set to “default,” uses the valueset for “draw_arrow_width.”

draw_attach_sym_width default

value

Sets the width of leader line forslashes, integral signs, and boxes.If set to “default,” uses the valueset for “draw_arrow_width.”



NOTES

draw_dot_diameter default

value

Sets the diameter of leader linedots. If set to “default,” uses thevalue set for“draw_arrow_width.”

yes_no_parameter_

display

yes_no

true_false

Controls the display of “yes/no”parameters in notes.



NOTES


Goal

To create and manipulate drawing notes.

Method

In the first exercise, you create parametric notes on the plunger bodydrawing and manipulate the text style of other notes on the drawing.

In the second exercise, you add a prefix to the increment angle betweenholes and also use a parameter to display the number of holes in the viewnote.

EXERCISE 1: Creating Notes on a Drawing




NOTES

Task 1. Retrieve PLUNGER_BODY.DRW and create a note for theholes in Section B-B. The note should include the diameter of the throughhole and the diameter and depth of the counterbore.

Note:

If you did not finish the plunger body drawing earlier, retrievePLUNGER_BODY_CREATE_NOTES.DRW.

1. Create a note with a standard leader for the holes in Section B-B.Click Create > Note > Leader > Make Note.

2. Accept the attachment defaults by clicking Done.

3. Pick the left side edge of the through hole in Section B-B.

4. Click Done Sel > Done. Locate the note as shown in Figure 6.

Figure 6: Note for Holes

5. Select the symbols from the SYMBOL PALETTE window and typethe text as shown in Figure 7. For example, you would enter &d63to have the .100 diameter dimension appear.

Figure 7: Parametric Note Text



NOTES

6. Click Done/Return.

7. Change the note below Section B-B to include the word PARTIALin the second line. Hold down the right mouse button and clickModify Item.

8. Pick the note below Section B-B. Hold down the right mousebutton again and click Edit Text.

9. In the ENTER TEXT dialog box, press the left mouse button at theend of the first line, press <ENTER>, and type [PARTIAL] to addthe word PARTIAL in the second line of the note.

10. Click OK and press the middle mouse button to finish modifyingthe note.

Task 2. Change existing text styles to generate your own libraries.Create a new text style to use for the cross-section names.

1. Click Modify > Text > Style Lib then click New.

2. Type [sections] for the style name.

3. From the FONT drop-down list, select Filled.

4. For the height, clear the default check box and type [.25].

5. Type [15] for the slant angle.

6. Specify the justification for the text by selecting CENTER from theJUSTIFY HORIZ drop-down list.

7. Click OK and then close the TEXT STYLE LIBRARY dialog box.

Task 3. Modify the text style for the word Section in the view notes.

1. Click Text Style and pick the word Section in the view notes forSections A-A and B-B. Click Done Sel.

2. From the STYLE NAME drop-down list, select SECTIONS. SelectApply > OK to make the changes.

Task 4. Define a new text style by copying the text style that you justcreated.

1. Click Style Lib > New.



NOTES

2. Type [sect_names] in the STYLE NAME area.

3. From the STYLE NAME drop-down list, select SECTIONS to copythe settings.

4. Type [.35] in the HEIGHT text box. Click OK > Close.

Task 5. Modify the text style for the view names for Sections A-A andB-B.

1. Click Text Style and pick A-A and B-B in the view notes for thesesections. Click Done Sel. From the STYLE NAME drop-down list,select SECT_NAMES. Click Apply > OK.

2. Reposition the notes directly beneath the corresponding views.Click Move and pick the view name Section A-A. Center itbeneath the view.

3. Repeat this for Section B-B.

Task 6. Create a note by reading in an existing text file from a library ofstandard notes. Locate the note in the lower left corner of the drawing.Change text in the first line of the note.

1. Click Create > Note > No Leader > File > Make Note.

2. Place the note in the lower left corner of the drawing.

3. Select note.txt. The note appears on the drawing. ClickDone/Return. Reposition the note, if necessary.

4. Click Modify, Text > Text Line to change the radius value in thenote. Pick the line of the note that includes the 0.10 callout. Thenote appears in the message area.

5. Backspace over the 0.10”and type [0.15] in its place.

Task 7. Modify the view note for DETAIL 1. Add a new line that callsout the number of places in which the tab exists on the model. Make thenote center-justified.

1. Click Modify > Text > Full Note.

2. Pick the view note for DETAIL 1. The system displays the note inthe system editor.



NOTES

3. Add a third line to the note and type [4 PLACES]. Close the editorto finish the note.

Tips & Techniques:

Instead of using the Full Note option to add a new line, youcould use the Edit Text option in the asynchronous pop-upmenu.

4. Click Text Style and pick the view note for DETAIL 1. SelectCENTER from the JUSTIFY HORIZ drop-down list. Click Apply >Close to finish the modification.

5. Reposition the view note for DETAIL 1 directly beneath the view.

Task 8. Create a note for the 1.125 diameter cut in the center view. Thenote should include the diameter dimension. Add the auxiliary font ofcal_grek to the drawing setup file and change the note to read µm insteadof mm. To do this, you must alter the default text fields.

1. Click Create > Note > Leader > Enter > Normal Ldr > MakeNote.

2. Click Arrow Head and pick the edge of the cut in the front view.Locate the note and enter it as shown in Figure 8.

Figure 8: Note Location

3. Click Move to reposition the note, if necessary. When you pick thenote, you can only move it along the leader because the leader isnormal. To rotate the note, click Move and pick on the arrow point.



NOTES

4. Click Advanced > Draw Setup. Set aux_font to[2_cal_grek], apply changes and close the PREFERENCESdialog box.

5. Change the text fields so that the first “m” in 20 mm is in its ownseparate text field. Hold down the right mouse button and selectMODIFY ITEM. Pick the new note. Press on the right mouse buttonand click Edit Text.

6. Separate the first “m” into a new text field. Change {3:FINISHSURFACE TO 20mm}, to {3:FINISH SURFACE TO20}{4:m}{5:m}.

7. Modify the text style for the first “m” in the note in the front view.Click Modify, Text > Text Style. Pick the first “m” in the note.Click Done Sel. Select CAL_GREK from the Font drop-down list.

8. For Height, clear the Default check box and type [0.15]. ClickApply > OK.




NOTES

EXERCISE 2: Creating Parametric Notes


Task 1. Retrieve BARREL.DRW and add a prefix to the incrementangle for the patterned holes to show the number of holes.

Note:

If you did not finish the barrel drawing earlier, retrieveBARREL_CREATE_NOTES.DRW.



NOTES

1. Show the note for the patterned holes in the left side view. ClickShow/Erase. Click Show > > Show All. Click Yes toconfirm.

2. Obtain the symbol for the number of patterned holes. Click Info >Switch Dims from the pull-down menu. Click Switch Dims againto return to the numeric form.

3. Add a prefix to the 72-degree increment angle in the right sideview. Click Modify > Dimension, pick the angle dimension andclick Done Sel. Click Dim Text and type [&p0 x] in the PREFIXarea. Click OK.

Task 2. Modify the view note for DETAIL 1 to include the number ofholes in the barrel. Use the parameter for the number of holes so that thenote updates automatically if the number changes.

1. Add a third line to the view note for DETAIL 1 that calls out thenumber of slots on the model. Hold down the right mouse button,click Modify Item, and pick the view note for DETAIL 1. Holddown the right mouse button again and click Edit Text.

2. Add a third line and type [&p0 PLACES]. Click OK to close thedialog box. Press the middle mouse button to finish modifying.




NOTES


• You can create notes on a drawing.

• You can manipulate drawing notes.

• You can use style libraries to store text styles.


Page 8-1

Module

Tolerances on DrawingsIn this module, you learn how to work with linear and geometric

tolerances at the part and drawing level.

Objectives


• Change the format and values of linear tolerances.

• Create and modify geometric tolerances.



NOTES

LINEAR TOLERANCESWhen you create a model, Pro/ENGINEER assigns it a tolerance standardof ISO (based on a set of tolerance tables) or ANSI (based on the nominaldimension’s number of digits). If you have a license for Pro/DETAIL, youcan set the tolerance standard for your model.

Showing Linear TolerancesThe system determines the linear tolerances for a model when you createit, but the configuration file options that you have established control theformat and the values. Pro/ENGINEER applies these settings to alldimensions, so you should set them to the values that you usually use toavoid having to change them later. Table 1 presents the four formats thatyou can specify for linear tolerances.

Note:

When you change the configuration file, it only affects newmodels. You must manually change existing models for eachdimension.

Table 1: Tolerance FormatsLimits Displays the dimensional

tolerance as the upper andlower limits.

Nominal Displays the dimension asa nominal dimension.

Plus Minus Displays the dimensionwith a plus value and aminus value.

Plus Minus Symmetric Displays the dimensionwith a single ± value.

Note:

To show linear tolerances at the part or assembly level, youcan use the ENVIRONMENT dialog box. To show them at thedrawing level, you can use the drawing setup file. However,the default tolerance format in all three cases depends on thesetting of the configuration file option tol_mode at the timethat you actually created the model.


Tole rances on Drawings Page 8-3

NOTES

Changing Linear TolerancesEvery dimension on a Pro/ENGINEER model has a tolerance. If youspecify a new tolerance format and value at the part, assembly, or drawinglevel, the system reflects that change in every mode of Pro/ENGINEER.Therefore, the tolerance format for a dimension is the same in Part,Assembly, and Drawing mode. To differentiate the tolerance format of adimension from others, you can control the display independently inDrawing mode. As a result, you can show tolerances on a drawing withouthaving to view them in the part or assembly.

Note:

You should change tolerance values or formats at the drawinglevel because you can see all of the dimensions at the sametime, and you can select more than one at a time. At the part orassembly level, you can change only one dimension at a time.

GEOMETRIC TOLERANCESYou can use geometric tolerances (gtols) to specify the maximumallowable deviation of a product from the exact size and shape specifiedby designers. Geometric tolerances provide a comprehensive method ofspecifying the location of the part’s critical surfaces, how they relate toone another, and how the part should be inspected to determine if it isacceptable.

When you store a Pro/ENGINEER geometric tolerance in a solid model, itcontains parametric references to the geometry or feature it controls—itsreferenced entity—and parametric references to referenced datums andaxes. As a result, the system updates the gtol’s display when you rename areferenced datum. It creates geometric tolerances as annotations, andalways associates them with the model. Unlike dimensional tolerances,geometric tolerances do not have any effect on the part geometry.

Creating a Geometric ToleranceYou use the following procedure to create geometric tolerances in Partmode, Assembly mode, or Drawing mode:



NOTES

Setting Datums

You can change the name of a datum plane, set it for use in a gtol, andcontrol its placement. To set a datum, you can create a new one or modifyan existing datum plane or axis.

Note:

Renaming datums could affect any layouts to which you havedeclared them.

The system displays a set datum on the screen regardless of the datumdisplay setting in the ENVIRONMENT dialog box. In Drawing mode, youcan remove it from the drawing by erasing it from a particular view. InPart or Assembly mode, you can place a set datum on a layer and blank itto remove it from the display.

Specifying the Tolerance Type

To specify the geometric tolerance type, select a graphical symbol fromthe GEOMETRIC TOLERANCE dialog box.

Defining the Model References

If you have only one model on your drawing, the system uses it as thedefault, but if you have a multi-model or assembly drawing, you canchoose the model to use. You can also create a drawing-level gtol, whichthe system stores in the drawing, but it can only reference draft geometry.

Reference Entity

After you have defined the model, you must specify the reference entity(the geometry or feature that the gtol controls). The system does not usethe reference entity in place of a set datum or as an attachment type for thegtol. The available reference entity types change based on the type ofgeometric tolerance that you are creating.

Placement Entity

Once you have specified the type, the model, and the reference entity, youcan attach the gtol symbol to an entity on the model, known as theplacement entity. The following placement types are available, dependingon the gtol type:



NOTES

• Attaching it to a dimension, datum, or another gtol.

• Using a leader.

• Displaying it as a free note.

• Creating a dimension to which you can attach it (in Drawing modeonly).

Defining the Datum References

You can define a primary, secondary, and tertiary datum reference; a basicand a compound datum; and a material condition; however, you do nothave to define all of these references. The system displays a message inthe dialog box informing you of the minimum number of references thatyou must specify for the particular type of gtol that you are creating.

Specifying the Tolerance Value

You can define the tolerance value as an overall tolerance or base it uponsome unit. To specify the material condition, you can choose from thefollowing:

• Maximum (MMC)

• Least (LMC)

• Regardless of feature size (RFS)

• Regardless of feature size without a symbol (RFS/Default)

Specifying Additional Symbols

You can show the following symbols and modifiers in the geometrictolerance.

• Statistical tolerance

• Diameter symbol

• Free state

• All around symbol

• Tangent plane symbol

In addition, you can also set up a projected tolerance zone to display insideor below the gtol, and also specify a value for the zone height.



NOTES

After you have defined the geometric tolerance, you can place it on thedrawing and move it. You can either define another gtol immediately orend gtol creation.

Geometric Tolerances in Assembly DrawingsIn Assembly drawings, you can create a gtol in a subassembly, a part, orthe top-level assembly.

• Subassembly or part gtols – A subassembly or part gtol can referonly to set datums belonging to that model itself, or to componentswithin it. It cannot refer to datums outside its model in someencompassing assembly.

• Top-level gtols – When you create a gtol in the top-level model (suchas a part in a part drawing or the top assembly in an assemblydrawing), the system associates the tolerance with the view in whichyou have specified a reference entity. Reference datums must belongto the same top-level model, but you can select them in any view. Youcan attach an assembly gtol to a dimension, datum, or another gtol,provided they both belong to the same assembly.

Modifying a Geometric ToleranceAfter you place a gtol on a drawing, you can move it; change itsattachment position, type, or tolerance value; or redefine the steps in thegtol creation. You can modify every aspect of a gtol symbol, except itemson the Model Refs page.

CONFIGURATION FILE OPTIONSTable 2 lists the available configuration file options that control lineartolerances.

Table 2: Configuration File Options Affecting Linear TolerancesOption Value Definition

tol_display no

yes

Displays dimensions withor without tolerances.

tol _mode limits

nominal

plusminus

plusminussym

Sets default display oftolerances.

linear_tol # tolerance Sets tolerance display forlinear and angular



NOTES

angular_tol dimensions. # is thenumber of places after thedecimal point andtolerance is the actualvalue of the tolerance.

tolerance_standard ANSI

ISO

Sets tolerance standardwhen creating the model.

display_dwg_tol_tags yes

noControls display of thesmall tolerance block onthe screen.

tolerance_class medium

fine

coarse

very coarse

Sets the default toleranceclass for ISO tolerancestandard models.

tolerance_table_dir directory path Sets the default directoryfor user-defined tolerancetables for ISO tolerancestandard models.



NOTES

Drawing Setup File OptionsTable 3 lists the available drawing setup file options that control linear andgeometric tolerances in drawings.

Table 3: Drawing Setup File Options Affecting Linear andGeometric TolerancesOption Value Definition

blank_zero_tolerance no

yes

When set to yes, systemdoes not display a plus orminus tolerance value thatis zero.

gtol_dim_placement on_bottom

under_value

Determines the location ofa geometric tolerancesfeature control frame whenattached to a dimensionsymbol that containsadditional text.

tol_display no

yes

Controls the display ofdimension tolerances. TheEnvironment dialog box isnot available in Drawingmode.



NOTES


EXERCISE 1: Using Linear and GeometricTolerancesGoal

To show linear and geometric tolerances on a drawing.

Method

In this exercise, you show linear tolerances in Part and Drawing mode, andmodify the tolerance values and formats. You also create geometrictolerances on the plunger body drawing.




NOTES

Task 1. Retrieve the plunger body drawing and part and turn on thetolerance display in the part. Modify the format and values of sometolerances.

1. Retrieve PLUNGER_BODY.DRW, as shown in Figure 1.


Note:

If you did not finish the plunger body drawing earlier, retrievePLUNGER_BODY_TOLERANCES.DRW andPLUNGER_BODY_TOLERANCES.PRT instead.

3. Click Modify and pick the surface of the front tab to show thedimensions for the front tab. The system displays the dimensionsin a nominal format, as shown in Figure 2.

Figure 2: Tab Dimensions in Nominal Format

4. Click Utilities > Environment, select the Dimension Tolerancescheck box and click OK to turn on the tolerance display.

5. Modify the format of the 2.50 location dimension. ClickDimension from the MODIFY menu and pick the 2.50 dimension.Click Done Sel.

6. In the MODIFY DIMENSION dialog box, change the toleranceformat and the tolerance limits. Select PLUS-MINUS from theTOLERANCE MODE drop-down list.



NOTES

7. Type [.02] in the UPPER TOLERANCE text box, and type [.03] inthe LOWER TOLERANCE text box. Click OK.

8. Modify the format and tolerance limit of the 0.100 locationdimension. Pick the 0.100 dimension and click Done Sel.

9. Select +- Symmetric from the TOLERANCE MODE drop-downlist. Type [2] in the NUMBER OF DIGITS text box, then type [.02]in the TOLERANCE text box. Click OK.

10. Close the window for the part and activate the window for thedrawing.

Task 2. Turn on the tolerance display in the drawing. Modify the formatand values of some tolerances.

1. Click Advanced > Draw Setup. In the drawing setup file, changethe setting for the tol_display option to yes. Click Add/Change > OK.

2. Repaint the screen and click Done/Return.

3. Modify the tolerance format and values of the .250 dimension inthe upper left view. Click Modify > Dimension then pick the .250dimension. Click Done Sel.

4. Change the tolerance format and the tolerance limits. Select PLUS-Minus from the TOLERANCE MODE drop-down list.

5. Type [2] in the NUMBER OF DIGITS text box. Type [.02] in theUPPER TOLERANCE text box. Type [.03] in the LOWERTOLERANCE text box. Click OK.

6. Change any dimensions that appear in limits format to nominal.Pick dimensions to modify and click Done Sel. Select Nominalfrom the TOLERANCE MODE drop-down list and click OK. ClickDone/Return.

Task 3. Create a geometric tolerance for parallelism and display it onthe 3.00 dimension in the lower left view. Use datum A as a reference.

1. Use the toolbar icons to turn on the datum planes and coordinatesystems, and repaint the screen.

2. Reposition the datum planes appropriately in order to create gtols.To do this, create a new datum plane through the left side surface



NOTES

of the lower left view. Click Create > Datum > 3D Datum todisplay the DATUM dialog box.

3. Define datum plane A through the surface shown in Figure 3. Type[A] in the NAME area of the dialog box and click On Surface.

4. Click Query Sel and then pick the surface. Click Next until youhighlight the side surface, then click Accept. Click -A- in theTYPE area of the dialog box to set the datum. Select FREE andclick OK. Click Done/Return.

Figure 3: Datum A Location

5. Position the new datum as shown in Figure 3.

6. Click Move from the DETAIL menu, pick the datum, and relocateit. Turn off the datum planes and repaint the screen.

7. Erase the extra datum flags from Section A-A and the upper leftview. Click Show/Erase. Click Erase > , and pick the datumflags for datum A in Section A-A and the upper left view.

8. Click Done Sel and close the SHOW/ERASE dialog box.

9. Create the gtol for parallelism on the 3.00 dimension in the lower

left view. Click Create > Geom Tol > Specify Tol > SelectPLUNGER_BODY.PRT from the MODEL drop-down list.

10. Define the gtol for parallelism on the right side surface. SelectSURFACE from the REFERENCE TYPE drop-down list, then pickthe surface shown in Figure 4.

Datum A shouldpass through thissurface



NOTES

11. Select DIMENSION from the PLACEMENT TYPE drop-down listand pick the 3.000 dimension.

Figure 4: Parallelism References

12. Click Datum Refs, then select A from the BASIC drop-down list asthe primary reference.

13. Define the tolerance value and a least material condition. Click TolValue and type [0.006] as the overall tolerance value. Select LMCfrom the MATERIAL CONDITION drop-down list. Click OK tofinish the gtol. The tolerance should appear as shown in Figure 5.

Figure 5: Parallelism Geometric Tolerance

Task 4. Create a geometric tolerance for concentricity and display it onthe 0.250 diameter dimension in the center view. Use datum axis D as thedatum reference, which is the axis for this hole. You must rename the axis.

1. Use the toolbar to turn on the axis names and repaint the screen.

2. Change the name of datum axis A_32 and set it. Click Set Datumfrom the GEOM TOL menu and pick axis A_32 in Section A-A. Inthe DATUM dialog box, change the name of the axis to [D]. SelectFREE and click OK to place the datum with a free placement.

Pick this (end)surface as thetolerance

Place thetolerance onthis dimension



NOTES

Tips & Techniques:

To remove the set datum axis from other views, set up a layerfor the axis name and blank it from the unwanted views.

3. Click Specify Tol to create the gtol for concentricity on the 0.250diameter dimension in the front view.

4. Define the concentricity gtol for the surface of the hole. Click and select PLUNGER_BODY.PRT from the MODEL drop-down list.

5. Select SURFACE from the REFERENCE TYPE drop-down list andpick the surface shown in Figure 6.

6. Select DIMENSION from the PLACEMENT TYPE drop-down listand then pick the 0.250 dimension.

Figure 6: Concentric References

7. Click Datum Refs and select D from the BASIC drop-down list asthe primary reference.

8. Define the tolerance value and a least material condition. Click TolValue and type [0.003] as the OVERALL TOLERANCE value.Select LMC from the MATERIAL CONDITION drop-down list.

9. Define the tolerance to include the diameter symbol. ClickSymbols, select the DIAMETER SYMBOL check box, and clickOK. The tolerance should appear as shown in Figure 7.

Specify thissurface as thereference



NOTES

Figure 7: Concentric Tolerance

10. Repeat these steps to create the gtol for the 1.125 diameterdimension for the cut. Reference the cylindrical surface of the cutand attach the gtol to the 1.125 diameter dimension. The completegtol should appear as shown in Figure 8. Click Done/Return.

Figure 8: Concentric Tolerance for the 1.125 Diameter Dimension

Note:

The system displays the concentric gtol under the dimensionbecause the configuration file optiongtol_dim_placement controls its location.

Task 5. Modify the values and information in some of the geometrictolerances that you just created.

1. Click Modify and pick the tolerance value to modify the gtol forthe 1.125 diameter. Type [.005].

2. Click Modify > Geom Tol and pick the gtol for the .250 diameterhole. Select the Tol Value, then select MMC from the MATERIALCONDITION drop-down list. Click OK.




NOTES


• You can change the format and values of linear tolerances.

• You can create and modify geometric tolerances.


Page 9-1

Module

Drawing StandardsIn this module, you learn some of the different configuration file

options and drawing setup file options to create drawing to

standards.

Objectives


• Use configuration and drawing setup options to control the displayof items associated with drafting standards.

• Create drawings according to your company standards.



NOTES

SETTING UP YOUR DRAWING STANDARDSBefore you use Pro/ENGINEER for the first time, you should select aconfiguration file and drawing setup file to work with, and then make thenecessary changes to meet your established company standards.

Setting Up Your Configuration FileAs an initial step in establishing your company standards forPro/ENGINEER, you should gather a group of users to review everyoption available in the loadpoint configuration file. If the default setting ofan option meets your standards, you do not have to add it to yourconfiguration file. Likewise, if the default setting is not acceptable, youshould add it to your configuration file.

The loadpoint of Pro/ENGINEER has a text directory containing twoconfiguration files, config.pro and config.sup. You can override theconfig.pro file with options in other configuration files, but you cannotoverride the config.sup file with other options. Therefore, you must decideif you want to allow users to override these settings when they startPro/ENGINEER. To override a setting, you can place an option that is inthe loadpoint config.pro in a config.pro file in the user’s home directory.

The only configuration file options that control Drawing mode standardsare allow_rfs_default_gtols_always, andchamfer_45deg_dim_text.

Setting Up Your Drawing Setup FileAs an additional step in establishing your company standards forPro/ENGINEER, you should gather a group of users to decide whichdrawing setup file is the most appropriate for your needs. In the textdirectory of the loadpoint, Pro/ENGINEER provides a variety of drawingsetup files that are set to certain standards. You should copy each file to anew name and then make any necessary changes.

Note:

You should not accept the settings in the standard drawingsetup files as final standards. Instead, you should review eachoption to determine if the setting is appropriate for yourcompany.


Drawing Standards Page 9-3

NOTES

After you change your drawing setup file, you should set it up so that allnew drawings use this setup file by default. To do this, specify the nameof your drawing setup file (FILENAME.DTL) as the value for theconfiguration file option drawing_setup_file. Several drawingsetup file options control the appearance of items associated with drawingstandards. You can change the settings of these options at any time. If youaccept the default value, any changes are retroactive; it is, therefore,important to make changes to the drawing setup file rather than theindividual items. Retaining the default settings makes is easier to updatethe drawing later if the standards change.

Note:

You should not accept the values std_ansi, std_din, andstd_iso, etc., as final. Changes to the standards, and differentinterpretations, can produce different results. Select the optionthat produces the correct appearance in your drawing,regardless of the name of the setting.

CONFIGURATION FILE OPTIONSTable 1 lists the available configuration file options that you can use to setdrawing standards in Drawing mode.



NOTES

Table 1: Configuration File Options Affecting DrawingStandardsOption Value Definition

allow_rfs_default_gtols_

always

yes

no

If set to yes, the system createsRFS/Default gtols even if theANSI standard does not allowit.

chamfer_45deg_dim_text ASME/ANSI

ISO/DIN

JIS

Controls the appearance ofdimension text of newlycreated dimensions.

DRAWING SETUP FILE OPTIONSTable 2 lists the drawing setup file options that you can use to set thestandard for gtols, dimension and linear tolerance display, and viewgeometry in a drawing.



NOTES

Table 2: Drawing Setup File Options Controlling DrawingStandardsOption Value Definition

Options Controlling Geometric Tolerances

gtol_datums STD_ANSI

STD_ANSI_MM

STD_ISO

STD_JIS

STD_DIN

STD_ISO_JIS

STD_ASME

STD_ANSI_DASHED

Sets the drafting standardfor displaying referencedatums in drawings. Thedisplay affects both axesand datum planes.

new_iso_set_datums no

yes

If set to “yes,” set draftdatums conform to the ISOstandard.

Options Controlling Dimensions and Linear Tolerances

angdim_text_orientation horizontal

horizontal_outside

parallel_above

parallel_outside

parallel_fully_outside

Controls the placement ofangular dimensions tomeet the ISO standard.

HorizontalHorizontalOutside

Paralle

Parallel Above

ParallelFully



NOTES

chamfer_45deg_leadestyle STD_ASME_ANSI

STD_ISO

STD_DIN

STD_JIS

Affects the display of theleader in the drawing andall 45-degree chamferdimensions.

iso_ordinate_delta no

yes

Improves the display of theoffset between an ISOordinate dimension lineand the witness line. If setto “yes,” the system usesthe “witness_line_delta”value. If set to “no,” theoffset differs by about 2mm.

ord_dim_standard STD_ANSI

STD_ISO

STD_DIN

STD_JIS

Sets the display standardfor ordinate dimensions.When set to “STD_ANSI,”shows dimensions withouta connecting line (figureA). Otherwise, placesrelated ordinatedimensions along theconnecting line (figure B).

tol_text_height_factor standard

number > 0

Sets the default ratiobetween the tolerance textheight and dimension textheight, when tolerance isshown in “plus-minus”format. For “standard,” thesystem uses 1 for ANSIand 0.6 for ISO standard.



NOTES

tol_text_width_factor standard

number > 0

Sets the default ratiobetween the tolerance textwidth and dimension textwidth, when tolerance isshown in “plus-minus”format. For “standard,”the system uses 1 forANSI and 0.6 for ISOstandard.

Options Controlling View Geometry

axis_interior_clipping no

yes

When set to “no,” axes inthe drawing conform torequirements of the ANSIY14.2M standard. If set to“yes,” you can adjust eachaxis individually byclipping and moving, asillustrated below.

cutting_line STD_ANSI

STD_ANSI_DASHED

STD_DIN

STD_ISO

STD_JIS

STD_JIS_ALTERNATE

When set to “std_ansi,”uses the ANSI standard forcutting lines. When set to“std_ansi_dashed,” usesdashed lines. Otherwise,uses the DIN standardcutting line. Displays itsthickened portion in white,and its thin portion in gray.



NOTES

cutting_line_segment 0

value

Specifies the length indrawing units of thethickened portion of a non-ANSI cutting line. Whenset to “0,” does not showthe thickened portion.

hlr_for_threads no

yes

Controls the display ofthreads in drawingsdepending upon whether adrawing complies withISO or ANSI standard (setby the “thread_standard”option). When set to “yes,”thread edges meet ANSI orISO standard for HiddenLine display.

line_style_standard STD_ANSI

STD_DIN

STD_ISO

STD_JIS

Controls the text color indrawings. Unless set toSTD_ANSI, all text is blueand detailed viewboundaries are yellow.

thread_standard STD_ANSI_IMP

STD_ANSI

STD_ANSI_IMP_ASSY

STD_ISO

STD_ISO_IMP

STD_ISO_IMP_ASSY

Determines whether athreaded hole with its axisperpendicular to the screenis displayed as an arc(ISO) or a circle (ANSI). Ifset to “improved,” doesnot display hidden threadlines if the environment isset to No Hidden.Displays them as leaderlines if the environment isHidden Line.

view_note STD_ANSI

STD_DIN

STD_ISO

STD_JIS

When set to std_din, doesnot use the wordsSECTION, DETAIL, andSEE DETAIL in view-related notes.

CREATING DRAWING TEMPLATESUsing the new drawing templates, you can greatly improve the efficiencyof the drawing creation process. Once setup, these templates will automatethe process of laying out the views, setting view display, placing standardnotes, placing standard tables tables, creating snap lines and showdimensions.



NOTES

Figure 1: A Template and the Resulting Drawing

Model RequirementsThe drawing templates use standard view names in the models to locatethe views. For instance, you may specify that the first view placed in aGeneral view oriented to the FRONT view. The model using the templatemust contain a view with this exact name, or the view can not be createdwith the template.

Many companies utilize Start Parts or Start Mapkeys, which automaticallygenerate several standard views.

Template View DefinitionThese drawing templates are developed using the dialog box shown inFigure 2.



NOTES

Figure 2: Template View Instructions Dialog Box

To define the first view for the template you will need to specify thefollowing information:

• Name of the template view

• Type of view to be placed

• The name of the Saved View that should be used to orient the model

• The location for the view

Optional information you can specify for the view:

• If a cross-section should be displayed for the view, and the cross-sectional view name.

• Scale for the view.

• Name of the Explode State for the view.

• Name of the Simplified Rep to base the geometry on.

• The display setting for the view, such as No Hidden or Hidden Line.

• The display seting for tangent edges, such as Tan Phantom.

• If dimensions should be shown in the view. If dimensions are shown,you can choose to specify:

� If snap lines should be created

� The number of snap lines created

� The initial and incremental spacing of the snap lines



NOTES

Dimension and Balloon PriorityWhen you are automatically showing balloons or dimensions, you havecontrol over the view order the system uses for attempting to show thedimensions.

View SymbolBy default, all views are represented by the same symbol on the template.If desired, you can create additional symbols which can be used torepresent the different types of views.



NOTES


To use the drawing file setup options to create standard drawings.

Method

In this exercise, you learn how to use drawing setup file options to setstandards for your drawings by manipulating the display of detail itemssuch as dimensions, axes, and set datums.

In the second exercise, you create a drawing template.

EXERCISE 1: Setting Drawing Standards throughthe Drawing Setup File

Task 1. Retrieve the drawing standards drawing and change some of thesettings that will affect dimensions.

1. Retrieve DRW_STANDARDS.DRW.

2. If the datum planes, datum coordinate systems, and axis namesappear on the screen, turn them off.

Task 2. Change the display of ordinate dimensions.

1. Click Advanced > Draw Setup.

2. Select the ord_dim_standard option and select STD_ISO from theVALUE drop-down list. Apply changes and close thePREFERENCES dialog box. Repaint the screen. The ordinatedimensions now appear as shown in Figure 3.



NOTES

Figure 3: Ordinate Dimension Standard

Task 3. Change the display of the chamfer dimensions in the drawingby modifying the drawing configuration file.

1. In the drawing setup file, set the chamfer_45deg_leader_styleoption to std_iso. Apply changes and close the PREFERENCESdialog box.

2. Repaint the screen. The system displays the chamfer dimensions intheir new style. Repeat this step and change the setting to std_dinand std_jis as shown in Figure 4.

Figure 4: Chamfer Dimensions

Task 4. Modify the drawing setup file to create a different dimensioningscheme for the angular dimensions.

1. Set the angdim_text_orientation option to horizontal_outside.Apply changes and close the PREFERENCES dialog box.

2. Repaint the screen. The system displays the angle dimensions intheir new style.

3. Repeat this step and change the setting to parallel_above andparallel_outside.

JIS standard DIN ISO standard ANSI-ASME standard



NOTES

Task 5. Change the display of cross-sectional cutting lines, datumplanes, and axes.

1. Change the display of cross-sectional cutting lines. Set thecutting_line to std_din.

2. Set the cutting_line_segment to [1.5]. Apply changes and closethe PREFERENCES dialog box.

3. Repaint the screen. The system displays the new cutting line style.Change cutting_line_segment to [1.0] and note the difference,as shown in Figure 5.

Figure 5: Cutting Lines

4. Change the display of set datum planes. Set gtol_datums tostd_iso_jis. Apply the changes and close the PREFERENCESdialog box.

5. Repaint the screen. The system displays the new datum style asshown in Figure 6.

Figure 6: Gtol Datums

6. Change the display of datum axes. Set axis_interior_clipping toYes. Apply changes and close the PREFERENCES dialog box.

ANSI standard DIN standard

ANSI standard ISO-JIS standard



NOTES

7. Repaint the screen. The system displays the new axis style. ClickMove from the DETAIL menu and pick different locations on theaxes to move the outside ends.

8. Click Clip and pick different locations on the axes to move theinside ends, as shown in Figure 7.

Figure 7: Axis Interior Clipping

9. Change the settings of the drawing setup file options that controlarrow style, default font, text height, and text width.

Note:

Changing the drawing units affects many other settings in thedrawing setup file. The options that control text height and textwidth, for example, are based on this setting.




NOTES

EXERCISE 2: Creating a Drawing Template

Task 1. Create a new drawing without any models associated to it.

1. Click File > New > Drawing.

2. Type [my_C_template] for the name.

3. Clear the Use Default Template check box and click OK.

4. Clear the Default Model box.

5. Check Empty in the SPECIFY TEMPLATE area.

6. Click OK.

Task 2. Initialize the template and define the first view for the template.

1. Click Applications > Template.

2. Click Views > Add Template. The Template View Instructionswindow appears.

3. In the VIEW NAME box, type [ FRONT_1 ].

4. In the View Orientation box, accept the default of General.

5. In the Saved View Name box, accept the default of Front.

6. In the VIEW OPTIONS area, select MODEL DISPLAY and selectHIDDEN LINE.

7. In the VIEW OPTIONS area, select TAN EDGE DISPLAY andselect TAN PHANTOM.

8. In the VIEW OPTIONS area, select DIMENSIONS. Type [.375]for the Incremetal Spacing and type [.500] for the Initial Offset.

9. Click Place View and pick a location on the lower left side of thedrawing for the symbol.



NOTES

Figure 8: The First View

Task 3. Create a second view to generate a projection view.

1. In the TEMPLATE VIEW INSTRUCTION dialog box, click New.

2. In the VIEW NAME box, type [ SIDE_1 ].

3. In the View Orientation box, select PROJECTION.

4. In the PROJECTION PARENT VIEW box, select FRONT_1.

5. In the VIEW OPTIONS area, select MODEL DISPLAY and selectHIDDEN LINE.

6. In the VIEW OPTIONS area, select TAN EDGE DISPLAY andselect TAN PHANTOM.

7. In the VIEW OPTIONS area, select DIMENSIONS. Type [.375]for the Incremetal Spacing and type [.500] for the Initial Offset.

8. Click Place View and pick to the right of the first view.

Task 4. Create a second projection view and an isometric view.

1. Create a third view with the following characteristics:

� View Name = top_1

� View Orientation = Projection

� View Parent = FRONT_1



NOTES

� Model Display = Hidden Line

� Tan Edge Display = Tan Phantom

� Use the same dimension offset values as before

� Locate the view above the front view

2. Create a fourth view with the following characteristics:

� View Name = iso_1

� View Orientation = General

� Saved View = ISO

� Model Display = No Hidden

� Tan Edge Display = Tan Phantom

� Scale = .250

� No dimensions should be placed in this view

3. Save the template and close the window.

4. Create a new drawing of the model BLOCK.PRT and use this newtemplate.



NOTES


• You can use configuration and drawing setup options to control thedisplay of items associated with drafting standards.

• You can create drawings according to your company standards.



Page 10-1

Module

Drawing TablesIn this module, you learn how to create and manipulate drawing

tables.

Objectives


• Create and manipulate drawing tables.

• Save drawing tables for use in future drawings.



NOTES

PURPOSE OF DRAWING TABLESYou can use a table in a drawing for many purposes, such as to show aBill of Materials or to indicate different sizes for the same part. InPro/ENGINEER, you can create a table on your drawing, save it to yourhard drive, and use it later in other drawings. In addition, you canmanipulate table text, add dimension values, and manipulate the actualtable in different ways.

Creating a Drawing TableTo create a table in a drawing, you must define the direction of the table,its location within the drawing, and the size of the rows and columns.

Table Direction and Location

You can specify the direction of a drawing table as ascending ordescending, and as rightward or leftward, as shown in Figure 1. Theoptions that you choose determine the default origin for the table and thedirection that the table grows if you add columns or rows. Therefore, youshould define a direction that would prevent the table from growing off ofthe drawing sheet or into a drawing view.

Figure 1: Table Directions

The system prompts you to locate the first corner of the table based on thedirection that you have defined. If you have defined the table direction asdescending and rightward, for example, the system prompts you to locatethe upper left corner.

Row and Column Size

After specifying the direction of the table, you must define the size of eachrow and column by specifying an actual size value or selecting the numberof characters that can fit in each cell.


Drawing Tables Page 10-3

NOTES

• Entering a value – You must define a value for each column and row.To specify the units, set the drawing setup file optiondrawing_units.

• Selecting the number of characters – To select the number ofcharacters, you must pick an area on the number bar that appears onthe screen, as shown in Figure 2. Pro/ENGINEER automatically placespadding that is half of a character wide at each end of the cell whichmeans that if you pick the 7 in the number bar, you can only fit 6characters in that cell. Therefore, you should place the cursor slightlybeyond the number that you actually want. For example, if you want 8characters, you should pick between the 8 and the 9 in the number bar.

Figure 2: Specifying Cell Size

Note:

After you select the number of characters to fit in a cell, youcan still enter more characters. If you add more characters thanthe cell can accommodate, they overlap into neighboring cells.Text does not automatically wrap and the cells do notautomatically grow.

Manipulating a Drawing TableOnce you have created a drawing table, you can manipulate it by doing thefollowing:

• Setting the justification for each column.

• Changing the size of columns and rows.

• Combining multiple cells into one.

• Changing the origin of the table.

• Removing individual cell borders.

eft border of the table Pick here to fit eightcharacters in the cell



NOTES

Setting the Justification for Each Column

Prior to entering text into a table, you should define the justification foreach column, as shown in Figure 3. The default justification setting is leftjustified. You should specify the justification that you want to use for themajority of the table cells. Later, you can change individual cells, ifneeded.

Figure 3: Justification of a Table

Tips & Techniques:

When changing the justification of text in tables using theTEXT STYLE dialog box, pick all of the text that should havethe same justification to avoid having to repeat the procedure.

Changing the Size of Columns and Rows

After creating the table, you can change the size of any column or row byredefining the length or the number of characters that fit in the cell.

Combining Multiple Cells into One

You can combine table rows, columns, or a combination of both into onecell by merging them together. A merged cell acts like any other cell, asshown in Figure 4. If you later choose to split the cells apart, you can re-mesh them into individual cells.



NOTES

Figure 4: Merging Cells

Changing the Origin of the Table

You can move the origin point of the table to any corner. This could beuseful if you move the table to the other side of the drawing and want toprevent the table from growing off the sheet.

Removing Individual Cell Borders

You can blank individual cell borders from display to make it appear thatthe cell has been merged with a neighboring cell, although the cells remainseparate, as shown in Figure 5. If you later decide to show the borderagain, you can unblank it.

Figure 5: Blanking Cells

Adding Text to the CellsYou can add text to the cells in a table using the keyboard and the symbolpalette. You can also include dimension and parameter values, as youwould to create a parametric note. To include a dimension or parametervalue, you must place an ampersand (&) before the symbolic value. Forexample, to include the numeric value for cost in a table, you would enter[&cost] into the table.

Notice cells are stilldefined



NOTES

Changing the Content of a Cell

You can modify cell text using the following four methods, just as youwould modify a note:

• Re-enter text in the cell – Pro/ENGINEER overwrites the existingtext.

• Modify one line of text at a time – Existing line appears in themessage area for editing.

• Modify the entire text through the system editor – Using a systemeditor such as VI or Notepad, you can add lines, delete lines, or changethe content of any text line.

• Modify the entire text through an editor in Pro/ENGINEER – Usingthe asynchronous pop-up menu, you can edit the text using a PTC texteditor.

Modifying the Text Style

Once you have placed text in a table cell, you can change its style.

Figure 6: Modified Text

When picking text, keep in mind that table cell text acts like a note. Asdiscussed in an earlier chapter, Pro/ENGINEER actually breaks up the cellcontents into text fields that you can manipulate separately from the rest ofthe cell text.

Repositioning Drawing TablesYou can reposition drawing tables in the following manners:

• Using the Table > Move command.

• Using the Sheets > Switch Sheets command.

• Using the Cut, Copy and Paste commands in the EDIT menu.



NOTES


To create a table in the drawing.

Method

In this exercise, you create a drawing table, and then modify the table sizeand format. You also add text to the table and change the style of the tabletext.

EXERCISE 1: Creating and Modifying a DrawingTable

Task 1. Retrieve PLUNGER_BODY.DRW as shown in Figure 7 andswitch some of the views to a new sheet

Note:

If you did not finish the plunger body drawing earlier, retrievePLUNGER_BODY_TABLES.DRW.

1. If the datum planes, datum coordinate systems, and axis namesappear on the screen, turn them off and repaint the screen.

2. Switch the cross-section and detailed views to a new sheet. ClickSheets > Switch Sheet, then pick the cross-section and detailedviews to switch. Click Done Sel > Done to finish.

3. Reposition the views as shown in Figure 7.

4. Return to Sheet 1 and move the views to new positions, as shownin Figure 7.



NOTES




NOTES

Task 2. Create a drawing table that presents the revision history of thedrawing. The table should consist of three rows and three columns.

1. Click Table > Create.

2. Define the table so that it grows toward the bottom left of thesheet. Click Descending > Leftward.

3. Pick near the upper right corner of the drawing for the table origin.

4. Using the left mouse button, pick immediately after the secondzero to create the first column (20 characters wide).

5. Pick immediately after the first zero to create the second column(10 characters wide).

6. Pick immediately after the first 5 to create the third column (5characters wide).

7. Press the middle mouse button to finish creating the columns.

8. Using the left mouse button, pick immediately after the number 2to create the first row (2 characters high).

9. Pick immediately after the number 1 to create the second and thirdrows.

10. Press the middle mouse button to finish creating the rows. Thetable should appear as shown in Figure 8.

Note:

You may have to move the 3-D view of the plunger furtherdown on the sheet. Use the ASYNCHRONOUS pop-up menuto move this view.

5 10 20

2

1

1

Figure 8: Table Size



NOTES

Task 3. Set up the columns of the table as left and middle-justified.Add text to the cells in the table.

1. Click Mod Rows/Cols > Justify > Column. Click Left > Middle.Pick all three columns of the table to set the justification.

2. Click Enter Text and pick the upper left table cell.

3. Type [REV] for the first line of text. When the system prompts youto enter the second line of text, press <ENTER>.

4. Pick the upper middle table cell, type [DATE], and press <ENTER>.

5. Pick the upper right table cell, type [DESCRIPTION], and press<ENTER>.

6. Repeat the process until the table appears as shown in Figure 9.

Figure 9: Adding Text to a Table

Task 4. Change the text style of the column headers. Increase the textheight, make the font bold, and center-justify the headers.

1. Click Modify > Text > Text Style. Pick the three column headers,then click Done Sel.

2. Select Filled from the FONT drop-down list.

3. Type [.30] in the TEXT HEIGHT dialog box.

4. Select Center from the JUSTIFY HORIZ drop-down list.

5. Click Apply > Close.

Task 5. Add a new row to the bottom of the table to indicate a newrevision.

1. Click Table > Mod Rows/Cols > Insert > Row.

2. Pick the bottom border of the last row.



NOTES

Tips & Techniques:

If you insert the row incorrectly, you can use the Removeoption to delete any unnecessary rows or columns.

3. Enter the text into the new cells as shown in Figure 10.

Figure 10: New Row Added to Table

Task 6. Create a new table on the drawing to display the releaseinformation. The table should consist of three columns and four rows.

1. Click Create > Descending > Rightward > By Length.

2. Locate this table below the first table.

3. Create a table that is similar to the one in Figure 11.

� For each column width, type [1.0].

� For the height of the first row, type [1.0]

� For the height of the second row, type [.5].

� For the height of the third row, type [.8].

4. Define the justification of the cell. Click Mod Rows/Cols >Justify > Column, then click Center > Middle. Pick all threecolumns of the table to set the justification.

5. Merge the cells of the first row. Click Modify Table > Merge >Rows & Cols, then pick the upper left cell and the upper right cellof the table.

6. Merge the cells of the second row. Pick the left cell and the rightcell of the second row. The table should appear as shown inFigure 11.



NOTES

Figure 11: Merged Cells

Task 7. Enter text into the table and manipulate the text style.

1. Click Enter Text and pick the top row.

2. Type [RELEASED PRINT] for the first line, [RESPONSIBLEENGINEERING ACTIVITY] for the second line, and press<ENTER> to finish entering text.

3. Decrease the size of the top row of and change its justification.Press the right mouse button, click Modify Item and pick the textthat you just created.

4. Press the right mouse button and click Mod Text Style. In theTEXT STYLE dialog box, type [.1] in the HEIGHT text box.

5. Select Center from the JUSTIFY HORIZ drop-down list and Topfrom the JUSTIFY VERT drop-down list. Click Apply > Close.

6. Change the height of RELEASED PRINT. Click Modify > Text >Text Height. Pick the first line of text and click Done Sel. Type[.15] as the height.

7. Click Enter Text and pick the second row. Type [REA ORGCODE], then press <ENTER> to finish entering text.

8. Decrease the size of the second row of text and change its andjustification. Press the right mouse button, click Modify Item,Query Sel, and pick the text that you just created.

9. Click Next until the text highlights; then click Accept. Press theright mouse button and click Mod Text Style. In the TEXT STYLEdialog box, type [.1] in the HEIGHT text box.

Original cells Merged cells



NOTES

10. Select LEFT from the JUSTIFY HORIZ drop-down list andMIDDLE from the JUSTIFY VERT drop-down list. Select Apply >Close.

11. Enter text into the last row of the table. Click Enter Text and pickthe lower left cell. Type [REV], then press <ENTER> to finishentering text.

12. Pick the lower middle cell, type [REL DATE], and press <ENTER>.Pick the lower right cell, type [REL BY], and press <ENTER>.

13. Modify the text height and justification. Click Modify > Text >Text Style. Pick the text that you just created for the last row andclick Done Sel.

14. Click Select Text, then pick the second line of text in the top row.Change the vertical justification by selecting Bottom from theJUSTIFY VERT drop-down list.

15. Click Apply > Close. The table should appear as shown inFigure 12.

Figure 12: Release Table

16. Save this table for future use. Click Save/Retrieve from theTABLE menu, then click Store and pick the table. Type[RELEASE_INFO] as the table name.




NOTES

MODULE SUMMARYIn this module, you have learned that:

• You can create and manipulate drawing tables.

• You can save drawing tables for use in future drawings.


Page 11-1

Module

Cosmetic FeaturesIn this module, you learn how to create cosmetic features on a part.

Also, you learn how to use User Defined Features (UDF’s) to

automate the creation of cosmetic threads.

Objectives


• Create sketched cosmetic features.

• Create cosmetic threads and show the parameters on a drawing.

• Create cosmetic threads, countersinks, counterbores, and tappingautomatically using the Standard Hole functionality.



NOTES

COSMETIC SKETCHESSketched cosmetic features are features that you draw on the surface of apart, such as company logos or serial numbers that are stamped on anobject. Other features cannot reference sketched cosmetic features.

You do not have to regenerate or dimension sketched cosmetic features;instead, you can simply sketch in the geometry without defining the sizeor location. However, keep in mind that the cosmetic sketch is in a non-parametric state, so you cannot modify the section size or location. Tocreate a parametric cosmetic sketch, you should dimension the sectionfully, as you would any other sketched feature.

Unlike solid features, you can set the color, font, and line style of cosmeticsketched features. You can set each individual geometry segment, whetherit is a single feature or a pattern, to a line style. In addition, you can alsoassign a different line style to each segment. However, when you redefinea cosmetic feature, you cannot change the line style.

Working with Regular SectionsA regular section cosmetic feature remains on the sketching plane. It is aflat feature that Pro/ENGINEER locates directly on the plane on whichyou sketched it.

You can cross-hatch regular section cosmetic features when you createthem. The cross-hatching displays in all modes of Pro/ENGINEER, butyou can only modify it in Drawing mode.

Working with Projected SectionsWith Projected sections, a user can sketch the section on a datum plane orplanar surface and then project it onto a part surface, as shown in Figure 1.However, projecting it onto the part surface does result in some distortionin the shape of the feature.


Cosmet ic Features Page 11-3

NOTES

Figure 1: Projected Sketch

Showing Cosmetic Sketches on a DrawingUsing the SHOW/ERASE dialog box, you can show a cosmetic sketch on adrawing in the same way that you would show a dimension, and thenmanipulate the line style of the segments or the sketch. You can show orerase the cosmetic sketch in the drawing views individually.

COSMETIC THREADSA cosmetic thread uses a magenta halo to represent the diameter of athread. Unlike other cosmetic features, you cannot modify the line style ofa cosmetic thread, and hidden line display settings in the ENVIRONMENTdialog box do not affect them.

Creating Cosmetic ThreadsWhen you create a cosmetic thread, you must define the surface on whichto create it, the surface on which to start it, the thread depth, and the threaddiameter:

• To specify the starting surface, you can pick a quilt surface, regularPro/ENGINEER surface, or split surface (such as a surface that

Sketch

Projectionsurface

Resultingfeature



NOTES

belongs to a revolved feature, chamfer, round, or swept feature). Youmust then specify the direction of the thread.

• To define the thread depth, you can use Blind, Upto Pnt/Vtx, UptoCurve, and Upto Surface. You must then specify a value or reference.

• To define the thread diameter, you can accept the default value that thesystem provides based on the diameter of the thread surface. Thegeometry of the thread surface determines if the thread is external orinternal. If it is a shaft, the thread is external. If it is a hole, the threadis internal. For an internal thread, the default diameter value is 10percent larger than the hole diameter. For an external thread, thedefault diameter value is 10 percent smaller than the shaft.

Note:

A blind external cosmetic thread fails if the major diameter isequal to the diameter of the placement surface.

Table 1 lists the parameters that you can define for a thread. You candefine some of them when you initially create the thread. For example, thesystem bases the major diameter and placement on the values that youspecify for the diameter of the thread. In Table 1, pitch is the distancebetween two threads.

Table 1 Parameters for Thread DefinitionParameter Name Parameter

ValueParameter Description

MAJOR_DIAMETER Number Thread major diameter

THREADS_PER_INCH Number Threads per inch (1/pitch)

THREAD_FORM String Thread form

CLASS Number Thread class

PLACEMENT Character Thread placement (A-external, B-internal)

METRIC TRUE/FALSE Thread is metric

You can manipulate thread parameters just as you would manipulate otheruser-defined parameters, (add, modify, delete, or display them).

Working with the Parameter File

The parameter file lists all of the information concerning the threadparameters, and you can edit it as needed. For example, the systemprompts you twice for information about the diameter. One benefit of thisredundancy is that you can place a metric thread on an English unit part,and vice versa.



NOTES

When specifying parameters directly in the parameter file or as youactually create the cosmetic thread, keep in mind the following:

• If you can specify an option in both the parameter file and the creationuser interface, the system displays the values from the creation userinterface by default. If you change these values, or if you read inanother parameter file, these new values remain in the file. However,the values in the creation user interface remain unchanged. Forexample, if you specified a thread diameter of 2.5, then change theparameter file so that the diameter is 3.5, the thread diameter remains2.5. Note that if you modify the values in the parameter file, they losetheir associativity with the model.

• The associativity between the parameter file and the creation userinterface exists only during feature creation. Once you accept thedefault values, or make changes to the parameter file, these valuesremain the same until you select NOTE PARAMS from the SELELEMENTS menu. Even if you redefine the feature and the diameteror the thread type, the parameter file remains unchanged unless youmanually change it.

• Pro/ENGINEER calculates the thread placement value in theparameter file based on whether the thread is external (surfacegeometry is a shaft) or internal (surface geometry is a hole).

• The system displays the values of the feature in the dialog box, whichmay not be the same as the values in the parameter file. However, ifyou choose Feat, Pro/ENGINEER displays the values that youspecified during feature creation and the values in the parameter file.

Displaying Cosmetic Threads on a Drawing

Once you create a cosmetic thread on a part, it appears on the associateddrawing; you do not need to show it manually as you would with acosmetic sketch. The system displays it by default in magenta, just as itwould display a surface feature, and hidden line display does not affect it.To control the effect of hidden line removal on cosmetic threads, set thedrawing setup file option hlr_for_threads to Yes or No,accordingly.

To show cosmetic thread parameters, you can select FEAT & VIEW fromthe SHOW page of the SHOW/ERASE dialog box, and then pick the threadin the view for which you would like to show the note. The note appears inthe drawing in the format shown in Figure 2.



NOTES

Figure 2: Thread Note

Changing the Format of a Thread Note

The note shown in Figure 2 may not be in the appropriate format for yourdrawings. Using the following techniques, you can modify the format of athread note to meet your requirements:

• Change the major diameter to a fraction or remove the leadingzero – Delete the parameter for the major diameter and re-create it as astring. This breaks the associativity with the diameter dimension, butallows you to display a fraction in the note or display it as .450.

• Change the note format to remove unnecessary spaces – Create anew note attached to the cosmetic feature and include spaces anddashes where they should display in the note, as shown in Figure 3.

• Control the number of decimal places for the threads per inchparameter – Add [.#] after a parameter, where # is the number ofdecimal places desired, as shown in Figure 3.

&MAJOR_DIAMETER:att-&THREADS_PER_INCH:att[.0] &FORM:att-&CLASS:att &PLACEMENT:att

Figure 3: Note Format for Thread Parameter

You can save this note as a text file by adding the postfix :att after eachparameter to ensure that the system uses the parameters of the feature towhich you attach the note. You can then use it on future drawings thatinclude cosmetic thread features and display the information for the newfeature.

To simplify this process, you can use a user-defined feature (UDF) for thecosmetic thread. This allows you to preset the parameter format (that is,the fraction for the major diameter) so that you can use it every time youuse the UDF. Once you place the UDF on the model, you can create thenote on the drawing using the text file with the proper format.

Major diameterForm Class

Threads per inchPlacement

:att uses the parameter for the featureto which the note is attached

[.0] controls the number ofdigits for the parameter



NOTES

Creating Cosmetic Threads using Standard HoleAs an alternative, cosmetic threads can be created using the Standard Holeoption. The Standard Hole option allows for standard UNC, UNF and ISOholes to be created. Counterbores, countersinks, and tapping can beincluded, and default sizes are included.

In tapping a hole, a cosmetic thread can be included automatically, asshown in Figure 4.

Figure 4: Standard Hole Dialog Box

The Standard Hole automatically generates a 3D note as a callout, asshown in the Hole Note Preview at the bottom of the dialog box inFigure 4. This note can be shown on a drawing, but is not parametric.

Note:

The note created by the Standard Hole is not parametric – thatis, the values in it cannot be modified directly. To change thevalues in the note, the feature must be Redefined andmodified via the dialog box.



NOTES

USER-DEFINED FEATURESTo establish a library of common geometry that you can save for futureuse, you can create user-defined features (UDFs)—groups of features,their references, and dimensions. Figure 5 shows screw boss geometry asan example of a UDF.

Figure 5: Screw Boss Geometry

Once you create and save a UDF, you can reuse it quickly on futuremodels, as well as display cosmetic thread notes according to yourcompany standard. If you set up the thread parameters so that they displaycorrectly in the UDF, the note then displays correctly wherever you usethe UDF.

Creating a UDFTo create a UDF, you must first model the geometry that you want to save.As you create the geometry, you should be aware of the parent/childrelationships that you are defining. You should define the features usingcommon external references or references to one another. Once you havedefined the geometry, you can define the UDF. This section discusses thesteps that you should follow to create a UDF of the cosmetic thread shownin Figure 6:

• Begin the definition and specify an option for storing it.

• Store reference parts.

• Name the group.

• Select features.

• Create external reference prompts.

1 Protrusion1 Hole4 RibsDraft



NOTES

• Define variable dimensions and elements.

• Complete the definition.

Figure 6: Cosmetic Thread

Subordinate / Standalone UDFs

UDFs are classified as either Subordinate or Standalone. If a UDF isstored as a standalone feature, the system stores all of the information thatit needs to create the UDF feature in the UDF file itself. If you store it as asubordinate feature, the system uses some of the information from thecurrent model for the UDF features.

Note:

For a subordinate feature, if the current model is not presentwhen you later access the UDF, the system cannot retrieve theUDF.

Storing Reference Parts

When creating a standalone UDF, you can store a reference part to uselater in placing the UDF on a new model. The system creates a copy of thecurrent part and assigns it the name UDFNAME_GP.PRT. If you store theUDF as a subordinate feature, the current model automatically becomesthe reference part.



NOTES

Naming the Group

The name that you assign to a UDF should be a valid filename that isindependent of the model from which you created it, unique anddescriptive, (to ensure that it is easily identifiable). When the systemstores the file, it appends the file extension gph. In some cases, yourcompany standards specify the naming convention that you should use forUDFs.

Selecting Features

To assist you in selecting the appropriate model features to include in theUDF, you can use Query Sel or the MODEL TREE.

Creating External Reference Prompts

Once you have finished selecting the features to include in the UDF, youshould define prompts for the external references (that is, references toparent features other than those contained in the UDF group) to appear inthe message area, as shown in Figure 7. You should create descriptiveprompts that can assist the user in placing the feature, especially if you areusing a standalone UDF that does not have a reference model.

Note:

You must define any parent/child reference that you createwith geometry other than the features of the UDF.

Figure 7: External References for Cosmetic Thread

Start surfaceThread surface

Upto surface



NOTES

Tips & Techniques:

For each reference that you create for a UDF, you must specifya prompt, and then specify a corresponding reference for itwhen placing the UDF on a new model. Therefore, whencreating features for the UDF, you can save time by creating asfew references as possible.

Defining Variable Dimensions and Elements

As you select features for the UDF, you can define variable dimensions,variable elements, and predefined variations of the UDF. Specifically, youcan do the following:

• Make some or all of the driving dimensions variable – You mustspecify a descriptive prompt for each variable driving dimension toindicate what it controls. For any dimensions that you do not select,the system uses the same values as you assigned to the UDF when youstored it.

• Increase its flexibility – You can define variable elements for theUDF as well. For example, you can change the depth of the hole fromBlind to Thru All, etc.

• Define prompts and logic statements – Using Pro/PROGRAM, youcan define prompts and logic statements within the UDF.

• Create predefined variations of the UDF – Using family tables, youcan store geometry sets of various sizes internal to the UDF instead ofrequiring the user to enter a set of dimensions.

Completing the Definition

Once you have defined all of the UDF elements, you can select OK fromthe dialog box to automatically save the UDF and the reference part to thehard drive. The system assigns the UDF the name UDFname.gph. Youmay then want to move the file to a common group directory to give allusers in your company access to the new feature that you have defined.

Placing a UDFWhen you place a UDF on a new model, the system creates a group withinthe new model containing the UDF features. To retrieve the geometryfrom within a new model, you can choose Feature, Create, and UserDefined or Feature, Group, Create, and From UDF Library. After youselect a UDF file, you should place it by following these steps:



NOTES

• Select the driving options to control the geometry – To control thegeometry after placing it, you can define it as either independent orUDF-driven.

• With independent placement, the system makes the group that youcreated in the current model completely independent of the UDF file.

� With a UDF-driven placement, the system associates the groupto the UDF file. As a result, if the UDF file changes, the groupin the new model changes when you select UPDATE from theGROUP menu. You can use this method to enforce companystandards.

� Retrieve a reference part to assist you in placing the UDF, ifnecessary. If you retrieve a reference part into a subwindow,you can use it as a visual aid. As the system prompts you forgeometry, it automatically highlights the equivalent of thereference part.

• Specify values of any variable dimensions that you created andplacement references – Figure 8 illustrates how to choose referencesfor UDF placement.

Figure 8: Choosing References for UDF Placement

• Specify the display for invariable dimensions – The system doesnot prompt you for invariable dimensions when placing the UDF. Youcan specify the display as Normal, Read-Only, or Blank.

• If you select NORMAL, the system displays dimensions as standarddimensions, using the values from the UDF, but you can modify them.This option is available only if you created the UDF as Independent.

Thread surfaceStart surface

Upto surface



NOTES

� If you select READ ONLY, the system displays the dimensionsas normal dimensions using the values from the UDF file, butyou cannot modify them.

� If you select BLANK, the system does not display thedimensions in the new model, as shown in Figure 9.

Figure 9: Invariable Dimensions Blanked

• Define any optional elements – As optional elements, you can onlyselect those elements that you already defined in the UDF. Forexample, if you had only selected Blind and Thru All, when you placethe UDF, the system would only provide you with those two choices.

• Finish the placement – Before finishing the placement, you canpreview the UDF by selecting PREVIEW from the dialog box, thenclick Done. If you do not need to preview it, you can choose OK tocomplete it.

Summary of Technique for Creating CosmeticThreadsIn summary, you should follow these steps to use a UDF to create acosmetic thread and display the thread note in the correct format on adrawing:

• Create the cosmetic thread.

• Delete and recreate the major diameter parameter as a string with thecorrect format.

• Create a UDF for the cosmetic thread.

• Create a note on the drawing with the correct format and save it to atext file for future use.



NOTES


To create cosmetic features on the part and display them on the drawing.

Method

In the first exercise, you create a cosmetic sketch on the plunger body partconsisting of the letters PTC to represent a logo on the model. In addition,you display the sketch on the drawing of the plunger body.

In the second exercise, you create a cosmetic thread on a bolt by creating auser-defined feature so that you can display the thread informationdifferently on the drawing.

EXERCISE 1: Creating a Cosmetic Sketch

Task 1. Retrieve PLUNGER_BODY_PRT and create a cosmetic sketchusing the letters PTC. Project it onto the top surface (Figure 10), of thepart and locate it with dimensions.

Note:

If you did not finish the plunger body drawing earlier, retrievePLUNGER_BODY_COSMETIC_FEATURES.PRT.

1. Click Feature > Create, >Cosmetic > Sketch. Click Project Sec> No Xhatch > Done.

2. When the system prompts you to pick the surface on which toproject the sketch, pick the surface shown in Figure 10. ClickDone Sel > Done Refs.

Figure 10: Projection Surface

Select thissurface ontowhich to projectthe sketch



NOTES

3. Define the sketching and reference planes for the cosmetic sketch.Pick DTM2 as the sketching plane for the feature and click Okayto accept the default viewing direction.

4. Click Bottom and pick DTM3 so that the yellow side of DTM3faces toward the bottom of the screen.

5. Specify the references for the text. Pick DTM2 and DTM3 as thesketcher references.

6. Close Intent Manager Help if it appears. Sketch the letters PTC inthe position shown in Figure 11.

7. Click Sketch > Text and pick the start and second point as shownin Figure 11. Type [PTC] as the text line. Type [.2] for the AspectRation. Change the font if you would like. Close the text dialogbox.

Figure 11: Text Location

8. Click Sketch> Done to finish the feature.

9. Save and close the window.

Task 2. Retrieve the plunger body drawing and erase the cosmeticsketch from some of the views on the drawing.

1. Retrieve PLUNGER_BODY_COSMETIC_FEATURES.DRW.

2. Use the toolbar icons to turn off the display of datum planes andrepaint the screen.

3. Erase the cosmetic sketch from every view except for the one inthe upper left corner of the sheet. Click Show/Erase > click Erase

> and select VIEW. Pick every view on Sheet 1 except theupper left view.

Start Point

Second Point



NOTES

4. Erase the cosmetic sketch from the views on Sheet 2. ClickWindow >New and type [2] as the sheet to view. Erase thecosmetic sketch in Section A-A. Close the window for Sheet 2, andactivate the window for Sheet 1.




NOTES

EXERCISE 2: Creating Cosmetic Threads

Task 1. Retrieve THREADED_BOLT.PRT and create a cosmetic threadon the shaft portion of the bolt.

1. Click Feature > Create > Cosmetic > Thread. Pick thecylindrical surface of the bolt as the thread surface, as shown inFigure 12.

Figure 12: Thread Surfaces

2. Define the thread so that it starts at the end of the bolt. Pick thesurface at the end of the bolt, as shown in Figure 12, as the startsurface.

3. Define the direction of feature creation to be toward the head of thebolt. Click Flip until the arrow points in the correct direction, thenselect OK.

4. Define the depth of the thread as 1.00 and the diameter as 0.45.Click Blind > Done. Type [1.00] as the depth value. Type [0.45]as the thread diameter.

5. Modify the thread parameters to define the class, form, placement,and threads per inch. Click Mod Params.

6. Set the values for the thread parameters. Type the values as shownin Table 2.

Thread surface

Startsurface



NOTES

Table 2: Values for Thread ParametersMAJOR_DIAMETER 0.45

THREADS_PER_INCH 15

FORM UNC

CLASS 2

PLACEMENT A

METRIC False

7. Click File >Exit. Click Done/Return > Preview > OK to create thefeature.

Task 2. Retrieve THREADED_BOLT.DRW and show the note for thecosmetic thread. Alter the display of the thread and the note.

1. Change the display of the cosmetic threads so that the hidden lineremoval process affects them. Edit the drawing set-up file(Advanced / Draw Setup) and set HLR_FOR_THREADS to [yes].Update and apply changes.

2. Show the thread note on the drawing in the upper left view. ClickShow/Erase. Click Show > and select FEAT_VIEW. Pickthe thread in the upper left view and close the dialog box.

3. Position the note as shown in Figure 13. Click Move, pick the note,and press the left mouse button to place it. To change the arrowposition, click Mod Attach and pick the note.

4. Click Same Ref to move the arrow along the current attachmentreference or click Change Ref to pick a new reference to which toattach the arrow.

Figure 13: Default Note Format



NOTES

Task 3. Change the format of this note so that the major diameterdisplays as a fraction. Also, change the spacing and the number of digitsin the note.

1. Click Window > THREADED_BOLT to return to the part window.

2. Delete the major diameter parameter. Click Set Up > Parameters> Feature, then pick the cosmetic thread.

3. Click Delete, select MAJOR_DIAMETER, and click Done.

4. Click Create > String to create a new string parameter calledMAJOR_DIAMETER. Type [MAJOR_DIAMETER] as theparameter name and [7/16] as the parameter value.

Tips & Techniques:

The new major diameter parameter is not associated with thediameter of the cosmetic thread. If you modify the threaddiameter, this parameter does not automatically update. Tomake the new parameter associative to the diameterdimension, you can use some advanced relations to convert thedimension to a fraction.

5. Click Window > THREADED_BOLT.DRW to return to the drawingwindow. The note no longer displays the major diameter.

6. Modify the thread note to use the new major diameter parameter.Press the right mouse button, click Modify Item, and pick the note.Press the right mouse button and click Edit Text.

7. Replace *** in the first field of the note by entering[&major_diameter:fid_#], where # is the same numberdisplayed for the other parameters.

8. Remove the spaces around the dash between the major diameterand the threads per inch. Remove the spaces around the dashbetween the form and the class.

9. Remove the space between the class and placement. Click OK tofinish the change.



NOTES

Note:

The system displays FID_238 after all of the parameter names,where Fid is the feature ID and 238 is the cosmetic thread ID.Since these parameters are feature parameters, they must callout the feature using this format.

10. Modify the number of digits for the threads per inch parameter.Click Modify > Num Digits and type [0] as the number of digits todisplay.

11. Pick the number 15.000 in the note and click Done Sel. The newnote should appear as shown in Figure 14.

Figure 14: New Note Format

Task 4. To avoid having to make these changes every time you use acosmetic thread on a drawing, create a UDF for the cosmetic thread.Create some feature parameters to use with the thread to display the notedifferently.

1. Click Window > THREADED_BOLT.PRT to return to the partwindow.

2. Create a UDF for the cosmetic thread. Click Feature > UDFLibrary > Create. Type [COSM_THREAD] as the name.

3. Define the UDF so that changes to the geometry on the originalmodel do not affect it. Click Stand Alone > Done.

4. When the system prompts you to include a reference part, enter[yes]. The system creates a copy of the current part and gives itthe name COSM_THREAD_GP.PRT.



NOTES

Tips & Techniques:

When creating the geometry for the UDF, use a very simplepart so that the reference part will be small and easy tointerpret.

5. Click Done Sel > Done > Done/Return to specify the features toinclude in the UDF. Pick the cosmetic thread feature.

6. Provide prompts for the external references, as shown in Figure 15.These are references to features other than those contained in theUDF.

7. When the system highlights the cylindrical surface of the bolt, type[Thread Surface] as the prompt.

8. When it highlights the flat surface at the end of the bolt, type[Start Surface] as the prompt. Later, when you place the UDF,these prompts appear in the message area.

Figure 15: Reference Prompts

9. Verify the accuracy of the prompts. As Pro/ENGINEER highlightsa surface on the screen and displays the prompt in the messagearea, click Next to view the next prompt or click Enter Promptand type the correct prompt.

10. After setting all of the prompts, click Done/Return to finish.

11. Define the depth and the note parameters of the cosmetic thread asvariable. Select VAR ELEMENTS and click Define, then pick thecosmetic thread. Select DEPTH and click Done > Done.

12. Define the diameter of the thread as the only variable dimensionspecifying the prompt for the dimension as Thread Diameter.Select VAR DIMS and click Define. Pick the .45 diameterdimension, and type [Thread Diameter] as the prompt.

Thread surfaceStart surface



NOTES

13. Save the model and quit the windows. Click Window >THREADED_BOLT.DRW, then click Window > Close Window.

14. Activate the part window, click Window > Activate. Save the partand close the window.

Task 5. Retrieve SCREW.PRT and place the cosmetic thread UDF on it.Retrieve the screw drawing and create a note for the thread.

1. Place the cosmetic thread UDF on the screw part. Click Feature >Create > User Defined. Select COSM_THREAD.GPH and clickOpen. Select yes to retrieve reference part.

2. Click Independent > Done to define the new thread as completelyindependent of the UDF file.

3. The system displays the SCALE menu with options for retainingthe dimensions or using a scale. Click Same Dims > Done. Type[.80] as the new thread diameter.

4. Define the invariable dimensions on the UDF so that they displayas normal dimensions. Click Normal > Done.

5. Specify the placement references that you used in the UDF, asshown in Figure 16. Pick the cylindrical surface of the screw as thethread surface and the flat end of the screw as the start surface.

Figure 16: Placement References

Thread surface

Start surface

Up To surface



NOTES

6. Change the depth of the thread so that it goes up to the surface, asshown in Figure 16. Select DEPTH and click Define.

7. Click Up To Surface > Done. Pick the surface as shown inFigure 16. Click Preview > OK, then click Done to finish thethread.

8. Retrieve SCREW.DRW.

9. Create a note for the cosmetic thread parameters. Click Create >Note. Click Leader > File > Horizontal > Standard > Default >Make Note.

10. Attach the note with an arrowhead to the edge of the cosmeticfeature in the left side view. Click On Entity > Arrow Head >Query Sel, then pick the right side edge of the thread as shown inFigure 17.

11. Click Next until the edge of the thread highlights, then clickAccept. Click Done Sel > Done. Locate the note by picking to theright of the view.

Figure 17: Note Attachment

12. Retrieve the note COSM_THREAD_NOTE.TXT.

13. Change the values for the thread diameter and the threads per inchon the note. Click Advance > Parameters > Feature. Pick thecosmetic thread.

Select the hiddenedge of thethread



NOTES

14. Click Modify > MAJOR_DIAMETER. Type [13/16]. Click Modify> THREADS_PER_INCH. Type [12]. Repaint to update the notewith the new parameter values as shown in Figure 18.

Figure 18: New Thread Note




NOTES

EXERCISE 3: Cosmetic Threads Using StandardHoles

Task 1. Create a 5”h x 5”w x 3”t protrusion.

1. Create a new part using the default template.

2. Create a rectangular protrusion. Sketch a 5 x 5 rectangle andextrude to a depth of 3.

Task 2. Create a Standard Hole.

1. Select Feature > Create > Solid > Hole and observe the dialogbox as shown in Figure 19.

Figure 19: Standard Hole Options



NOTES

2. In the HOLE TYPE section, select the Standard Hole radiobutton and make sure the following checkboxes are selected:

� Add Thread Surface

� Add Counterbore

� Add Countersink

3. Set the hole size to 7/8-9.

4. Pick the top surface as the placement plane, the front and right sidesurfaces as the reference planes.

5. Type [2.50 ] in the DISTANCE boxes for each reference.

Note:

At the bottom of the HOLE dialog box, Pro/ENGINEERpreviews the 3D note that will be created along with thisfeature. All diameter, depth, and shape callouts arerepresented in the note.

6. Complete the feature. Notice the cosmetic thread feature is createdalong with the hole – this is one feature.

Task 3. Create a drawing of the part to display the Standard Hole note.

1. Create a C-size drawing, and place a general view with the axis ofthe hole normal to the drawing.

2. Select Show > and select the hole. The note appears.

Task 4. Redefine the hole to a different type.

1. Activate the part window and select Feature > Redefine > Sel byMenu > Last Feature.

2. Change to hole size to 14-20 and complete the feature.

3. Activate the Drawing. The note may have disappeared. Select

Show > to display the note of the modified hole.

4. Try to Modify the values in the note, either on the part or on thedrawing. Notice that it is non-parametric.

5. Save the part and close the window.



NOTES


• You can create sketched cosmetic features.

• There is a difference between sketched and projected sections forcosmetic features.

• You can create cosmetic threads and show the parameters on adrawing.

• You can modify the note of a cosmetic callout to match yourcompany’s standards for callouts.

• You can create cosmetic threads, countersinks, counterbores, andtapping automatically using the Standard Hole functionality.



Page 12-1

Module

2-D DraftingIn this module, you learn how to use the 2-D Drafting tools.

Objectives


• Create draft geometry in a drawing.

• Manipulate and modify draft geometry.



NOTES

2-D DRAFTING CAPABILITIESIf you have a license for Pro/DETAIL, you can access two-dimensionaldrafting tools. When you draft 2-D entities, you do not have to regeneratethem as you would in Sketcher mode. The system does not make anyassumptions about the drafted geometry, which means that the draftentities remain in the drawing exactly as you sketch them (that is, roughly,accurately, etc.). To create perfect horizontal and vertical lines, you mustdraft them that way. You can use Pro/ENGINEER’s drafting functionalityto perform the following:

• Add 2-D entities to a Pro/ENGINEER model drawing.

• Update and maintain legacy data of existing drawings imported fromother systems.

• Create drawing symbols.

• Create a sketch of a design in Layout mode.

Note:

The configuration file optiondraw_points_in_model_units defines the currentdraft entities’ coordinate values as model units, rather thandrawing units.

Creating Draft GeometryYou can create various forms of draft geometry such as lines, arcs, circles,splines, ellipses, points, and chamfers independently from the modelgeometry or by referencing model geometry. However, draft geometrythat you create by referencing model geometry does not update if themodel geometry changes.

To locate draft geometry, you can use any of the following:

• Cross hairs

• Draft grid

• Construction geometry

• GET POINT menu


2D Draf t ing Page 12-3

NOTES

Cross Hairs

When creating draft geometry, cross hairs appear at the end of the cursor.They are useful tools for lining up new geometry with existing geometry.When one of the cross hair lines is in line with existing geometry, thecross hair changes to cyan.

Note:

The cyan color of a cross hair does not indicate that the newgeometry lines up perfectly with the existing geometry.Instead, it simply indicates that the new and existing geometryare relatively close.

Draft Grid

You can use a draft grid in Drawing mode and turn on grid snap in theENVIRONMENT dialog box to locate draft entities. Grid snap causes themouse picks to snap to the grid points, making it much easier to line upand locate draft entities to specific locations. You can alter the grid typefrom Cartesian to Polar, and vice versa, as well as change the distance.

Note:

You can still use the grid snap if the grid display is off.

Construction Geometry

Construction geometry entities are lines and circles that you can use tolocate and create 2-D draft geometry. They are similar to the guidelinesthat drafters use on drawing sheets to locate other geometry;Pro/ENGINEER displays them on the screen in gray phantom font. Youcan create the following types of construction lines:

• Horizontal

• Vertical

• At a specified angle

• Offset from an existing line

• Perpendicular to another construction line at a specified angle

The options for creating construction circles are the same as those forcreating solid circles. Once you have created construction draft geometry,



NOTES

you should either delete it, or place it on a layer and blank it. If you use alayer, you can later unblank the geometry to use it.

The GET POINT Menu

You can use the GET POINT menu options to locate points for draftgeometry in the following ways:

• Anywhere on the screen

• At the endpoint, midpoint, center of an arc or circle, or intersection oftwo entities

• Anywhere along an entity

• Relative to the last point you picked using specified x- and y-coordinate values

• Relative to the drawing origin (located in the lower-left corner) usingabsolute coordinate values

Chaining Geometry

By default, when you create draft geometry, Pro/ENGINEER allows youto create only one entity at a time. To create more than one draft entity, itmay be easier to start a chain. Chaining geometry enables you to create aseries of entities with the end point of the current entity as the startingpoint of the next entity. The system continues to create the next entity untilyou end the chain.

Manipulating Draft GeometryIn some cases, you may find it easier and faster to manipulate or reproduceexisting draft geometry rather than draft new geometry. Using the 2-Ddrafting tools available with Pro/ENGINEER, you can either alter existinggeometry or copy existing geometry.

Altering Existing Geometry

In Pro/ENGINEER, you can change 2-D geometry in the following ways:

• Translate or rotate the geometry to a new location.

• Trim or extend the geometry to square off corners.

• Break up the geometry into smaller segments.

• Change the size of entities.



NOTES

• Modify the line style of entities.

Copying Existing Geometry

You can quickly and easily create new geometry by copying existinggeometry in the following ways:

• Create multiple copies of entities.

• Mirror entities about a construction line.

• Offset an entity to create a new one.

• Copy model geometry.

Grouping Draft Geometry

When manipulating draft geometry, you can group entities together andmanipulate the entire group using some of the same options that you usewith individual entities. However, when working with draft geometrygroups, you should keep in mind the following:

• You cannot modify entities in a group by intersecting or trimming.

• You can delete all of the entities in a group or delete only the groupand retain the entities.

• You can include notes, symbols, and geometric tolerances in draftgroups.

• A group of draft cross-sections contains the cross-hatching and thebounding entities.

Modifying Draft GeometryUsing the same method that you would use to modify cross-sections inparts and assemblies, you can fill or hatch draft entities that form a closedloop, and then modify the hatching.

You can also change the font, width, and color of draft geometry lines byusing the MODIFY LINE STYLE dialog box, or copy a line style from anexisting entity. To save time, Pro/ENGINEER also allows you to createyour own user-defined fonts and store them in a font library for future use.

DRAWING SETUP FILE OPTIONSTable 1 lists the available drawing setup file options that pertainexclusively to two-dimensional drafting:



NOTES

Table 1: Drawing Setup File Options Affecting 2-D DraftingOption Value Definition

associative_dimensioning yes

no

Automatically updates adimension if the associateddraft geometry changes.

aux_line_font # line font name

(# = 1 through 10,000)

Sets auxiliary line fonts toa specified font. Uses theinteger number toassociate a line font todraft geometry. In thisway, you can make ablanket change bychanging the font nameassociated with a number.

draft_scale 1.0

value

Sets the drawing scale forthe draft entities.

line_style_length font_name default

font_name value

Sets the length of elementscomposing a font. Youmust enter this valuewhenever you want tomodify the length. Enterthe font name and thedesired value for the fontlength in system units.



NOTES


To use the 2-D drafting tools to create draft geometry.

Method

In the first exercise, you learn how to use the 2-D drafting functionalityavailable in Pro/ENGINEER to create draft geometry for symbols andlayouts, as well as to update existing 2-D drawings.

In the second exercise, you update a drawing after importing it fromanother system. You also use the 2-D drafting functionality toaccommodate a change in the design intent of the model.

EXERCISE 1: Using the 2-D Drafting Functionality

Task 1. Create an A-size drawing and add some construction geometryto use to create other entities.

1. Create a new drawing with the name [fork ]. Clear the UseTemplate check box.

2. Define the drawing with no default model, landscape orientation,and an A-size sheet.

3. Create a set of horizontal and vertical construction lines, as shownin Figure 1. Click Sketch> Construction > Constr Line>Crossed Pair > Abs Coords.

4. Type [3.5] as the X coordinate, [4.25] as the Y coordinate, and[0] as the rotation angle.



NOTES

Figure 1: Construction Lines

5. Click Offset and pick the horizontal construction line to createsome horizontal construction lines offset from the existing one.

6. Type [-.75] for the first offset line, then type [.5] as the value forthe second offset line. Press <ENTER> to finish offsetting.

7. Pick the original horizontal construction line and type [-1] as theoffset value. Press <ENTER> to finish.

8. Pick the original horizontal construction line again and type[-2.25] as the offset value. Press <ENTER> to finish.

9. Create some vertical construction lines offset from the existingone. Pick the vertical construction line and type [.5] as the offsetvalue for the first offset line, [5] as the offset value for the secondoffset line, and [-1.50] for the third offset line.

10. Press <ENTER> to finish offsetting. Pick the original verticalconstruction line and type [1] as the offset value. Press <ENTER>to finish.

11. Create the two construction circles as shown in Figure 2. ClickConstr Circ > Center/Pnt > Vertex, then pick the vertices asshown in Figure 2.



NOTES

12. Repeat this procedure to create the second construction circle.

Figure 2: Construction Circles

Task 2. Draft some of the geometry by using an arc.

1. Create an arc by locating its ends using the construction lines andcircles. Click Arc from the DRAFT GEOM menu.

2. Click Ctr/Ends > Vertex, then pick the intersection of the smallercircle and the lowest horizontal line.

3. Pick the center of the circles as the center of the arc and pick theintersection of the smaller circle and the vertical line as the otherendpoint.

4. When the system highlights a portion of the circle in red, type[yes] to accept it or [no] to reject it.

Pick this intersectionfor the center of thecircles

Pick this intersection forthe point on the first circle

Select thisintersection for thepoint on the secondcircle



NOTES

Figure 3: Arc Created

Task 3. Create some lines that begin at the end of the arc that you justcreated and chain them together.

1. Click Line > Start Chain > Horiz Line > Vertex, then pick theupper end of the arc that you just created. Finish the line at therightmost vertical line.

2. Pick the end of the next line as shown in Figure 4. Continue untilyou have created three lines. Finish by pressing the right mousebutton and click Quit from the GET POINT menu.

Pick #1 Pick #2

Pick #3



NOTES

Figure 4: Horizontal and Vertical Lines

Tips & Techniques:

To cancel line creation immediately, press the right mousebutton; to create one more line before canceling, press themiddle mouse button.

3. Create an arc at the end of the line that you just created. Click Arc> Ctr/Ends > Vertex.

4. Pick the end of the horizontal line, the center of the constructioncircles, then pick the intersection of the larger construction circleand the middle horizontal construction line to finish the arc, asshown in Figure 5.

Pick 1

Pick 2

Pick 3

Pick 4



NOTES

Figure 5: Second Arc Created

5. When the system highlights a portion of the circle in red, type[yes] to accept it or type [no] to reject it, depending on which halfhighlights.

6. Click Line > Start Chain > 2Points > Vertex to create ahorizontal line and a vertical line, as shown in Figure 6.

Pick #1

Pick #2

Pick #3



NOTES

Figure 6: New Arc and Lines

Task 4. Create a tangent end arc at the end of the line that you justcreated, then finish the sketch by extending a vertical line to the lowesthorizontal construction line.

1. Click Arc > Tang End.

2. Pick the start and end points shown in Figure 7.

3. Click Line > 2Points > Vertex and pick the end of the tangent arcand then the end point shown in Figure 5.

4. Create a fillet arc with a radius by clicking Arc > Fillet, then pickthe two lines shown in Figure 7.

5. Type [0.25] as the radius value. Return to the DETAIL menu.

Pick 3

Pick 1

Pick 2



NOTES

Figure 7: Tangent End Arc and Line

Task 5. Mirror the geometry that you just created to create the other halfof the fork.

1. Click Tools > Mirror.

2. Pick the soild lines and arcs, then click Done Sel.

3. Pick the bottom horizontal construction line to mirror about.

4. Click Done/Return to close the TOOLS menu.

Task 6. The construction lines extend off the sheet. Create onehorizontal and two vertical lines and set the line style to display ascenterlines.

1. Click Sketch > Line > 2Points > On Entity.

2. Pick points on the correct construction lines to create the new lines.Click Return to finish.

3. Delete the construction lines and circles. Click Delete from theDETAIL menu and pick each construction line and circle.

4. Change the line style of the three new lines. Click Modify > LineStyle, pick the three lines, and click Done Sel.

ARC - Pick #1

Pick these linesfor the fillet arc

ARC - Pick #2



NOTES

5. Select CENTERLINE from the STYLE drop-down list. Click Apply> Close.

Figure 8: Finished Fork

6. Save and close the model.



NOTES

EXERCISE 2: Updating a 2-D Drawing

Task 1. Import an IGES file into Pro/ENGINEER to create a newdrawing called FIXTURE, as shown in Figure 9.

1. Click File > Import > Create New Model.

2. Select MASTER.IGS and click OK.

3. Select DRAWING, type [FIXTURE] as the name, and click OK.

Figure 9: Imported Drawing

4. Zoom in on the view labeled Top View.

Task 2. Create the geometry to represent a cut on Top View.

1. Click Tools > Offset > Ent Chain.

2. Pick the horizontal line above the 2.375 dimension and click DoneSel.

3. Type [-0.4] as the offset value. Pick the outside left edge, clickDone Sel, and type [-0.8] as the offset value.



NOTES

4. Pick the outside right edge, click Done Sel, and type [-0.8] as theoffset value.

Task 3. Extend the new vertical entities so that they meet the bottomedge of the view and trim the corners together.

1. Click Trim > Bound, then pick the bottom edge of the view as thebounding entity. Pick the two new vertical lines to trim to thisboundary.

2. Click Corner and pick the portion of the new left line that youwant to retain.

3. Pick the portion of the new horizontal line that you want to retain.Repeat this procedure until you have created the view geometry, asshown in Figure 10.

Figure 10: New Top View

4. Click Create > Dimension to create the 1.40 dimension. Pick thenew horizontal entity and place the dimension using the middlemouse button.



NOTES

Task 4. Using the geometry of the top view, create the new geometryfor the front view on the drawing.

1. Reset the view to display the entire drawing, then zoom in to viewthe front view and the top view.

2. Click Tools > Offset > Ent Chain.

3. Pick the horizontal entity shown in Figure 11. Click Done Sel andtype [0.25] as the offset value.

Figure 11: Front View Geometry

4. Click Trim > Bound.

5. Pick the horizontal line you just created and pick the two verticallines in the top view.

Offset this line



NOTES

Task 5. Break the long vertical entities into pieces and then delete theportions that you do not want.

1. Click Intersect, then pick the left vertical line and the bottom edgein the top view.

2. Repeat this procedure for the right vertical line. Intersect bothvertical lines again using the edge that you offset in the front view.

3. Click Done/Return to return to the DETAIL menu. Click Deleteand pick the unwanted portions of the vertical lines.


5. [Optional] Create the geometry for the cut in the isometric viewusing the same techniques that you used earlier, as shown in Figure12.

Figure 12: Isometric View


Offset this edgeby –0.2

Offset theseedges by –0.55



NOTES


• You can use the 2-D drafting tools to create draft geometry.

• You can use draft geometry to modify an imported drawing.


Page 13-1

Module

SymbolsIn this module, you learn how to create drawing symbols.

Objectives


• Use variable text in drawing symbols.

• Create families of symbols.

• Set up symbol libraries and place previously defined symbols on adrawing.



NOTES

CREATING DRAWING SYMBOLSA drawing symbol is a collection of draft geometry and text. When youuse a symbol in a drawing, it becomes a single entity or instance. To placeit in a drawing, you can either retrieve it from a symbol library or createyour own user-defined symbol. If the symbols that you need arecommonly used throughout industry, you may be able to purchase asymbol library such as a welding symbol library.

Creating Symbol Geometry• To place a symbol on a drawing, you must first create it and save it as

a Pro/ENGINEER symbol with a .SYM extension in a specifieddirectory.

Creating an Original Symbol

Pro/ENGINEER allows you to define an original drawing symbol bydrafting the geometry. With this technique, you can define the shape of thesymbol and also add notes or cross-sections to it.

Copying 2-D Draft Geometry from an Existing Drawing

Pro/ENGINEER allows you to import a drawing and then copy the symbolgeometry to create a Pro/ENGINEER symbol.

Copying an Existing Symbol

You can copy the existing symbol and change it to create a new symbol.

Importing a Symbol

You can use an IGES, DXF, SET, TIFF, and CGM symbol that wascreated in another CAD package by importing it into Pro/ENGINEER.Once you have imported it into the system, you can change it by adding orremoving geometry or notes.

Adding Text to a SymbolYou can place text on a symbol as a free note. The system placesinvariable text on a symbol by default, which means that you cannot


Symbols Page 13-3

NOTES

change the text and it remains the same every time you use the symbol. Tocreate text that varies depending on the placement of the symbol, you canadd variable text to the symbol.

Using Variable Text

Figure 1: Creating Variable Text

If the text in your symbol must differ depending upon where you use thesymbol in your drawing, you can create the text as variable. To createvariable text, enclose the text within two back slashes, for example, \note\.This allows you to change the value of the text when you place the symbolon a drawing. You can specify the type of text to show in the note as text,integers, or floating points.

You can also show parameter values in the variable symbol text so that thesymbol text updates when the parameter changes. To display thedimension value in the symbol, enter [&dim] as the only preset value forthe variable text. When you place the symbol on a drawing and pick adimension, the system shows its value in the symbol. You can use thistechnique with any user-defined parameters, as well as Pro/REPORTparameters.

Grouping SymbolsWhen you need to create several symbols that have similar geometry, youcan create a family of symbols, referred to as a group. A single genericsymbol contains all entities pertaining to a particular symbol family. You



NOTES

can arrange geometry and text from the generic symbol into groups andsubgroups.

Figure 2: Symbol Groups

For this example, you would create a generic symbol containing ahorizontal line and two triangles. From that generic symbol, you wouldthen create two groups—Group A and Group B—defining them asexclusive. By doing so, you cannot combine Group A and Group B tocreate an instance; you can only use them separately. With these groups,you can create two instances of the symbol: Instance 1 contains Group Aand the horizontal line, whereas Instance 2 contains Group B and thehorizontal line. The horizontal line appears in both instances because youdid not include it in a group. Any entity not in a group appears in allinstances.

For the second portion of the example, you would create the same groups,but define them as independent. By doing so, you can use them separatelyor together to create an instance. This creates three instances in thisfamily.

Controlling SymbolsYou can control the display of symbols in your drawings by defining theirplacement and setting their height.


Symbols Page 13-5

NOTES

Symbol Placement

When you originally create a symbol, you must define the allowedplacement types to limit the ways in which other users can place thesymbol. If you assign the placement type as free, for example, other userscould only place the symbol on the drawing as free without using a leader.You should set the placement type according to the standard for thesymbol you are creating. You should allow other users some flexibility,but prevent them from placing it incorrectly.

Symbol Height

You can control the size of a symbol when you create it by setting theheight to a fixed size or as variable. If the symbol height is fixed, the sizeof the symbol always remains the same. To specify the height as variable,you can use three different methods:

• Base it on the units of the drawing – To use this method, you mustchange the drawing setup file.

• Base it on the units of the model – The system automaticallyadjusts the symbol’s size to stay proportional to the model if youchange the view scale.

• Relate it to the height of specific text in the symbol – The systemchanges the size of the symbol if you change the height of thespecified text.

Storing SymbolsTo specify the directory in which Pro/ENGINEER should store eachsymbol, set the configuration file option pro_symbol_dir. If you donot specify a path in the configuration file, the system stores symbols inthe working directory. You can enter an offset path that branches off ofpro_symbol_dir. For example, for a UNIX-based system, if you havespecified pro_symbol_dir as /usr/proe/symbols, then:

• If you press <ENTER>, the system places the symbol in/usr/proe/symbols.

• If you enter [down_one_dir], it stores the symbol in/usr/proe/symbols/down_one_dir.

• You cannot go up the directory tree by entering [..].

• If you want to store the symbol in a directory that you cannot access asan offset of the current pro_symbol_dir, changepro_symbol_dir before you begin.



NOTES

• You do not have to store the symbol to use it in a drawing. However, ifyou do not write it to disk, the system only stores it locally in thedrawing and does not make it available for use in other drawings or byother users.

Figure 3: Symbol Attributes

PLACING SYMBOLS ON A DRAWINGWhen placing symbols on a drawing, Pro/ENGINEER allows you toretrieve a system symbol or a user symbol. You can obtain systemsymbols by purchasing a library of welding symbols, electronic symbols,etc. Once you retrieve the appropriate symbol, you must specify thefollowing using the SYMBOL INSTANCE dialog box:

• Relationship between the symbol being placed and the originalsymbol.

• Values for the variable text in the symbol.

• Groups that the system should include in this instance.

Defining the Relationship Between the SymbolInstance and Original SymbolWhen you place a symbol on a drawing, you should specify if you wantthe system to change the symbol instance when the original symbolchanges. Using this method, you can avoid having to manually updateexisting drawings every time the symbol definition changes (for example,because of a new standard).


Symbols Page 13-7

NOTES

If you do not need to reflect those changes in the symbol instance, you cansimply place it independently of the original symbol. Pro/ENGINEERthen creates a copy of the instance locally in the drawing.

Figure 4: Symbol Placement

Changing Variable Text Values in a SymbolInstanceWhen you place a symbol with variable text on a drawing, you can changethe content of the note included in the symbol instance. To modify thetext, you can select any values that you specified when you defined thesymbol, but the system limits you to one value for each instance ofvariable text.

Figure 5: Variable Text

Selecting Groups to Include in the InstanceAfter you create a family of symbols by defining a group, you can use theSYMBOL INSTANCE dialog box to place one of the instances of thisfamily on a drawing.



NOTES

Figure 6: Symbols Group

If the groups are independent, you can select any number of groups tobuild the instance; if the groups are exclusive, you can only select onegroup to include in the instance. As you select these groups to include, youcan preview the symbol. When the symbol is correct, you can then place iton the drawing.

REDEFINING EXISTING SYMBOLSOnce you have placed a symbol on a drawing, you can redefine it at anytime using the same method that you used to create it originally. You canchange variable text values, grouping information, allowed placementtypes, and text or lines styles, as well as add or remove geometry or notes.

Note:

Redefining a symbol affects the display of all subsequentinstances and all symbol instances that you have added to thedrawing using the Use Definition option.

Updating a Redefined Symbol in a DrawingWhen you place a symbol in a drawing after redefining it, the system doesnot require you to update it in the drawing to reflect the most recentdefinition. It only asks you to update it if the version of the retrievedsymbol is later than the version of a symbol on the drawing that has thesame name. Updating the drawing symbol changes every symbol in the


Symbols Page 13-9

NOTES

drawing with that name. If you do not update it in the current drawing, anyadditional instances that you create are of that version, not the most recentone. To update an existing symbol, retrieve it into the drawing and enter[Y] when Pro/ENGINEER asks you if you want to update all instances ofthe symbol in the current drawing to the most recent version.

USING WELDING SYMBOLSWith a Pro/DETAIL license, you can access the Welding SymbolsLibrary, which contains a collection of generic system symbols accordingto ANSI and ISO standards. Using this library, you can create a variety ofwelding, brazing, and examination symbols in a drawing.

Welding symbols are located in the System Symbols of the OPEN dialogbox.

USING SURFACE FINISH SYMBOLSIf you have a Pro/DETAIL license, you can access a set of standardsurface finish symbols in the directoryLOADDIRECTORY/SYMBOLS/SURFFINS. The system does not placesurface finish symbols as it would place other symbols in a drawing.Before you can place a surface finish, you must specify it as a generic,machined, or unmachined symbol, and provide a roughness height value,if needed.

Surface finish symbols are located in the System Symbols of the OPENdialog box.

Table 1 lists the available configuration file options that control drawingsymbols.



NOTES

Table 1: Configuration File Options Affecting Drawing SymbolsOption Value Definition

pro_surface_finish_dir directory path Sets the default directoryto which the system savessurface finish symbols andlater retrieves them.

pro_symbol_dir directory path Sets the default directoryfrom which the systemsaves symbols and laterretrieves them.

sym_leader_orient_move_

text

no

yes

Automatically regroups asymbol after moving text.

DRAWING SETUP FILE OPTIONSTable 2: Drawing Setup File Options Affecting DrawingSymbols

Option Value Definition

node_radius default

value

Controls the display ofnodes in symbols.

sym_flip_rotated_text no

yes

Flips any text in a RotateText symbol that is upsidedown. If set to “yes,” andthe symbol orientation is+/-90°, the system flips thetext, rotating along withthe symbol.


Symbols Page 13-11

NOTES


Goal

To create and place symbols on a drawing.

Method

In the first exercise, you create a symbol using variable text and then

place it on a drawing.

In the second exercise, you create a group of symbols and place thedifferent variations of the symbol on a drawing.

EXERCISE 1: Creating a Symbol with Variable Text

Task 1. Retrieve PLUNGER_BODY.DRW and draft the geometry of asymbol. Add a note to the symbol with variable text.

Note:

If you did not finish the plunger body drawing earlier, retrievePLUNGER_BODY_SYMBOLS.DRW.

1. Create the symbol shown in Figure 7. Click Create > SymbolDefinition > Define and type [delta] as the name of the symbol.

2. Increase the size of the sub-window by dragging the corner of thewindow to a new location.

Figure 7: Delta Symbol



NOTES

3. Set up the draft grid by turning it on, changing the grid size, andturning on the grid snap. Click Detail > Modify > Grid > DraftGrid > Grid On. Click Grid Params > X&Y Spacing, then type[0.4].

4. Click Done/Return from the MODIFY DRAW menu. Select theSnap to Grid check box in the ENVIRONMENT dialog box.

5. Zoom in to approximately 4 grid squares.

6. Using the 2-D drafting functionality, sketch a triangle. Use twogrid squares for the horizontal length and the height of the triangle.

7. Click Sketch > Line > 2Points > Pick Pnt. Sketch the three sidesof the triangle. Since you are not using a chain, pick a starting andending point for each line.

8. Round off the corners of the triangle with three fillet arcs. ClickArc > Fillet, then pick the two lines that compose the corner of thetriangle.

9. Type [0.1] as the radius of the arc. Repeat this procedure for eachcorner.

10. Click Return from the DRAFT GEOM menu.

11. Turn off the grid snap. Clear the Snap to Grid check box.

12. Create a note in the center of the triangle. Click Create > Note.Click No Leader > Enter > Horizontal > Standard, Center >Make Note. Locate the note in the center of the triangle.

13. Create the note so that so that you can easily change the text whenyou place it. Type [\num\] as the note text and press <ENTER>twice to finish.

14. Click Done/Return > Done/Return.

Task 2. Define the attributes of the symbol. Allow any user to place thesymbol using free placement, a left leader, or a right leader.

1. Click Attributes to define the attributes of the symbol.

2. Using the SYMBOL ATTRIBUTES dialog box, define the attributesso that the person that places the symbol can use a free placement,a leader attached to the left side, or a leader attached to the rightside.


Symbols Page 13-13

NOTES

3. Select FREE and specify the symbol origin by picking the arc at thetop of the triangle. Select LEFT LEADER and pick the arc on theleft side of the triangle. Select RIGHT LEADER and pick the arc onthe right side of the triangle.

Task 3. Define the height of the symbol based on the text height.Specify the preset values of the variable text as the numbers one throughfive.

1. Select VARIABLE–TEXT RELATED and pick the variable note asthe reference text.

2. Specify the preset values of the variable text as one through five.

3. Click the Var Text tab.

4. Select NUM on the left side of the dialog box and enter onethrough five in the PRESET VALUES FOR: area.

5. Select INTEGER so that the system only uses integers in thissymbol. Click OK to finish defining the symbol attributes.

6. Save the symbol for use in future drawings. Click Done from theSYMBOL EDIT menu. Click Write and press <ENTER> to acceptthe default directory. Click Done/Return to return to the DETAILmenu.

Task 4. Place the delta symbol on the plunger drawing with a leader.

1. Click Create > Symbol > Instance. Select DELTA from theSYMBOL DEFINITION drop-down list.

2. Attach the symbol to the lower left view with a leader, as shown inFigure 8. Select WITH LEADERS from the TYPE drop-down list.

3. Accept the defaults On Entity > Arrow Head and pick the rightside edge of the lower left view.

4. Click Done Sel > Done to place the symbol with one leader.Locate the symbol to the right of the view.



NOTES

Figure 8: Symbol Location

5. Change the variable text to display the number 3 on the symbol.Click the Var Text tab, then select 3 from the NUM drop-down list.

6. Click OK to finish placing the symbol. Click Done/Return fromthe SYMBOL TYPE menu.

Note:

After you place the symbol, you can use Move and ModAttach to change its position, Modify to change the numberfor the variable text, and Modify > Symbol to reopen theSYMBOL INSTANCE dialog box.

7. Place a surface finish symbol on the plunger body drawing.Machine the symbol with a roughness height of 32.

8. Click Create > Surf Finish > Retrieve > Machined >Open>Standard1.sym > Open to create a surface finish symbol on theplunger body drawing.

9. Attach the symbol to a surface with a leader, as shown in Figure 9.Click Leader and pick the surface.

10. Click Done Sel > Done. Pick a position for the symbol and type[32] as the roughness height.

11. Use the Move > Move Text > Mod Attach options to repositionthe symbol.


Symbols Page 13-15

NOTES

Figure 9: Surface Finish Symbol

Task 5. Create a new symbol to use as a BOM balloon. Copy thesymbol created earlier and add two notes to use for the item number andthe quantity. Create the values as variable text notes so that they willchange when you use them in a drawing.

1. Create a new drawing symbol called DELTA_BOM. Click Create,Symbol, Definition, and Define. Enter [DELTA_BOM] as thesymbol name.

2. Copy the delta symbol that you created earlier in the exercise.Click Copy Symbol, DELTA.SYM and click Open. Accept thedefault value for the instance height, if prompted.

3. Locate the symbol in the middle of the new window and clickDone from the ADJUST INST menu. Press <CTRL> and themouse buttons to zoom in on the symbol.

4. Change the variable text in the symbol to use the item number in aBOM. Click Mod Text > Text Line, then pick the note.

5. In the message area, backspace over \num\ and type[\item_num\]. Press <ENTER>. Click Done/Return from theMODIFY TEXT menu.

6. Create a note and locate it to the right of the triangle. Click Detail> Create > Note.

7. Click No Leader > Enter > Horizontal > Standard > Left > MakeNote. Locate the note to the right of the triangle.



NOTES

8. Create the note so that it displays the quantity for a component inan assembly. Type [x \comp_qty\].

9. Press <ENTER> twice to finish. Click Move to align the notesvertically.


Task 6. Define the attributes of the symbol to use whenever you placethis custom balloon on a drawing.

1. Define the attributes of the symbol with a left and right leaderplacement. Click Attributes.

2. Select FREE and pick the arc at the top of the triangle. Select LEFTLEADER and pick the arc on the left side of the triangle.

3. Select RIGHT LEADER and pick the arc on the right side of thetriangle.

4. Define the height of the symbol based on the height of the variabletext in the symbol. Select VARIABLE–TEXT RELATED and pickthe variable note as the reference text.

5. Define the default values for the variable text as the index numberand quantity for the BOM. Click the Var Text tab.

6. Select ITEM_NUM on the left side of the dialog box and type[index] in lower case in the PRESET VALUES FOR: area.

7. Select COMP_QTY on the left side of the dialog box and type[qty] in lower case in the PRESET VALUES FOR: area.

8. Select TEXT and click OK and Done.

9. Save the symbol for use in future drawings.



Symbols Page 13-17

NOTES

EXERCISE 2: Creating Symbol Groups

Task 1. Create a new drawing and draft the geometry of the symbol bycopying the draft geometry from the drawing. The geometry shouldconsist of a circle, a square, and some arrows.

1. Create a new A-size, landscape drawing named GROUPS. Clear theUse default template check box and set Default Model to none.

2. Turn on the display of the draft grid and change the X and Yspacing to [0.1]. Zoom in so that you can see approximately 20grid squares across the screen.

3. Turn on grid snap.

4. Create the sketch as shown in Figure 10, using the 2-D draftingfunctionality. Create a square that is 10 grid squares by 10 gridsquares.

5. Click Sketch > Line > 2Points. Sketch the geometry of thesquare.

Figure 10: Generic Symbol

6. Create a circle centered inside the square and with a diameter of1.00. Click Circle > Center/Dia.

7. Pick the center of the square for the center of the circle, then type[1] as the diameter.

8. Create the arrows to the left and the right of the square. Click Line> 2Points, then sketch the geometry of each arrow.

9. Click Return from the DRAFT GEOM menu to finish.



NOTES

10. Create a note with variable text centered in the circle. Click Create> Note.

11. Click No Leader > Enter > Horizontal> Standard Center> MakeNote. Locate the note in the center of the circle.

12. Enter [\no\] as the note text and press <ENTER> twice to finish.Click Done/Return from the NOTES TYPE menu.

13. Change the text height to 0.25. Click Modify > Text > TextHeight.

14. Pick the note and click Done Sel. Type [0.25]. Return toDETAIL menu.

15. Create a symbol called GEN_SYM. Click Create > SymbolDefinition > Define. Type [GEN_SYM] as the name.

16. Copy the geometry from the drawing to create the symbol. ClickCopy Drawing > Pick Many, pick all the entities on the drawingand click Done Sel. Pro/ENGINEER copies the entities into thesub-window.

Task 2. Create two symbol groups: one with the square and one with thecircle. Each group will have the option for the right or left arrows.

1. Create a group called square and pick all of the entities except forthe circle. Click Groups > Create and type [SQUARE] as the name.

2. Click Pick Many and draw a pick box surrounding the entiresymbol. Click Unsel Item and pick the circle. Click Done Sel tofinish.

3. Create a group called circle and pick all of the entities except forthe square. Click Create and type [CIRCLE] as the name.

4. Click Pick Many and draw a pick box surrounding the entiresymbol.

5. Click Unsel Item and pick one of the lines that compose thesquare. Click Unsel Item again and pick another line of the square.

6. Continue with this process until you have unselected the entiresquare. Click Done Sel to finish.


Symbols Page 13-19

NOTES

7. Define the group attributes to be exclusive at this level so thatwhen you use the symbol, you can only place one of the instances(square or circle) at one time. Click Group Attr > Exclusive.

8. Click Change Level > Square > This Level to change to thesquare level so you can create some variations of the squaresymbol.

9. Create two variations within the square group: one with the leftarrow and the other with the right arrow. Click Create and type[LEFT_ARROW] as the name.

10. Pick the square box, the note, and the arrow on the left side of thesymbol, then click Done Sel.

11. Click Create and type [RIGHT_ARROW] as the name. Pick thesquare box, the note, and the arrow on the right side of the symbol,then click Done Sel.

12. Define the attributes at the square level as exclusive so that youcan display the square on the screen as a symbol with a left arrowor a right arrow, but not both. Click Group Attr > Exclusive.

13. Click Change Level > Up > Circle > This Level to change to thecircle level so that you can create some variations of the circlesymbol.

14. Create two variations within the circle group: one with the leftarrow and the other with the right arrow. Click Create and type[LEFT_ARROW] as the name.

15. Pick the circle, the note, and the arrow on the left side of thesymbol, then click Done Sel.

16. Click Create and type [RIGHT_ARROW] as the name. Pick thecircle, the note, and the arrow on the right side of the symbol, thenclick Done Sel.

17. Define the attributes at the circle level as independent so that youcan display the circle on the screen as a symbol with a left arrow, aright arrow, or both. Click Group Attr > Independent.

18. Click Done/Return from the SYMBOL GROUPS menu.

19. Define the attributes for this symbol using a free placement. ClickAttributes and select FREE. Pick the center of the circle as theorigin.



NOTES

20. Click the Var Text tab and enter [1] as the value for the variabletext. Select INTEGER and click OK to finish defining the attributes.Click Done.

21. Save the symbol to disk. Click Write and press <ENTER> to takethe default directory.

22. Close the current window.

Task 3. Create a new drawing and place the different variations of thesymbol on the drawing.

1. Create a new A-size drawing called SYMBOLS in a landscapeorientation. Do not use a drawing template and set Default Modelto none.

2. Place the square variations of the symbol on the drawing. ClickCreate > Symbol > Instance.

3. Click Retrieve…, select GEN_SYM and click Open.

4. Select FREE NOTE from the TYPE drop-down list and pick aposition on the drawing for the symbol.

5. Click the Grouping tab and pick the plus sign beside square.

6. Select SQUARE > LEFT_ARROW and click OK.

7. Click the Placement tab and select FREE NOTE from the TYPEdrop-down list.

8. Pick below the first symbol. Click the Grouping tab and selectSQUARE > RIGHT_ARROW.

9. When you select RIGHT_ARROW, the system automaticallyunselects LEFT_ARROW because the attributes for the square levelare set to exclusive.

10. Click New Inst.

11. Place the circle variations of the symbol on the drawing. Click thePlacement tab and select FREE NOTE from the TYPE drop-downlist, then pick to the right of the first symbol.

12. Click the Grouping tab and click the plus sign next to circle.Select CIRCLE > LEFT_ARROW. When you select CIRCLE, the


Symbols Page 13-21

NOTES

system automatically unselects SQUARE because the attributes forthe top level are set to exclusive.

13. Click New Inst.

14. Click the Placement tab and select FREE NOTE from the TYPEdrop-down list, then pick a position similar to the one shown inFigure 11.

15. Click the Grouping tab and select CIRCLE > RIGHT_ARROW.When you select RIGHT_ARROW, the system does notautomatically unselect LEFT_ARROW because the attributes forthe circle level are set to independent.

16. Click New Inst.

17. Click the Placement tab and select FREE NOTE from the TYPEdrop-down list, then pick a position similar to the one shown inFigure 11.

18. Click the Grouping tab and select CIRCLE > RIGHT_ARROW>LEFT_ARROW. Click OK to finish.

Figure 11: Symbol Instances




NOTES


• You can create a symbol with variable text.

• You can create a group of symbol instances.


Page 14-1

Module

Using Layers to Control Drawing DisplayIn this module, you learn how to create layers and associate drawing

items to them.

Objectives


• Create a new layer in a drawing.

• Specify the display of the layer in the drawing.



NOTES

PURPOSE OF LAYERSA layer is a grouping of model items such as features or datum planes.You associate items to a layer so that you can manipulate themcollectively.

In Drawing mode, layers are typically used to blank model constructiongeometry, such as surfaces, curves, planes, points or axis. They are alsouseful for manipulating draft geometry when working with legacy data.

Creating a Layer in a Drawing

Figure 1: Layers Dialog Box

Although layers can represent different entities, you always create them byfollowing these three steps:

• Create the layer.

• Associate items to the layer.

• Determine the display status of the layer.


Layers Page 14-3

NOTES

Creating the LayerWhen layers are created you must enter a layer name. It is recommendedthat you refer to your company layering standards to ensure the name youchoose follows these guidelines. Also, you should verify that the layer youare intending to create does not already exist in the model.

Associating Items to LayersOnce you have created a layer, you can then associate specific items to it.You can place an item on a layer using three basic methods:

Setting up a Layer Manually

You select features by picking on the model or in the MODEL TREE.

Copying Layer Information

You can quickly copy the items associated with one layer and associatethe same items to a new layer using the copy/paste options. Likewise,items can be moved from one layer to another using the cut/paste options.

Creating a Layer Automatically

When assigning names to layers and associating items to them, you shoulduse common naming conventions to make it easier for any user tomanipulate the model. The most effective way to make sure that all usersunderstand what each of your layers represents is to use default layers.When you create a default layer, the system automatically adds specificentities to it as you create them. To create a default layer, set theconfiguration file option def_layer by specifying the value as type-option layername, where type-option is the type of item that you want thesystem to place on the layer, and layername is the name of the layer.

Table 1 lists the available configuration file options that control defaultlayers.



NOTES

Table 1: Configuration File Options Affecting Default Layers

Value Description Value Description

layer_detail_ item draft items layer_driven_dim driven dimensions

layer_assem_member

assembly members layer_draft_dim draft dimensions

layer_feature all features layer_refdim all referencedimensions

layer_geom_feat features withgeometry

layer_part_refdim part referencedimensions

layer_nogeom_feat features withoutgeometry

layer_draft_refdim draft referencedimensions

layer_cosm_sketch cosmetic sketches layer_note drawing notes

layer_axis features with axes layer_gtol geometrictolerances

layer_quilts quilts layer_symbol symbols

layer_surface surface features layer_sfin surface finishsymbols

layer_datum datum planes layer_draft_entity all draft entities

layer_point datum points layer_draft_constr draft constructionentities

layer_curve datum curves layer_draft_geom draft geometryentities

layer_csys datum coordinatesystems

layer_draft_hidden draft hidden entities

layer_curve_ent curve entities layer_draft_grp draft groups

layer_dim all dimensions layer_draft_datum draft datums

layer_parameter_

dim

parameterdimension

layer_dwg_table drawing tables

11 default layers ofthe form:

layer_featuretype_

feat

where “featuretype”is any of thefollowing: hole,round, chamfer,slot, cut, protrusion,rib, draft, shell,corn_chamf,assy_cut

layer_snap_line snap lines

Specifying the Display of a LayerYou can control the display of the model layer in your drawing withouthaving to change the part or assembly in which that item was created

• Showing a layer displays all items on that layer on the screen.


Layers Page 14-5

NOTES

• Blanking a layer removes from the screen any item on that layer thatdoes not affect mass properties.

• Isolating a layer displays all items on that layer, but removes all non-mass items on any other layer from the screen.

When working with the display status of layers, keep in mind thefollowing:

• To display the items of a layer that has been set to Blank, Isolate, orHide, set the display status to Show.

• The Blank and Isolate display options do not affect solid geometry.The only exception to this rule is that you can blank components in anassembly from the screen.

• The Isolate display status takes priority over the Blank status.

• For Assembly layers, if you set a specific layer to Isolate,Pro/ENGINEER blanks all other layers and also blanks all other itemsthat are not associated to any layer.

• For Assembly layers, Isolate affects the level of the member and thelevels above it; Blank affects the level of the member and the levelsbelow it.

• For Assembly layers, to control the display status of items on layers inlower-level models, you should assign common names to the layersthroughout the levels of the assembly. Any changes that you make tothe display status of an upper-level layer then propagate through thelevels to all other layers with the same name.

Note:

Pro/ENGINEER does not change the display status of a layerwhen you save the object. The next time that you retrieve theobject, the display status reverts back to Show for all layers.To save the display status with the object, you must selectSave Status from the LAYER DISPLAY dialog box.

Controlling Layer Display in the DrawingYou can control the layer display in a drawing by using any of thefollowing methods:

• Separating drawing and model layers – Forcing a drawing to ignorethe layer status in its model completely when determining if it shoulddisplay an item on a layer.



NOTES

• Controlling drawing and model layers simultaneously – Settingthe display of model layers to follow the display of drawing layerswith the same name.

• Manipulating layer display status in individual views – Displayingdrawing layers independently for individual drawing views or makingthe layer display dependent on the drawing.

Separating Drawing and Model Layers

You can set several drawing setup file options to allow you to controldarwing layer display status independant of the model. This is useful whenworking with GTOL Set Datums. These datums must be displayed on thedrawing, but may not need to be visible in the model. Likewise, theconstruction datum planes need to be visible when manipulating the modelfeatures, but do not need to be shown on the drawing.

Controlling Drawing and Model Layers Simultaneously

You can set the display of model layers to follow the display of drawinglayers with the same name. For example, if you blank the drawing layerdatums, the system also blanks all items on the datums layer of the model.If the model is an assembly and you add another component with a layerof the same name, it automatically sets the display of any items on themodel layer named datums to be the same as the drawing layer.

Manipulating Layer Display Status in Individual Views

There may be cases where the layer display in one view must be differentfrom the other views. Drawing views do not have individual layers foreach view—they use the layers in the drawing. However, you can controlthe display status of drawing layers separately for each view using theLAYERS DIALOG box.

Independent View Display

The display of detailed views are dependent on the parent view. You canuse the display mode settings to allow you to control these viewsindependent of the parent. This will also allow you to set the layer displayof a detailed view different from the parent.


Layers Page 14-7

NOTES

DRAWING SETUP FILE OPTIONSTable 2 lists the available drawing setup file options that control layercreation in Drawing mode.

Table 2: Drawing Setup File Options Affecting LayersOption Value Description

draw_layer_overrides_

model

yes

no

Directs the drawing layerdisplay setting todetermine the setting of thedrawing model layers withthe same name. If set to“yes,” the systemimplicitly includesdrawing model layers indrawing layers with thesame name for thepurposes of setting display.If set to “no,” it ignoresnondrawing layers whenyou set the display statusof layers in the drawingmodel.

ignore_model_layer_status

yes

no

If set to “yes,” the systemignores changes to all layerstatuses in the model of thedrawing made in anothermode.



NOTES


Goal

To use layers to control drawing display.

Method

In this exercise, you learn how to use layers to control your drawing

display and override the environment settings for datum planes, axes,

coordinate systems, and points.

EXERCISE 1: Using Layers to Control DrawingDisplay

Task 1. Retrieve the plunger body part. Create a layer for the coordinatesystem on the model.


Note:

If you did not finish the plunger body drawing earlier, retrievePLUNGER_BODY_LAYERS.PRT.

2. Turn on the display of coordinate systems and turn off the displayof planes and axes; repaint the screen.

3. Click View > Layers. Click and type [CSYS_PART_DEF] as thelayer name. Click OK.

4. Be sure the layer name CSYS_PART_DEF is selected and click

.

5. Click Feature, and select the coordinate systemCSYS_PART_DEF from the model.

6. Click Done Sel > Done/Return.


Layers Page 14-9

NOTES

7. Select CSYS_PART_DEF and click and repaint the screen. Thecoordinate system should no longer appear on the screen.

Task 2. Although you have turned off the datum plane display, datumplane A remains on the screen because the environment does not affect setdatums. Remove Datum A from display by creating a layer, associatingdatum A to that layer, and then blanking that layer.

1. Type [SET_DATUMS] as the name.

2. Make sure the layer SET_DATUMS is selected and add featureDatum A to this layer.

3. Blank the layer SET_DATUMS that you just created so that thedatum no longer appears on the screen

4. Save the part and close the window

Task 3. Retrieve the plunger body drawing and turn on the display ofdatum planes, axes, coordinate systems, and points. Notice that all of theitems now appear on the screen. Set up a layer for datum planes and blankthe layer.


Note:

If you did not finish the plunger body drawing earlier, retrievePLUNGER_BODY_LAYERS.DRW.

2. Use the toolbar icons to turn on the display of datum planes,coordinate systems, and datum axes; then repaint the screen.

3. Create a layer for datum planes and associate the default datumplanes to this layer. Type [DTMS_PART_DEF] as the layer name.

4. Make sure the layer name DTMS_PART_DEF is selected, and addfeatures DTM1, DTM2, and DTM3 from the model.

Tips & Techniques:

You can easily select datum planes using the MODEL TREEtool; otherwise, you should always use the Query Sel optionto ensure that you select the appropriate datums.



NOTES

5. Blank the layer DTMS_PART_DEF so that the datums no longerdisplay on the screen.

Note:

The system automatically repaints the screen after changingthe layer status in the drawing mode.

6. Determine which items are associated to the XSEC_DATUMSlayer. Click Tree > Highlight. Select XSEC_DATUMS. Anotherdatum plane highlights on the screen.

7. Click Show > Layer Items. Click the [+] to expand theXSEC_DATUMS layer and PLUNGER_BODY.PRT. The featureassociated to this layer is listed.

8. Blank the XSEC_DATUMS layer. The datum plane should nolonger appear on the screen.

Note:

This system created this layer by using the default layersfunctionality. When you create datums to use in cross-sections,the system automatically adds them to this layer.

Task 4. Create a layer for the datum axes on the drawing and blank thatlayer.

1. Type [DATUM_AXES] as the layer name.

2. Associate all the datum axes, except the set datum D, to the layerDATUM_AXES. Make sure the layer name DATUM_AXES isselected. When adding items, click Text > Sel By Menu > Axis.Select all axes, them remove axis D from the list.

3. Blank the layer DATUM_AXES so that the axis names no longerappear on the screen.

4. Blank the datum coordinate system from all the views on thedrawing.


Layers Page 14-11

NOTES

Task 5. Create a layer for the set axis D and blank that layer from someof the views on the drawing, but not all views.

1. Create a layer for the set datum axis D. Type [SET_AXES] as thename.

2. Associate the datum axis D to the layer that you just created. Makesure the layer SET AXES is selected and use add text to pick axisD.

3. Make the view in the lower right corner independent of the rest ofthe drawing. Select DRAWING VIEW from the ACTIVE OBJECTdrop-down list; then pick the lower right view.

4. Alter the display status of the lower right view to blank theSET_AXES layer.

5. Repeat this procedure for the upper left view.

6. [Optional] Create a layer for the snap lines on the drawing. Assignthe snap lines to the layer and blank the layer.

7. The drawing should look like the one shown in Figure 2. Save it.The system displays a message to warn you that it is not going tosave the layer display status. You must explicitly save the surface,curves and points display. Click View >Layers > Save Status >Close.

8. Save the file and close window.



NOTES



Layers Page 14-13

NOTES


• You can create a layer in a drawing.

• You can specify the display of a layer.



Page 15-1

Module

Resolving Regeneration ProblemsIn this module, you learn how to resolve regeneration failures in

drawings.

Objectives


• Identify failed model features.

• Determine the reason the model features failed.

• Resolve the regeneration failure.



NOTES

RESOLVING FEATURE FAILURESFeatures fail regeneration for a variety of reasons, but failure usuallyresults from a conflict between two features. In Drawing mode, thisusually occurs after you modify a dimension and regenerate the model.Regeneration failures are actually beneficial for several reasons:

• Pro/ENGINEER automatically places you in an environment in whichyou can diagnose and resolve the problem.

• After you resolve the problem, the resulting model is more flexible androbust than it was originally.

• Since the model is more flexible, you can make future changes easily.

If Pro/ENGINEER detects a conflict between two features and is unable tosuccessfully regenerate, it retrieves the model into a subwindow andplaces you in the RESOLVE ENVIRONMENT dialog box. Once you enterthis environment, you should identify the failed feature and determine thecause of the failure before trying to resolve the problem.

Identifying the Failed FeatureWhen a feature fails regeneration, a diagnostics window appears on thescreen, which provides information about the failed feature such as thefeature type and number. Although this information is helpful, sometimesit is not sufficient for determining which feature failed. In those cases, youcan investigate further.

Investigating

When a feature fails regeneration, the system displays on the screen onlythe features that successfully regenerated. Therefore, it does not allow youto view the failed feature or any feature that comes after it in theregeneration cycle. After reviewing the information in the diagnosticswindow, you can examine the failed feature or subsequent features byworking on a backup model.

The backup model shows all of the features in their pre-regenerated state.You can use it to view the failed feature on the screen and modify orrestore dimensions of features that are not displayed on the current model.If you have selected MAKE REGEN BACKUP in the DEFAULT ACTIONSarea of the ENVIRONMENT dialog box, Pro/ENGINEER saves a backupcopy of the model to the hard drive upon each regeneration. If the modelregenerates successfully, the system automatically removes the backup


Reso lv ing Regenerat ion Problems Page 15-3

NOTES

from the hard drive; but if you have a regeneration failure, the backupmodel is available for you to use.

Note:

Using the regeneration backup results in longer regenerationtimes because the system must save the model to the harddrive in addition to regenerating it.

Using the Last Saved Version of the Model

If you have not selected MAKE REGEN BACKUP in the ENVIRONMENTdialog box, you can still use a backup model. Pro/ENGINEER uses thelast saved version of the model as the backup. However, if you have notsaved recently, the features that you need may not exist in the last savedversion of your model. To avoid this problem, after the model failsregeneration, undo the changes and save the model. After saving, performthe task that caused the failure again. This technique provides you with auseful backup model.

Determining the Cause of the FailureOften, the most challenging task that you must perform in order to solveregeneration problems is determining why the feature failed regeneration.If the information that the system provides in the diagnostics window isnot sufficient, you can use the Investigate menu options to access othertools that can assist you in determining the cause:

• Backup Model – With the backup model, you can view the part priorto the regeneration failure. The current model does not display thefailed feature, so you cannot see the problem on the screen. Thebackup model is probably the most useful tool available wheninvestigating the problem.

• List Changes – Lists the changes that have been made to the model todirect you to the problem (for example, modified dimensions).

• Geom Check – Provides you with information or recommendationsthat may be useful and highlights problematic geometry on the screen.

• Show Refs – Shows each missing or invalid references on the screenthat you used for a feature. You can use the backup model to highlighttheir original location.

• Failed Geom – Displays the failed geometry on the screen to help youvisualize the problem.



NOTES

• Roll To – Simplifies the model by removing some of the features,making it easier to concentrate on the failed geometry.

Fixing the FailureThe method that you should use to resolve the regeneration failuredepends upon the information that you obtained through yourinvestigation of the problem. If you determine that you should not havemade the original modification, you can use the Fix Model or Quick Fixoption to undo any changes and return your model to its original state.

Working on the Failed Feature Only

The Quick Fix option allows you to use a shortcut method to work on thefailed feature only. Using the QUICK FIX menu, you can redefine,reroute, delete, or suppress the feature.

Working on Any Feature

The Fix Model option allows you to work on any feature on the currentmodel or the backup model. Using the FIX MODEL menu, you canresolve the failed feature by doing any of the following:

• Change the references of a feature – If a feature failed regenerationbecause of an invalid or missing reference, you can redefine or reroutethe feature to use a different reference.

• Redefine a feature – You can redefine a feature to change the type ofdepth, the shape of the sketch, the attributes, and the direction of thefeature. When redefining the sketch, the system displays it the way itappeared at the time of the feature failure to help you determine thecause.

• Modify the dimensions of a feature – You can change dimensions toresolve the problem. For example, changing the radius of a round mayresult in a successful regeneration.

• Insert new features – You can reroute a feature by inserting a datumplane before the failed feature and rerouting to the new plane.

• Change the part accuracy – If the system indicates that you shouldincrease the part accuracy (due to having very small features on a verylarge model), you can change the part accuracy to resolve thisproblem. The default accuracy of 0.0012 is acceptable for the majorityof cases. If you change the accuracy, you should make very minorchanges until you isolate the problem.



NOTES

Note:

Increasing the part accuracy results in longer regenerationtimes and larger file sizes. You should only use this method ifyou are unable to resolve the problem using any other method.

Tips on Resolving Regeneration FailuresWhen you encounter a regeneration failure, keep in mind that only onefeature can fail in Pro/ENGINEER at a time—not the entire part—and thefailing feature might not be the actual cause of your problem. You should,do more to investigate the problem beyond simply examining the failedfeature.

To minimize regeneration failures, you should make changes to the modelas you design it. That is, as you add a feature to the design, make somechanges to observe how the feature behaves. In this way, you can detectany problems before moving on with the remainder of the design work.Prior to resolving the conflict, gather as much information as possible toensure that you fully understand the problem before changing your design.



NOTES


To understand why features fail and how to resolve the failure.

Method

In this exercise, you change dimensions on the plunger body drawing tocause some features to fail, then investigate and resolve the problems.

EXERCISE 1: Resolving Failed Features

Task 1. Retrieve PLUNGER_BODY.DRW and change the value of theradius on the tabs. After the model fails, investigate to determine whichfeature caused the failure.

Note:

If you did not finish the plunger body drawing earlier, retrievePLUNGER_BODY_RESOLVE.DRW.

1. Switch to Sheet 2 of the drawing and zoom in on DETAIL 1.

2. Modify the radius of the round on the tab to 0.15. Click Modify >Value and pick the 0.05 radius dimension. Type [0.15].

3. Click Regenerate > Model to update the model to the newdimension.

4. Click Feature Info from the FAILURE DIAGNOSTICS window.An INFORMATION WINDOW appears, indicating that the roundwith feature ID number 961 failed. Read through this informationand close the INFORMATION WINDOW.

5. Add the Feature ID number as a new column in the MODEL TREEwindow so that you can highlight the failed feature on the screen todetermine which feature actually failed. Click View > Model Tree

Setup > Column Display. Select FEAT ID and click >OK.

6. Select the round feature from the MODEL TREE window.



NOTES

7. Set the backup model as the active model and highlight the failedfeature on the screen, as shown in Figure 1.

8. Click Investigate > Backup Modl > Confirm, then select theround feature from the MODEL TREE window. You should be ableto determine that the round on the tab is the failed feature.

Figure 1: Failed Round Feature

Task 2. Once you have determined why the round failed regeneration,change the model so that the feature regenerates successfully.

1. Choose Resolve Hints from the FAILURE DIAGNOSTICS windowand read through the hints provided by Pro/ENGINEER.

2. In the RESOLVE HINTS window, the system advises you to use theInvestigate option to obtain some information.

3. Click List Changes. An INFORMATION window indicates thatwhen you changed the dimension d75 from 0.05 to 0.15, it causedthe feature to fail.

4. Click Current Model > Failed Geom. Some surfaces on the modelappear in cyan and the SHOW ERRORS menu appears as shownin Figure 2. Click Item Info to display some information about thefailed geometry. Click Close to exit the INFORMATION window.Click Backup Modl from the INVESTIGATE menu.

Failed round



NOTES

Figure 2: Round Surfaces

5. Click Analysis > Measure.

6. Select Distance from the TYPE drop-down list and pick the twosurfaces. The measured distance should be 0.125. The new radiusof the round (0.15) is too large to fit in the space provided.

7. Move the tab to allow more room or change the radius to a valuethat is less than 0.125. Close the MEASURE dialog box.

8. Click Fix Model > Backup Modl > Modify, then pick the roundfeature to modify the radius of the round.

9. Pick the .05 radius dimension and type [.10]. Click Current Modl> Regenerate to update the model to the new dimensions. ClickYes to close the RESOLVE ENVIRONMENT dialog box.

Task 3. Modify the height of the flanges in DETAIL 2. After the featurefails, use the tools available in the RESOLVE ENVIRONMENT dialog boxto determine which feature fails regeneration.

1. Click Modify and pick the 0.125 dimension for the flange inDETAIL 2. Type [0.09] as the new value. Regenerate the model.

2. Click Feature Info. An information window indicates that theround with feature ID 772 failed. Read through this informationand close the window.

3. Set the backup model as the active model and highlight the failedfeature on the screen by selecting it from the MODEL TREE, asshown in Figure 3.

4. Click Investigate > Backup Modl > Confirm, then select the cutfeature from the MODEL TREE window.

You cannotconstruct theround on thesesurfaces



NOTES

Figure 3: Failed Cut Feature

Task 4. Once you have determined why the cut failed regeneration,change the model so that the feature regenerates successfully.

1. Click List Changes. An INFORMATION Window indicates thatthe feature failure occurred because dimension d26 was modifiedfrom 0.125 to 0.09.

2. Click Current Modl > Failed Geom to view the failed geometry.The surface of the cut displays along with two points where thegeometry becomes invalid. Click Item Info to obtain someinformation about the failed geometry.

3. Close the information window.

4. Redefine the section of the feature. Click Quick Fix > Redefine >Confirm. Click Section > Define > Sketch.

5. Sketch a vertical line on the right side of the section. Click Sketch> Done. Click Preview > OK to finish the feature.

6. Click Yes to close the RESOLVE ENVIRONMENT dialog box.


Failedcut



NOTES


• You can determine why a feature is failing regeneration.

• You can resolve the regeneration failure.


Page 16-1

Module

Drawing FormatsIn this module, you learn how to create and use drawing formats.

Objectives


• Create drawing formats by importing geometry.

• Create drawing formats with 2-D drafting tools.

• Use tables and parameters in formats.



NOTES

CREATING A DRAWING FORMATCreating a drawing format is usually a one-time operation. When youinitially begin creating drawings in Pro/ENGINEER, you must create aformat for them using one of the following techniques:

• Import it from another system.

• Use 2-D drafting techniques.

• Use Sketcher mode.

Note:

To specify a particular format setup file to use for all newformats, set the configuration file optionformat_setup_file.

If you want to use a drawing format in conjunction with a drawingtemplate, at this time you will need to create a mapkey that will create adrawing using a template and then initiate adding the drawing format.

Importing a Format from Another SystemPrior to importing the format into Pro/ENGINEER, you must export theformat using an industry standard file format such as IGES or DXF.

Creating a New Format in Pro/ENGINEER

Specify a sheet size and orientation that is appropriate for the format thatyou want to import.

Importing the Format into Pro/ENGINEER

Once you have created the Pro/ENGINEER format, you can import theexisting format into the system. You can create a new format or appendthe file to the existing format. Since you have already created thePro/ENGINEER format, you should append.

Keep in mind that if the new format cannot accommodate the importedformat, the system asks you if you want to scale the imported format sothat it fits it properly.


Drawing Formats Page 16-3

NOTES

Changing the Format

After you import the file into Pro/ENGINEER, it appears on the screen.You can then make any changes that are necessary, such as deletingentities, drafting new entities, adding a table, or adding text or parameters.

Bear in mind that you must use a Pro/ENGINEER table in order toreference Pro/ENGINEER model and drawing parameters. Given this, youmay need to delete the existing title block from the imported data and re-create it as a native Pro/ENGINEER table.

Creating a Format with 2-D DraftingYou can also create an original format in Pro/ENGINEER using the 2-Ddrafting tools that are available in Format mode. However, keep in mindthat 2-D drafting entities do not regenerate, so you must draft themaccurately. To create sharp corners and perfectly horizontal and verticallines, you should use the draft grid and other options that are available.

When drafting format geometry, the sheet outline is the border of thedrawing format, as shown in Figure 1. Because it is the actual border, itmay not appear on pen plots unless you use a paper size that is larger thanthe drawing size. The system plots everything within the sheet outlineborder.

Figure 1: Format Location

Format sketch

Sheet outline



NOTES

Creating a Format in Sketcher ModeYou can also create a drawing format by creating the format geometry inSketcher mode, taking advantage of the parametric capabilities ofSketcher. After you create the geometry and save the section,Pro/ENGINEER assigns it the name FILENAME.SEC. The first time youadd it to a drawing, it makes a copy of it in memory and gives it the fileextension .FRM. After saving the section as a format, you can manipulateit using various tools available in Format mode.

ADDING INFORMATION TO A FORMATAfter you create a format, you can add tables and notes to it, as well as uselabels to include parametric information.

Including Parametric Information in a FormatBy using drawing labels, you can incorporate parametric information intoyour format. When you include parameters in a drawing format, thesystem evaluates them when you add the format to the drawing. If youinclude the date label, the system displays the date that you actually addedthe format.

To use the following drawing labels in a format, you should include anampersand (&) before the name of the parameter:

• &todays_date – Adds the date of the note’s creation. You can controlthe form of the date using the configuration file optionTODAYS_DATE_NOTE_FORMAT.

• &model_name – Adds the name of the model used in the drawing.

• &dwg_name – Adds the name of the drawing.

• &scale – Adds the scale of the drawing.

• &type – Adds the model type (part or assembly).

• &format – Adds the format size.

• &linear_tol_0_0 through &linear_tol_0_000000 – Adds lineardimension tolerance values for 1 to 6 decimal places.

• &angular_tol_0_0 through &angular_tol_0_000000 – Adds angulardimension tolerance values for 1 to 6 decimal places.

• &current_sheet – Adds the current sheet number.

• &total_sheets – Adds the total number of sheets in the drawing.



NOTES

• &dtm_name – Adds the name of a datum plane.

In addition to the drawing labels listed above, you can also include yourown parameters. If you include parameters in a table on the format, thesystem prompts you for their values when it adds the format to thedrawing. For example, you could add a table that includes parametersspecifying the person who created the drawing or checked it. If you do notinclude these parameters in a table, the system does not prompt you for thevalues.

Note:

You can store these parameters on the format as drawingparameters if you set the configuration file optionmake_parameters_from_fmt_tables to yes. Ifyou set the value of this option to no, the system prompts youfor the values whenever you add a second sheet or replace theformat.



NOTES

CONFIGURATION FILE OPTIONSTable 1 lists the available configuration file options controlling formatcreation.

Table 1: Configuration File Options Affecting FormatsOption Value Definition

format_setup_file filename and path Determines the formatsetup file to use for newformats.

make_parameters_from_

fmt_tables

yes

no

When includingparameters in a table on aformat, saves them asdrawing parameters.



NOTES


To create and use a drawing format that includes parametric

information.

Method

In this exercise, you create a multi-sheet drawing format that includesparametric information. You also set up the format so that the systemrequires you to provide specific information when you place it on adrawing.

EXERCISE 1: Creating a Multi-Sheet DrawingFormat

Task 1. Create a new drawing format and import the geometry of anexisting format.

1. Click File > New > Format, type [C_MULTI_FORMAT] for thename and click OK.

2. Define the format in a landscape orientation with a C size and clickOK.

3. Click File > Import > Append to Model.

4. Select C_DET.IGS and click OK.

Task 2. Create a table to replace the right side portion of the title block.Locate the lower right corner of the table above the existing title block.

1. Create an ascending, leftward table

2. Define the column sizes so that they are approximately the same asthe existing blocks. The column and row sizes are listed in Figure2.



NOTES

Figure 2: First Table Initial Rows and Columns

3. Create a second ascending, leftward table to the left of the first oneto replace the left side of the title block.

4. Locate the lower right corner of the table above the existing titleblock and to the left of the first table. The column and row sizesare listed in Figure 3

Figure 3: Second Table Initial Rows and Columns

Task 3. Change the two new tables so that they look similar to the titleblock. Change the size of the columns and rows.

1. Click Mod Rows/Cols > Change Size >Column > By Length.

2. Before specifying the column to change, measure the existing titleblock size. Click Info > Drawing > Measure Draft Entities.

3. Select DISTANCE from the DRAFT MEASURE dialog box, thenpick the right and left borders of the Sheet cell in the title block.The measured distance should be 1.625.

4. Close the dialog box. Pick the right column of the table and type[1.625] as the width of the column.

5. To create the second column, measure from the left side border ofthe Sheet cell to the left side border of the Drawing Number cell.

6. Pick the corresponding column in the table and enter the measureddistance.

7. To create the third column, measure from the left side border of theDrawing Number cell to the right side border of the Scale cell.

2

2

2

4

9

13

4

2

1374 136



NOTES


9. To create the fourth column, measure from the left side border ofthe Scale cell to the right side border of the Size cell.


11. To create the last column, measure from the right side border ofthe Scale cell to the left side border of the Scale cell.


13. Repeat this procedure for the row heights.

Task 4. Combine some of the cells in the table into one cell, as shown inFigure 4.

1. Click Modify Table > Merge > Rows & Cols, then pick the upperleft and upper right cells in the table.

2. Pick the left and right cells in the second column.

3. Continue merging the cells together until the table looks like thetitle block.

Figure 4: First Table Merged Cells

Task 5. Change the column sizes for the second table.

1. Click Mod Rows/Cols > Change Size > Column > By Length.

2. Measure the right and left borders of one of the Date cells in thetitle block. The measured distance should be 1.12483.

3. Pick the right column of the table and type [1.12483] as the widthof the column.



NOTES

4. Measure the right and left borders of the cell in the title block . Themeasured distance should be 1.875.

5. Pick the left column, the middle column, click the middle mousebutton and type [1.875/2] as the column width.

6. Change the size of the rows in the second table.

� Row 1, 2 & 3 = 0.546875

� Row 4 = 1.01563

7. Blank the column borders from the top row of the table. ClickModify Table > Line Display > Blank, then pick the two columnborders of the top row.

8. Combine the left and middle cells of the bottom three rowstogether, as shown in Figure 5. Click Merge > Columns, then pickthe left and middle cells of the second row.

9. Pick the left and middle cells of the third row then pick the left andmiddle cells of the bottom row.


Figure 5: Second Table Merged Cells

Task 6. Delete the entities that compose the borders of the original titleblock.

1. Click Delete, from the DETAIL menu, then pick all of the linesthat compose the original title block.


3. Move the new table into the correct position for the title block.Click Move from the TABLE menu and pick the table.



NOTES

4. Reposition the table in the new location and press the left mousebutton to place it. Repeat the procedure to locate the second table,as shown in Figure 6.

Note:

To precisely position the table in the new location, use theAbs Coords option in the GET POINT menu.

Figure 6: Format with New Tables

Task 7. Add text to the tables that you just created. The text that youinclude should be parametric so that it changes automatically based on thedrawing to which you add it.

1. Set the column justification by clicking Mod Rows/Cols > Justify> Column > Center > Middle.

2. Pick each of the columns in the table on the right. Click Center >Bottom, then pick each of the columns in the table on the left.

3. Click Enter Text, then pick the Part cell so that the part name fillsin automatically.

4. Type [&model_name] as the name. Press <ENTER> to finish.



NOTES

5. Enter the following text in the cooresponding cells:

� Fscm No. = &fscm_num

� Drawing No. = &drw_num

� Scale = &scale

� Sheet = &current_sheet/&total_sheets

� .XXX Tolerances = &linear_tol_0_000

� .XX Tolerances = &linear_tol_0_00

� Angle Tolerances = &angular_tol_0_0

� Drawn = &drawn_by

� Drawn Date = &drawn_by_date

� Checked = &checked_by

� Ckecked Date = &checked_by_date

� Approved = &approved_by

� Approved Date = &approved_by_date

Task 8. Change the text height of some of the parametric information.

1. Click Modify > Text > Text Height. Pick &MODEL_NAME andclick Done Sel.

2. Type [0.3] as the height. Pick the &FSCM_NUM and&DRW_NUM, then click Done Sel. Type [0.25] as the height.

Task 9. Copy the table on the right of the sheet so that you can use it onSheet 2.

1. Click Edit > Copy and pick the right table.

2. Click Pick Many and drag the selection box around the first tableand the underlying text, as shown in Figure 7.

Figure 7: Copying the Table

Drag thisbox withPick Many



NOTES

3. Click Done Sel. The table and text is copied to the clipboard.

4. Add a second sheet by clicking Sheets > Add.

5. Click Edit > Paste. The clipboard window appears.

6. Zoom in on the copied items in the clipboard window.

7. In the clipboard window, click the lower right corner of the tableas the first translation vector and pick the lower right corner of theformat on sheet two as the second translation vector point.

Note:

The copied entities will remain in the clipboard until you selectsomething else to copy. You can always delete the table andtext and paste it in again, if needed.

Task 10. Remove the top two rows from the copied table.

1. Click Mod Row/Cols > Remove > Row and pick the top row.Type [yes] to confirm.

2. Pick the new top row and type [yes] again.

3. Delete the remaining text above the table.

4. Save and close the format window.

Task 11. Retrieve PLUNGER_BODY.DRW and add the format that youjust created to it. The system prompts you to specify the unknownparameter values, but provides the known ones automatically.

Note:

If you did not finish the plunger body drawing earlier, retrievePLUNGER_BODY_FORMATS.DRW.

1. Edit the config.pro and add the optionmake_parameters_from_fmt_table set to yes. Apply thechanges.



NOTES

2. Add the multi-sheet format that you created earlier to the drawing.Click Sheets > Format > Add/Replace. SelectC_MULTI_FORMAT.FRM and click Open.

3. Type [1] as the sheet number.

4. Specify the values of the unknown parameters in the format. Enterthe values as shown in Table 2 (if the system prompts you tospecify the type of parameter, click String).

Table 2: Unknown ParametersParameter ValueDrw_num 11473

Fscm_num 2172

Approved_by_date TBD

Approved_by TBD

Checked_by_date 5/14/98

Checked_by JOE CHECKER

Drawn_by_date 5/7/98

5. Clean up the display of the sheet by moving tables, views, or notesto more appropriate positions, if necessary.

6. Switch to Sheet 2 and add the second sheet of the format. ClickFormat > Add/Replace.

7. Select C_MULTI_FORMAT.FRM and click Open.

8. Type [2] as the sheet number. The system should now fill out theparameters automatically without displaying any additionalprompts, as shown in Figure 8.

9. Save and close the format window.



NOTES


• You can create a format by importing an IGES file.

• You can add parametric information to a format.




Page 17-1

Module

Creating a Bill of MaterialsIn this module, you learn how to use Pro/REPORT to create a Bill of

Materials on a drawing.

Objectives


• Create an automatic BOM.

• Manipulate a BOM.

• Show BOM balloons in the drawing.



NOTES

CREATING A BOM USING PRO/REPORTA Bill of Materials (BOM) is a listing of parts and part parameters that arecontained within the current assembly. When creating an assemblydrawing, it is often necessary to include a table showing the BOM. Youcan use repeat regions to automate creation and maintenance of the BOM.

Generating a BOM ReportTo create an automatic BOM in Pro/ENGINEER, follow these three steps:

Creating a Table

When creating a table to display an assembly drawing’s BOM, you shouldspecify the placement and origin carefully to accommodate its growth asthe system adds rows to the table.

Defining a Simple Repeat Region

After creating a table, you can create a simple repeat region. This is anarea of the table that lists similar information for each component in theassembly. A simple region grows in one direction, repeating a row overand over. To create a simple repeat region, you must define the extent ofthe region, that is, the area of information that you want the system toduplicate. For a BOM report, this area constitutes the outside cells of therow, as shown in Figure 1.

INDEX NAME QTY

Figure 1: Simple Repeat Region

Specifying the Information to Include

After setting up the repeat region, you should use report parameters todefine the information that you want the system to include in the table.You can define parameters by typing them manually, or by makingselections from a menu. Table 1 lists some of the Pro/REPORT systemparameters that you can use to create a BOM.

Select this cell. Select this cell.


Creat ing a Bi l l o f Mater ia ls Page 17-3

NOTES

Table 1: Pro/REPORT System ParametersParameter Name Definition

&asm.mbr.name Displays the name of an assembly member.

&asm.mbr.type Displays the type (part or assembly) of an assemblymember.

&asm.mbr.parametername Displays the value of “parametername” (a user-definedparameter) for an assembly member. Ex: cost or vendor

&rpt.index Displays the index number assigned to each record in arepeat region.

&rpt.level Displays the recursive depth of an item.

&rpt.qty Displays the quantity of an item.

To create a simple repeat region, you would specify the parameters, asshown in Figure 2.

INDEX NAME QTY&rpt.index &asm.mbr.name &rpt.qty

Figure 2: Entering Parameters for a Simple Repeat Region

Manipulating a BOM ReportWhen you create a BOM using Pro/REPORT, Pro/ENGINEER usesdefault values for many of the attributes to create the initial table, but youcan change them later to manipulate the format of the table. After creatingthe table, you can make the following modifications to the listing to suityour needs:

Controlling Repeating Components

When you initially create the table, the system creates a row for everyinstance of a component. To prevent components from repeating, you canset the attributes of the region to either of the following:

• No Duplicates – Lists duplicate occurrences of a component onlyonce. Therefore, even if the assembly has eight bolts, that componentonly appears once in the table.

• No Duplicates/Level – Lists duplicate occurrences of a componentonce for each subassembly in which you use it. Therefore, if you use abolt in two different subassemblies, that component appears twice inthe table.



NOTES

Figure 3: Bill of Materials for Example Assembly

Controlling the Levels Searched for Components

When you initially create the table, only the top-level components appearbecause the default attribute of a repeat region (Flat) preventsPro/ENGINEER from searching through lower levels as shown inFigure 4. If you want the system to search all levels of the assembly,



NOTES

activate the Recursive attribute. You can also specify the Flat andRecursive attributes for individual subassemblies.

Figure 4: Region Attributes

Changing the Order of the List

Once the system has filled the table, you can change the order in which itdisplays the components by sorting. You can sort the table by one or moreparameters, moving forward or backward in order.

Removing Components from the List

If you want to omit a particular component or type of component from theBOM, you can set up a filter so that the system automatically removesthose items from the listing. To remove information using this method,you can either filter items one by one or set up a rule to remove multipleentries.

Using Operators to Set Up a Rule

To set up a rule, you use the comparison operators <, >, <=, >=, ==, and!=. to compare the parameters of the filter. If a record in the table does notsatisfy the filter equation, the system removes it from the table.



NOTES

You can also use multiple values in filters. For example, if you added thefilter &ASM.MBR.NAME = = PART_A,PART_B,PART_J, only those threeparts would appear in the table.

Showing the Correct QuantityWhen you include the quantity of a component in a repeat region,Pro/ENGINEER counts how many times a certain file is used in anassembly.

The system saves a bulk item to a file with a .PRT extension andassembles it once, assigning it a quantity of 1 in the BOM. However,many bulk items should have a quantity such as AS REQUIRED. To showthe correct quantity, you can specify a relation using the parameter&ASM.MBR.QTY, as shown in Figure 5. By incorporating this relationinto the drawing, the system then assigns all bulk items a quantity of ASREQUIRED, but assigns the appropriate quantity to each component.

if asm_mbr_type = = ”bulkitem”

Qty = ”AS REQUIRED”

Else

Qty = rpt_qty

Endif

Figure 5: Quantity Relation for a Bulk Item

Calculating a Total CostA BOM report may contain a cost and quantity for each component. InPro/ENGINEER, you can write a relation to calculate the total cost foreach component as shown in Figure 6.



NOTES

if asm_mbr_type = = ”bulk item”

tcost = 0.0

Else

Tcost = asm_mbr_cost * rpt_qty

Endif

Figure 6: Cost Calculations

In the table, use &ASM.MBR.TCOST as the report parameter in the columnfor total cost of each component, as shown in Figure 7.

Figure 7: Relation Added to Define Cost

Creating a Summation

To calculate the total cost of the entire assembly, you could create asummation of the total costs of each component by specifying theparticular column to sum and a name for the summation parameter. Forexample, you could create a summation parameter called “total” tocalculate the total cost, then enter [$ &total[.2]] to display the valueas $ 11.72 in the appropriate table cell, as shown in Figure 8. The .2specifies two decimal places.



NOTES

Figure 8: Summing the Cost

Continuing the Table on the Next PageIf a table becomes too long to fit on one page, you can paginate it bybreaking it at a particular row and continuing it on the next page, or youcan create a new segment on the same page. As you add more informationto the table, the system flows it into the next segment and adds moresheets as necessary. You can also repeat the header information from theoriginal table on the next page.

Showing BOM BalloonsOnce you have completed the table, you can show BOM balloons on thedrawing, as shown in Figure 9. The balloons update if you change theassembly, add components, or remove them.

Figure 9: Examples of Simple and With Quantity Balloons



NOTES

Creating Custom Balloons

The default shape for a BOM balloon is a circle. To specify a differentshape, you can create a custom balloon, which is simply a drawing symbolthat contains variable text. To show the quantity or index number of acomponent in a custom balloon, set the default value of the variable text toRPT_INDEX or RPT_QTY, respectively.



NOTES

DRAWING SETUP FILE OPTIONSTable 2 list the available drawing setup file options that control repeatregions and BOMs in reports.

Table 2: Drawing Setup File Options Affecting Repeat Regionsand BOMs


def_bom_balloon_leader_sym

arrowhead

dot

filled_dot

no_arrow

slash

integral

box

filled_box

Sets the default arrow stylefor BOM balloons in newreports.

max_balloon_radius 0

non-zero value

Sets the maximumallowable balloon radius.If set to “0,” balloon radiusdepends only on text size.

min_balloon_radius 0

non-zero value

Sets the minimumallowable balloon radius.If set to “0,” balloon radiusdepends only on text size.



NOTES


Goal

To use Pro/REPORT to create a Bill of Materials in a drawing.

Method

In this exercise, you create a simple repeat region to automate a Bill ofMaterials (BOM) so that the system automatically reflects changes to theassembly information. You also change the appearance of the BOM bymodifying the repeat region attributes.

EXERCISE 1: Creating an Automatic BOM

Task 1. Create a table to display the Bill of Materials for the drawing.Include columns for the part name, type, quantity, cost, and total cost.

1. Retrieve BARREL_ASM.DRW.

2. Add C_MULTI_FORMAT.FRM to the drawing. Click Sheets>Format > Add/Replace. Select C_MULTI_FORMAT.FRM andclick Open. Type [1] as the sheet number.

3. Create a table for the BOM on the drawing. Click Table > Create> Ascending > Leftward > By Num Chars. Pick the lower rightcorner of the table as shown in Figure 10.

Figure 10: Table Location

4. Create six columns in this table. Using the mouse, pickimmediately after the 6 for the first column, immediately after the5 for the second column, immediately after the 4 for the third

Locate lowerright corner ofthe table here



NOTES

column, immediately after the second 2 (12) for the fourth column,immediately after the third 5 (25) for the fifth column, andimmediately after the first 5 for the final column.

5. Create three rows in this table. Pick immediately after the 2 for thefirst row, and immediately after the 1 for the second and thirdrows.

6. Define the justification of the columns. Click Mod Rows/Cols >Justify > Center > Middle. Pick all six columns in the table.

7. Add text into the header of the table. Click Enter Text, pick thelower left cell, and type [ITEM]. Pick the next cell and type[NAME]. Continue entering the text as shown in Figure 11.

Figure 11: Table Header

8. Justify the NAME column. Click Mod Rows/Cols > Justify >Column > Left > Middle, then pick the NAME column. Thesystem maintains the center justification of the existing header, butleft-justifies any new text.

Task 2. Create a simple repeat region for the information in the BOMand define the parameters to display.

1. Click Repeat Region > Add > Simple, then pick the cell aboveITEM and the cell above TOTAL COST.

2. Click Enter Text > Report Sym.

� Pick the cell above ITEM and click rpt… > index.

� Pick the cell above NAME and click asm…> mbr… > name.

� Pick the cell above TYPE and click asm… > mbr… > type.

� Pick the cell above QTY and click rpt… > qty.

� Pick the cell above COST and click asm… > mbr… > UserDefined, then type [cost].

� Pick the cell above TOTAL COST and click rpt… > rel… >User Defined, then type [total_cost].



NOTES

3. Click Repeat Region > Update Tables. The table should appearas shown in Figure 12.

Figure 12: Initial BOM

Task 3. Change the attributes of the repeat region to modify the BOMdisplay. Components should appear only once in the table and all partsshould be included in the BOM, regardless of the level at which theyreside.

1. Notice the piston assembly displays in the table seven times.

2. Click Attributes and pick the repeat region in the table. Click NoDuplicates > Done/Return. Figure 13 shows the new tableconfiguration.

Figure 13: No Duplicates

3. Change the attributes of the repeat region to include all levels ofthe assembly, Figure 14. Click Attributes and pick the repeatregion in the table. Click Recursive > Done/Return.



NOTES

Figure 14: Recursive

Task 4. Change the information for the total cost column. Create arelation to calculate cost and total cost values. The total cost is based onthe quantity and cost values.

1. Click Relations and pick the repeat region. Click Add and type[total_cost = asm_mbr_cost * rpt_qty].

2. Click Repeat Region > Update Tables. The table should displayas shown in Figure 15.

Figure 15: Total Cost

3. Click Enter Text > Keyboard, then pick the cell above COST.

4. Type [&asm.mbr.cost[.2]] to cause the number to display twosignificant digits.

5. Pick the cell above TOTAL COST and type[&rpt.rel.total_cost[.2]]. Click Done/Return.



NOTES

6. Define a cost value for the barrel part. Click Modify and pick thecell in the COST column for the barrel part. Type [8.75] as thevalue.

7. Click Table > Repeat Region > Update Tables. The table shoulddisplay as shown in Figure 16.

Figure 16: Number of Digits for Cost

Task 5. Create a summation for the number of components in theassembly.

1. Click Summation and pick the repeat region.

2. Click Add and pick the first QTY cell in the region.

3. Type [assy_qty] as the parameter name.

4. Pick the cell at the top of the QTY column to place the summationvalue.

5. Click Repeat Region > Update Tables.

Task 6. Remove the names of assembly components from the table, asshown in Figure 17.

1. Click Filters and pick the repeat region.

2. Click By Rule > Add, then type [&asm.mbr.type !=assembly].

3. Click Done > Done/Return.



NOTES

Figure 17: Assemblies Filtered Out

Task 7. Create a summation for the total cost of the assembly and setthe decimal precision to two.

1. Click Summation and pick the repeat region.

2. Click Add and pick the 8.75 for the barrel in the TOTAL COSTcolumn of the region.

3. Type [assy_cost] as the parameter name.

4. Pick the cell at the top of the TOTAL_COST column to place thesummation value.

5. Update the table to change the format for the cost.

6. Click Modify > Num Digits. Type [2] as the number of digits.

7. Pick the assembly total cost value and click Done Sel.

Task 8. Combine the upper left cells and add a header for TOTALS.

1. Click Table > Modify Table > Merge > Rows & Cols.

2. Pick the upper left cell in the table and the cell directly to the leftof the total quantity.

3. Click Enter Text and pick the new cell.

4. Type [TOTALS] as the cell text. The table should appear as shownin Figure 18.



NOTES

Figure 18: Total Cost

Task 9. Retrieve the barrel assembly and suppress the pump head part.Return to the drawing and notice that the system updated the BOMautomatically. Change the table so that the ITEM numbers remain thesame when you add or suppress components.

1. Retrieve BARREL.ASM.

2. Click Component > Suppress, then pick the pump head. ClickDone Sel >Done.

3. Click Window > BARREL_ASM.DRW. Notice that the pump headis no longer in the BOM and the numbers in the ITEM columnhave changed. If you delete a component from the assembly, youmay not want the item numbers of components later in the table tochange.

4. Click Window > BARREL.ASM.

5. Resume the pump head part. Click Component > Resume > All >Done.

6. Set the drawing BARREL_ASM.DRW as the active window.

7. Change the table so that the deletion or suppression of acomponent does not affect the existing item numbers. Click Table> Repeat Region > Fix Index, then pick the repeat region. ClickFix > Region > Confirm > Done.

8. Set the BARREL.ASM as the active window and suppress thepump head again.

9. Set the BARREL_ASM.DRW as the active window. Notice that theitem numbers did not change this time.



NOTES

10. Unfix the region. Click Table > Repeat Region > Fix Index, thenpick the repeat region. Click Unfix > Region > Confirm > Done.

11. Set the BARREL>ASM active and resume the pump head.

12. Close the assembly window and set BARREL_ASM>DRW active.

Task 10. Add BOM balloons to the drawing that include the quantity.

1. Click Table > BOM Balloon > Set Region > With Qty, then pickthe region.

2. Click Show > By View, then pick the 3-D view of the assembly.

3. Reposition the balloons appropriately and change the attachmentlocations. Click Move > Mod Attach and pick a balloon. ClickChange Ref to change the reference to which the balloon isattached or click Same Ref to move the arrow to a new position onthe same reference.

4. Merge the balloons for the inner and outer races and the bearingspacer, as shown in Figure 19. Click Table > BOM Balloon >Merge.

5. Pick the balloon for the inner race and then pick the balloon for thebearing spacer. Repeat this step to merge the balloon for the outerrace with the bearing spacer balloon.

Figure 19: Balloon Locations



NOTES

6. Split the balloon for the pistons to create two balloons. Click Splitand pick the balloon for the pistons. Type [2] as the amount andattach the balloon to one of the other pistons. Locate the balloontoward the right side of the view.

7. Change the amounts in the balloons for the pistons. ClickRedistribute and pick the original balloon for the piston. Type [1]as the amount to redistribute and pick the new balloon.

Task 11. Change the type of balloon for the barrel part and the headplate.

1. Click Alt Symbol and pick the balloons for the barrel part and thehead plate.

2. Click Done Sel > Retrieve > DELTA_BOM.SYM (Figure 20).

Figure 20: Custom Symbol




NOTES


• You can create a table with repeat regions to create an automaticBOM.

• You can change the attributes of the repeat region.

• You can add BOM balloons to the drawing.


Page 18-1

Module

Family TablesIn this module, you learn how to create a family table of parts and

manipulate it in a drawing.

Objectives


• Create a family table of parts.

• Place a parts catalog table on a drawing.

• Replace one instance on drawing with another.



NOTES

ADVANTAGES OF USING FAMILY TABLESUsing family tables is the most effective way to create a parts library inPro/ENGINEER.

Saving Space with InstancesA family table has only one part file with a table of information aboutvariations of the generic part, referred to as instances. The information inthe table pertains to dimension values, parameter values, and featuresincluded on the instances.

Reducing Development TimeBy using a family table, you can build just one part and then edit a table ofinformation to create multiple variations of the part. By inputting valuesfor different sizes and configurations, you can build parts quickly.

CREATING A FAMILY TABLETo create a family table successfully, you should follow four basic steps

• Create the generic part.

• Specify items for the table to drive.

• Create new instances.

• Verify the instances.

Creating the Generic PartThe first step is to create a generic part that includes every feature thatexists on any instance, as shown in Figure 1. Because some variations maynot have the same features as the other variations, all features must existon the generic model.


Fami ly Tab les Page 18-3

NOTES

Figure 1: Generic Bolt Part

Specifying Items for the Table to DriveAfter creating the generic model, you should identify the items which willvary from one instance to another, such as dimensions, parameters,features, and components (for an assembly family table).

Creating New InstancesYou can add new instances to the table by adding more rows to the table,or by patterning one of the existing instances, as shown in Figure 2.

Figure 2: Adding Instances



NOTES

Adding Entries to the Table

Each row of the table represents a new instance. When adding entries tothe bottom of the table, keep in mind the following:

• You must assign every instance a unique name.

• You can use an “*” to use the default value. If the generic modelchanges, the value for the instance updates as well.

• You can lock an instance. You can lock an instance of a family tableto prevent other uses from modifying table-driven characteristics ofthe instance.

Patterning an Instance

By patterning an existing instance, you can automatically create instanceswith parameters that grow incrementally. The system considers theinstance you select for patterning as a seed that it can use to generate newfamily table members. You can pattern an instance in several directions tovary multiple parameters.

Figure 3: Generating Instances using Patternize



NOTES

Verifying the Validity of the Model InstancesYou should verify that each model instance is valid automatically. Thesystem regenerates each instance behind the scenes, and reports whethereach instance regenerated successfully or failed.

Retrieving an Instance

When you select a generic model to retrieve into Pro/ENGINEER, you canselect the generic model itself to open or one of the instances. You canchoose an instance by name or based off of the values of the parameters inthe table.

USING FAMILY TABLES IN DRAWING MODEYou can create a drawing of the generic model or one of its instances.Specifically, you can create the following types of drawings:

• One drawing of the generic model that shows a part catalog

• A separate drawing for each instance

Creating a Parts CatalogFor library parts, you may want to create a drawing of one of the modelsand show a table of the different instances in the family table. You canaccomplish this by creating a drawing of the generic model, and usingPro/REPORT to automatically create a table using the information in thefamily table.

To create a parts catalog in Pro/ENGINEER, you should follow thesethree steps:

• Name the features and parameters used in the table

• Create a table.

• Define a 2-D repeat region.

• Define the information to include.

Naming the Features and Dimensions

By default, all dimensions have a symbolic name similar to d2, d10, d105,etc. Also, features have default names such F55, F1032, etc. These default



NOTES

feature names will be the column headers in your table unless youspecifically change them to more meaningful values. You can changethem as follows:

• For features, use Set Up > Name.

• For dimensions, use Modify > Dim Cosmetics > Symbol.

Creating a Table

Create the table as described in Tables chapters. You typically need a tablewith two rows and two columns.

Defining a 2-D Repeat Region

For a parts catalog, you create a 2-D repeat region—one that grows in twodirections, horizontally and vertically.

To create a 2-D region, you must define the extent of the region, that is,the area of information that you want the system to duplicate. For a partscatalog, you should make three selections, as shown in Figure 4.

Figure 4: 2-D Repeat Region

Defining the Information to Include

After setting up the repeat region, you should use report parameters todefine the information that you want the system to include in the table.Table 1 lists some of the Pro/REPORT system parameters that you can useto create a parts catalog.

Select here second

Select here first Select here third



NOTES

Table 1: Pro/REPORT Parameters for a Parts CatalogParameter Name Definition

&fam.inst.name Displays the name of a family tableinstance.

&fam.inst.parametername Displays the name of a family tableparameter.

&fam.inst.param.value Displays the value of a family tableparameter for an instance.

&fam.inst.param.id Displays the ID of a family tableparameter if it is a dimension.

To complete the 2-D repeat region shown in Figure 4, you would enterthree parameters, as shown in Figure 5.

&fam.inst.param.name

&fam.inst.name &fam.inst.param.value

Figure 5: Adding Report Symbols

After you update the table, the system automatically fills in the cells withthe family table information, as shown in Figure 6.

Figure 6: Initial Table

Preventing Information from Displaying

To prevent certain information from displaying in the parts catalog, youcan set up a filter to remove particular columns from the listing.



NOTES

Note:

Filters were discussed in greater detail in the Tables chapter.

Figure 7 shows the initial with the bolt_ dia column filtered using the filter&fam.inst.param.name!=bolt_dia.

Figure 7: Bolt Diameter Filtered from Table

You can also use multiple values in filters. For example, if you add thefilter &fam.inst.param.name!=bolt_length,bolt_dia, the system wouldremove the columns for bolt_length and bolt_dia from the table.

Manipulating the Format

When you create a parts catalog using Pro/REPORT, the table may notappear in the exact format that you would like.

• You can modify the format by changing the order of the rows orcontinue the table on the next page, if necessary.

• If a table becomes too long to fit on one page, you can paginate it bybreaking it at a particular row and continuing it on the next page. Youcan also create a new segment on the same page.



NOTES

Note:

Pagination only works for rows of a 2-D repeat region. If thecolumns of a 2-D region grow off the page, you cannot specifythat they automatically continue on the next page.

Creating a Separate Drawing for Each InstanceYou may need a separate drawing for every instance in the family table. Ifyour company requires individual tables, the quickest way to create themis to complete a drawing and use it to create other drawings. To do this,you must follow three steps:

• Create the seed drawing.

• Replace the original model with another instance from the familytable.

• Copy the existing drawing to another name.

Creating the Original Seed Drawing

You can create the original seed drawing from the generic model or any ofthe instances, but you should fully detail it with any necessary dimensions,notes, and special views, such as detailed views as shown in Figure 8.

Figure 8: Drawing of Generic Bolt



NOTES

Replacing the Original Model

Once you have completed the seed drawing, you can replace the modelwith another instance because the models all belong to the same familytable. When you replace a model on a drawing, any dimensions orparameters on the drawing update to the new values based on the familytable. Figure 9 shows the generic bolt drawing after replacing the modelwith another instance.

Figure 9: Example of Replacing a Model on a Drawing with Details Preserved

You may have to modify the drawing of the new model by adding sheets,creating new views, and creating new notes. In addition, you may alsohave to make the following changes:

• Reposition views. If the models differed in size significantly, youmay have to move the views or change the scale of the drawing.

• Remove views. Some views may now be unnecessary.

• Show new dimensions. If some of the dimensions of the new modeldo not appear on the drawing because the feature to which thedimensions belong does not exist on the original model, you may haveto show these new dimensions.



NOTES

Copy the Existing Drawing to Another Name

After making any necessary modifications to clean up the appearance ofthe drawing, you must save it as a new drawing. When Pro/ENGINEERasks you to specify a new name for the drawing, type in a name that isunique throughout the database. The system then creates a new drawingfile on the hard drive with the new instance as its model.

If you follow this process for each instance in the family table, you cancreate a separate drawing file for each of the instances.

DRAWING SETUP FILE OPTIONSTable 2 lists the available drawing setup file options that you can use tocontrol the display of 2-D repeat regions.

Table 2: Drawing Setup File Options Affecting 2-D RepeatRegions


dash_supp_dims_in_

region

no

yes

Controls the display ofdimension values inPro/REPORT table repeatregions. If set to “no,''displays the values inPro/REPORT table repeatregions. If set to ”yes,''suppresses the dimensionand displays a dashinstead.

model_digits_in_region yes

no

Controls the display of thenumber of digits 2-Drepeat regions. If set to“yes,'' 2-D repeat regionsreflect the number of digitsof part and assemblymodel dimensions.



NOTES


Goal

To create a family table of parts and use them in drawings.

Method

In the first exercise, you learn how to create a family table that includesdimensions, parameters, and features. You create instances by manuallytyping in the information and by patterning an existing instance.

In the second exercise, you retrieve a drawing of a generic model andcreate a table that reflects the family table information automatically. Youalso manipulate the table display.

In the third exercise, you retrieve a drawing of a family table instance.You then replace the current instance with a different instance and create acopy of the drawing.

EXERCISE 1: Creating a Family Table

Task 1. Retrieve the barrel family table part and create a new chamferon the model.

1. Retrieve BARREL_FAMILY_TABLE.PRT.

2. Click Create > Solid> Chamfer> > Edge > 45 x d and type [.1]as the “d” dimension.

3. Pick the two circular edges of the center hole.

4. Click Done Sel > Done Refs. Click Preview > OK to finish thefeature. Click Done.

5. Change the name of the chamfer feature by clicking Set Up >Name and pick the chamfer.

6. Type [HOLE_CHAMFER] as the name. Click Done.



NOTES

Figure 10: Chamfer Created

Task 2. Create a family table for the barrel part that includes thediameter of the barrel, the diameter of the patterned holes, and the boltcircle diameter.

1. Click Family Tab. The Family Table editor appears.

2. Click .

3. Click Query Sel, pick the outer surface of the barrel. ClickAccept.

4. Pick BARREL_DIA.

5. Pick one of the holes and pick the CYLINDER_DIA andCENTERLINE_DIA dimensions. Click Done Sel.

6. In the FAMILY ITEMS dialog box, select Feature, pick thechamfer, and click OK.



NOTES

Figure 11: Identifying the Items to Vary

Task 3. Add some new instances to the family table by editing the tableand by patterning an instance of the table. After adding the instances,make sure that they regenerate successfully.

1. Add instances to the family table by clicking two times.

2. Edit the data as shown in Figure 12.

Figure 12: Add Instances to the Table

Task 4. Create new instances of the barrel by patterning B_400_80_25.

1. Select B_400_80_25 and click .

2. Type [3] as the QUANTITY for the first direction.



NOTES

3. In the ITEMS area, select BARREL_DIA, click and type [.25]as the increment.

4. In the ITEMS area, select CYLINDER_DIA, click and type[.10] as the increment.

5. Click to specify a dimension for the second direction.

6. Type [2] as the QUANTITY for the second direction.

7. Select CENTERLINE_DIA, click and type [.2] as theincrement.

8. Click OK to finish the pattern.

Task 5. Remove the duplicate instance from the table and change thenames of the other instances in the family table.

1. Select the B_400_80_250, hold down the right mouse and clickDelete Rows.

2. Modify the family table as shown in Figure 13 by changing thenames and the values for the chamfer column.

Figure 13: Patterned Family Table

3. Click > Verify to determine if the instances can beregenerated.



NOTES

4. The system verifies the validity of each instance and displays thestatus in the dialog box. Review the status, and then select theclose button in the dialog box.

5. Click OK to exit the table.

Task 6. Create a parameter for the cost and add it to the table. Assignthe proper values to all of the instances.

1. Click Setup > Parameters > Part > Create > Real Number.

2. Type [cost] as the name of the parameter and [10.95] as thevalue of the parameter, then click Done.

3. Click Family Tab > .

4. In the ADD ITEMS area, select PARAMETER, check Cost andclick Done Sel.

5. Click OK and change the values in the cost column to those shownin Figure 14.

Figure 14: Cost Parameter

6. Click OK.




NOTES

Task 7. Retrieve some instances into the family table. Retrieve oneinstance by selecting its name and retrieve another by selecting its value.

1. Open BARREL_FAMILY_TABLE.PRT. Select instanceB_425_90_27 and click Open.


3. Open BARREL_FAMILY_TABLE.PRT.

4. Retrieve the instance that does not have the chamfer and has abarrel diameter of 4.25. Click the By Parameter tab. SelectD2,BARREL_DIA, and 4.25. The number of instances in the bottomof the window decreases.

5. Select F740,HOLE_CHAMFER > N. The number of instances thatsatisfy these values should decrease to one, B_425_90_25. ClickOpen.

6. Close the current window.



NOTES

EXERCISE 2: Showing Family Tables on a Drawing

Task 1. Retrieve the barrel family table drawing and create a table inwhich to display the family table information.

1. Retrieve BARREL_FAMILY_TABLE.DRW.

2. Click Table > Create.

3. Click Descending > Rightward > By Num Chars. Locate theupper left corner of the table tp the right of the detailed view.

4. Specify the width of the first column as 13 units, and the secondcolumn as 15 units.

5. Make the height of the first row 2 units, and the height of thesecond row 1 unit. The table should appear as shown in Figure 15.

Figure 15: Initial Table

Task 2. Set up the columns of the table with left and middlejustification. Create a 2-D repeat region and define the information toinclude in the table.

1. Click Mod Rows/Cols > Justify > Column.

2. Click Center > Middle. Pick both columns of the table to set thejustification.

3. Click Repeat Region > Add > Two-D. Pick the cells as shown inFigure 16.

Figure 16: Repeat Region Creation

Select thiscell first

Select this cellsecond

Select this cell third



NOTES

4. Click Enter Text > Reprt Sym and pick the upper right cell of thetable.

5. Click fam... > inst...> param… > name.

6. Pick the lower left table cell and click fam... > inst... > name.

7. Pick the lower right table cell and click fam...> inst...> param… >value.

8. Click Repeat Region > Update Tables. The table should looklike the one shown in Figure 17.

Figure 17: Family Table

Task 3. Change the order of the columns in the table to reflect thecolumn order of the original family table, as shown in Figure 18.

1. Click Sort Regions, then pick the region of the table.

2. Click the No Default check box and click Done. The columns areordered as they are in the Family Table editor.

Figure 18: Sorting the Region

Task 4. Retrieve the barrel family table part and add a new instance tothe table. Return to the drawing and notice that the table automaticallyincludes the new information.

1. Retrieve the generic BARREL_FAMILY_TABLE.PRT.



NOTES

2. Click Family Tab > .

3. Set the values shown in Table 3.

Table 3: Values for New InstanceColumn Value

Name B_475_110_25

BARREL_DIA 4.75

CYLINDER_DIA 1.10

CENTERLINE_DIA 2.5

HOLE_CHAMFER N

COST 15.00

4. Exit from the table.

5. Close the part window and activate the drawing window.

6. The system may have already updated the table to include the newinstance. If it does not display the new instance, click Regenerate> Draft.

7. Save and quit the drawing.



NOTES

EXERCISE 3: Creating Separate Drawings for EachInstance

Task 1. Retrieve the bolt drawing and replace the current family tableinstance with a new instance. Clean up the display of the drawing andcreate a copy of it for this new instance.

1. Retrieve BOLT_REPLACE.DRW.

2. Click Views > Dwg Models > Replace.

3. Select [B_5_20] as the instance to retrieve and click Open.

4. Erase DETAIL 1 from the drawing since there is no chamfer in thisinstance. Click Views > Delete View and pick DETAIL 1. Type[yes] to remove all detail arrows and circles for this view.

5. Copy the drawing to a new name. Click File > Save As. Type[B_5_20] as the name of the new drawing and click OK.

Task 2. Replace the model of this drawing with another instance.

1. Repeat this process and create new drawings for the instances

B_5_20_C.

2. Do not delete the detailed view of the chamfer.

3. Save the drawing as B_5_20_C.DRW.



NOTES


• You can create a family table of parts.

• You can create a parts catalog.

• You can create a drawing table with a 2-D repeat region.


Page 19-1

Module

Working with Large DrawingsIn this module, you learn various ways to work with large drawings.

Objectives


• Reduce the amount of information displayed on a drawing.

• Control when a view is regenerated.

• Limit the number of files that must be retrieved to display adrawing.



NOTES

MANAGING LARGE DRAWINGSYou can define a large drawing in several ways. The term large can berelative, since hardware platforms perform at different levels; however,you can generally classify any of the following as large drawings:

• A drawing of a part model that is highly complex.

• A drawing of an assembly that has multiple components.

• A drawing that consists of a large number of views and sheets.

Working with large assemblies places a greater burden on your systemthan working with a small assembly or part. Likewise, working with adrawing of a large assembly can place an even greater load on yoursystem. This is due to the fact that most drawings have multiple viewsthat the system must update for hidden line removal, componentplacement, etc. Even assemblies which are not large by your definitionmay become unacceptably slow once a certain number of sheets and viewsis reached.

The following are some of the areas that are negatively impacted by largeassembly drawings:

• Retrieval time

• Repaint time

• Switching sheets

• Regeneration

• Placing views

Drawing Retrieval ProcessThere are many techniques one can implement which are intended toimprove the performance of large drawings. Prior to choosing atechnique, it is important to understand the steps the system performswhen a drawing is first selected for retrieval. When you open a drawing,the system will:

• Load the associated models into memory (RAM)

• Regenerate all the views on the drawing

• Display the image on the screen


Work ing with Large Drawings Page 19-3

NOTES

Each of the available techniques may target one of the steps listed above,and it is recommended to estimate which step is impacting performancethe most and implement solutions to improve that area.

APPROACHES TO PERFORMANCE IMPROVEMENTIn general, you can use the following methods to improve your drawingsperformance:

• Use the system configuration settings to optimize the modelingenvironment for use with large drawings.

• Create a simplified representation of the assembly and base thedrawing off of this configuration.

• As the drawing is being built up, you remove detail from regenerationand display that is not necessary at that specific time.

• Develop each sheet of the drawing as a separate drawing file, andmerge them together when all of the sheets are completed.

The remaining sections of this summary document will discuss each ofthese approaches in greater detail.

Configuration File SettingsThe easiest technique to implement involves configuring the system tohandle the large amount of data in an efficient manner. Theseconfiguration options are designed to impact both retrieval time and dailytasks.

Table 1Config.pro KEYWORD SETTIN

GDESCRIPTION

Disp_trimetric_dwg_mode_view

No System will not take thetime to draw an initialimage when placing aGeneral view

Display_in_adding_view Minimal_wireframe

If Default is selectedwhile placing a Generalview, the simplest image isdisplayed

Force_wireframe_in_drawing

Yes All views are displayed aswireframe regardless ofEnvironment or displaysettings

Tangent_edge_display No Prevents system fromcalculating and displayingtangencies



NOTES

Display_silhouette_edges

No Prevents system fromcalculating and displayingsilhouette edges

Edge_display_quality Low Decreases tessellation ofedges which will speed updisplay

Interface_quality 0 Determines the amount ofwork performed whenchecking for overlappinglines for pen plotters

Compress_output_files Yes,no

Stores files in acompressed format

Auto_regen_views No Eliminates system forcedupdates of windows

Retain_display_memory Yes,no

Display of objects insession kept in memory.

Save_display Yes,no

Writes display to drawingfile.

These settings will not need to be in effect all of the time. In fact, userswill typically want to toggle all of these setting on and off many timesduring the day. It is recommended that you:

• Create two configuration files:

� Large_draw_on.pro – Sets the modeling environment for workingwith large drawings.

� Large_draw_off.pro – Disables the large drawing settings andreturns each of them to your company's standard setting.

• Create mapkeys or custom menu selections that will read each of thesefiles in.

Model SimplificationUsing simplified representations, you can limit the components that thesystem retrieves and displays on the screen. This method allows you toretrieve and display only those components that you need for the currentoperation, thereby reducing the amount of time the system requires toretrieve, regenerate, and repaint your drawings.

Note:

This technique is targeted at the first stage of drawingretrieval: reducing the number of models retrieved intomemory.



NOTES

Figure 1: Master and Simplified Versions of a Transmission Assembly

Tip!

Create a simplified rep with only a few models in it and usethis to place all of your views.

Geometry Representations

A geometry representation requires less time to retrieve than the actualpart because the system does not retrieve any of the parametricinformation, only the geometry. Although these versions of the part arenon-modifiable, you can still extract valuable information such as MassProperties and show dimensions on drawings.

Note:

It is recommended to base your large drawing on a SimplifiedRepresentation where most of the models are displayed as theGeometry Rep.

User Defined Representations

You will typically create your own simplified representation for use indrawing mode. With this rep you can:

• Exclude components that do not need to be seen.

• Set models to Geometry Rep that need to be displayed, but will notrequire modification from the drawing.



NOTES

• Substitute detailed parts and sub-assemblies with placeholder parts torepresent the volume of that component or subsystem and reduce thedetail represented.

Figure 2: Assembly Substituted with a Placeholder Part

• Set models to Master Rep that require all of the feature data inmemory

View States

As the drawing is built up and the need to show more detail approaches,the rep can be altered or new ones created where more components aredisplayed. Pro/ENGINEER allows you to set each view of your drawingto be displayed as a different Simplified Representation using the ViewStates option.

View ManipulationOnce your drawing is partially developed and the majority of the views areplaced, you may notice a performance drop for tasks such as initiallyretrieving the drawing, regenerating the views or switching sheets. Totarget this area for improvement, you can implement any of the techniquesoutlined in the following sections.

Z-Clipping

As mentioned in an earlier chapter, Z-Clipping will allow you to displayonly the geometry in front of a plane and will ignore all geometry behindit. Essentially, this will:

• Terminate hidden line removal computations at the Z-Clip location.



NOTES

• Terminate the displaying of any geometry from the Z-Clip location.

Figure 3: Front and Side Views

For example, when looking at the front view of the vehicle as shown inFigure 3, it is not necessary for the system to regenerate any geometrybeyond the vehicle center.

Erasing ViewsAs mentioned in an earlier chapter, you can temporarily remove viewsfrom a drawing by erasing them from the display. With the views erased,switching sheets is instantaneous. By saving the drawing with erasedviews, retrieval time will decrease. The views are resumed for generalreview, to perform additional detailing operations on the view or prior toplotting.

Cross-Section ManipulationCross sectional views require additional system resources in order to:

• Determine which components are intersected by the cutting plane.

• Determine which geometry is in front of the cutting plane in thedesired view and eliminate it.

• Determine which geometry is behind the cutting plane and how it isimpacted by display settings such as Hidden Line or No Hidden.

• Determine cross hatch setting for each model intersected by the cuttingplane.



NOTES

In some cases, an Area cross section can be used instead of the defaultTotal cross section to improve performance and clarity. With an Areacross section, only the geometry intersected by the cutting plane isdisplayed, preventing the system from calculating the geometry in front ofand back of the cutting plane. This type of section may not be appropriatewhere display of components behind the cutting plane is desired, but cancertainly be employed as a temporary, in-process solution.

Drawing Rep ToolA drawing representation is a series of commands that specify a displayconfiguration for the current drawing. You can use drawingrepresentations to control which models and which views of a drawing thesystem retrieves and displays. For example, you can temporarily removeall models and views that are not necessary for current work. Withdrawing representation functionality you can load a drawing to a particulardrawing sheet, zoom location, or view center-for example, retrieve onlyspecified sheets of a drawing without loading all the sheets and displayingevery view on each sheet.

Figure 4: The Two Tabs of the Drawing Rep Tool

Merging DrawingsUsing the Merge command, you can combine two drawings together.Merging allows for:



NOTES

• Increased Performance – The individual drawing files will retrievefaster than the multi-sheet drawing would have.

• Parallel Development Efforts – Several individual Pro/ENGINEERusers can work in parallel on separate portions of a multi-sheetdrawing and then merge their separate drawings into a single drawingfile.

A source file is appended to the target file as additional sheets; forexample, when you merge a two-sheet source drawing into a four-sheetdrawing, the target drawing then contains six sheets. You can later useSheets > Reorder to rearrange sheet order. Models that are used by thesource drawing are added automatically to the target drawing during themerge.

View Only RetrievalYou can significantly reduce retrieval time by retrieving a drawing inview-only mode because the system does not retrieve any of its associatedmodels.. This method is most useful for browsing or plotting out adrawing. If you decide to modify the drawing after viewing it, you canretrieve the models at any time.

In order to use the view-only retrieve method, however, you must save thedisplay of the model with the drawing. If you did not set one of theseoptions prior to the last time that you saved the drawing, the system thenonly shows the outline of the views, omitting any geometry.



NOTES


Goal

To reduce regeneration and repaint time for large drawings.

Method

In the first exercise, you reduce the regeneration and repaint time for alarge assembly by reducing the amount of clutter on the screen and usingview-only retrieve mode.

In the second exercise, you create a few simplified representations for thepump assembly using rules, and then use a representation in the drawing.

In the third exercise you merge two drawings into one file.

EXERCISE 1: Reducing Regeneration and RepaintTime

Task 1. Reduce the amount of information that the system must displayon the drawing by erasing views that you do not currently need.

1. Retrieve PUMP.DRW.

Figure 5: Sheet One of the Pump Drawing



NOTES

2. Change to Sheet 2.

Figure 6: Sheet Two of the Pump Drawing

3. Click Views > Erase View, and pick the detailed view. Type [no]when the system prompts you to remove all arrows and circlesassociated with this view.

4. Repeat this procedure to erase the two views in the lower leftportion of the sheet.

Task 2. Alter the configuration file to improve performance whileworking with large drawings.

1. Edit the config.pro file and add the optiondisp_trimetric_dwg_mode_view to no, andforce_wireframe_in_drawings to yes.

2. Repaint the display. Pro/ENGINEER now does not have to takethe time to calculate the removal of hidden lines.

Task 3. Add a 3-D view in the upper right corner of Sheet 2.

1. Click Add View > General > Done.



NOTES

2. Locate the view in the upper right corner of Sheet 2.

Note:

The view does not display on the screen but the Orientationdialog box appears because you changed the setting fordisp_trimetric_dwg_mode_view to no.

3. Click Saved Views, select Iso and click Set. Click OK to finish.

4. Remove hidden lines and tangent lines from the new 3-D view.Click Disp Mode > View Disp, then pick the 3-D view. ClickDone Sel. Click No Hidden > No Disp Tan > Done.

5. Edit config.pro and change the value of the configuration fileoption force_wireframe_in_drawings to no.

6. Repaint so that the drawing views no longer display in wireframe.

7. Resume the views that you erased earlier by clicking ResumeView > Select All > Done Sel.

8. Return to Sheet 1.

Task 4. Change the configuration file so that it only regenerates thedisplay when you choose to regenerate it.

1. Click Modify then pick one of the .750 dimensions. Type [1.25]as the value.

2. Click Regenerate > Model > Automatic. Notice how much timeit requires to regenerate the views.

3. Return to Sheet 2. The views on the second sheet begin toregenerate.

4. Set the configuration file option auto_regen_views to no.

5. Return to Sheet 1.

6. Click Modify and pick the 1.25 dimension. Type [.75] as the value.

7. Click Regenerate > Model > Automatic. Pro/ENGINEERregenerates the model and the dimension value updates, but theview geometry remains the same.



NOTES

Note:

Setting auto_regen_views to no allows you to control whenthe views regenerate so that you can make many changes tothe model or drawing without waiting for the views to update.

8. Click View > Regenerate View > Pick View. Pick the bottomview, then click Done Sel. Pro/ENGINEER only updates thisview.

Task 5. When the system retrieves a drawing, it retrieves all of themodels used in the drawing. As a result, the system may require asignificant amount of time to simply open the drawing for you to view orplot it. Configure this drawing for View Only Retrieval.

1. Save the drawing and erase it from memory.

2. Retrieve the drawing without retrieving any of the part or assemblyfiles used in the drawing. Click File >Open. Click and selectRetrieve Drawing as View Only. Select PUMP.DRW and clickOpen.

3. The system retrieves the drawing very quickly, but it only displaysthe view borders because you did not save the display with thedrawing. Click Utilities > Enviroment and select the SavedDisplay check box.

4. Click Retr Models > Confirm. The system retrieves the modelsused in the drawing and displays the views correctly.

5. Change to Sheet 2.

6. Save the drawing and then erase it again.

Task 6. Retrieve the drawing without retrieving any of the part orassembly files used in the drawing.

1. Retrieve the drawing again as view only.

2. The system retrieves the drawing very quickly and displays itcorrectly on the screen. Pro/ENGINEER displays the graphics theway that they appeared when you last saved the drawing. You cannow change sheets, plot, or retrieve the models.



NOTES

Note:

If one of the models changed since you last saved the drawing,the graphics that the system displays may be out of date.Regenerate the views on the drawing to update the graphics.

3. Change to the next sheet, then close the window.



NOTES

EXERCISE 2: Creating Simplified Representations

Task 1. The pump drawing only shows the exterior of the model, andthe interior components are not visible in the views. Retrieve the pumpassembly and create a simplified representation that eliminates the internalcomponents.

1. Retrieve PUMP.ASM.

Figure 7: Master Rep of the Pump

2. Click Simpfd Rep > Create, then type [exterior]. ClickExclude Comp as the default rule.

3. Rather than manually select the external components, use the SimpRep rule to evaluate this condition for you. Accept the defaultsMaster Rep then click By Rule.

4. On the New Rule tab of the BY RULE dialog box, place a checkmark beside Exterior Comps and click Evaluate.

5. Scroll down the MODEL TREE to see the components that satisfythis rule.

6. Click Update Screen > Done.

7. Save the assembly.



NOTES

Figure 8: External Components of the Pump

Task 2. Retrieve the pump drawing and swap the current master repmodel with the external simplified rep.

1. Retrieve PUMP.DRW and view Sheet 1.

2. Click Views > Modify View > View State.

3. Pick the lower view on Sheet 1. Click Confirm, select EXTERNAL,and click OK.

4. Switch to Sheet 2.

5. Repeat this procedure for the 3D view and the four planar views.Any dimensions that can no longer be displayed with the currentmodels in the rep are displayed in magenta. These dimensionscould be recreated.




NOTES

EXERCISE 3: Merging Two Drawings into One

Task 1. Open the two separate drawings which will be merged togetherand review them.

1. Open the MOTOR_P3 drawing.

Figure 9: The Motor Drawing

2. Notice that the drawing text is large in size and it interferes withusing standard offsets for the dimensions. In the lower-left viewnotice the axis display for the pattern of holes around the flange ofthe motor. The axis lines are horizontal and vertical, not radialabout the flange.

3. Open the COVER_P3 drawing.



NOTES

Figure 10: The Cover Drawing

4. Notice that the text is smaller than that of the previous drawing. Itis also using a different font type, called font. Notice in the lower-left view the axis circle and radial placed axis on the tabs along theedge of the cover.

5. Close the window and clear memory.

Task 2. Merge the motor drawing with the cover drawing.

Note:

The drawing that is being merged is the source drawing. Thedrawing into which it is being merged is the target drawing.

1. Click Advanced > Merge.

2. Select the MOTOR_P3.DRW and click Open.

3. Investigate the added sheet. Notice that the text height and type hasautomatically taken the values of the target drawing. Also, noticethat the axis pattern is now radial with an axis circle beingdisplayed.



NOTES

Note:

After the drawings are merged, the drawing setup file optionsfrom the target drawing override the options used by thesource drawing.

4. Choose Views > Dwg Models > Set Model. Notice that both thecover and motor parts are associated to the drawing.

5. Save the drawing and erase it from memory.



NOTES


• You can reduce display of items in the drawing using layers,environment options, and the configuration option.

• You can control when a view is regenerated.

• You can use View Only and Simplified Representations to limit thefile that need to be retrieved.


Page 20-1

Module

PlottingIn this module, you learn to how to create plot files.

Objectives


• Plot a drawing interactively.

• Configure the plotter.

• Plot using the Batch utilities.



NOTES

PLOTTING A DRAWINGUsing Pro/ENGINEER, you can create plot files of the current object(part, drawing, assembly, etc.) and send them to the print queue of aplotter.

Plotting InteractivelyInteractive plotting provides flexibility in creating a plot file because youcan scale, clip, or output the plot to the screen to preview it. Once youhave properly set up all of the plotting options, you can send the plotdirectly to the plotter from within Pro/ENGINEER.

Figure 1: Print Dialog Box

• Destination – You can specify the printer to which you want thesystem to plot your file, add a new type of printer, configure theprinter for this operation, and print out to a file.

• Sheets – You can print all of the sheets, only the current sheet, or arange of sheets (for example, 11-14).

• Number of copies – When you send the plot directly to a printer, youcan enter a positive number between 1 and 99 to specify the number ofcopies that you need.

• Plotter command – By typing the system command that you use tosend a file to the printer, you can print the object from withinPro/ENGINEER.


Plot t ing Page 20-3

NOTES

Configuring the Plotter

Using the three pages of the PRINTER CONFIGURATION dialog box, youcan specify the page, printer, and model configuration for the plotter touse, as shown in Figure 2.

Figure 2: Printer Configuration

You can specify the following information concerning the plotted page:

• Dimensions of the paper – You can specify the size of the sheet towhich you are going to print (for example, you can print a C-sizedrawing on an A-size sheet) or create a customized size.

• Offset on the paper – You can specify the offset distance of the plotfrom the origin.

• Label to include on the plot – You can include a label on the plotand control its height. The system prints the label as NAME:<OBJECTDATE> and shifts the plot to the right, which may clip some geometryalong the right border.

• Units of the paper – You can define the variable plot size in inches ormillimeters.

You can specify the following information concerning the printer:



NOTES

• Pen information – You can select the pen table file to control whichpens the system uses for different types of lines. You can also set thepen velocity to a printer that has pen speed control.

• Cutter information – You can specify that you want to install a cutteron a Versatec plotter (only if you select a Versatec plotter from thePRINT dialog box).

• Handshake information – You can access either the software plotterhandshake mode or the hardware plotter handshake mode.

• Sheet type – You can specify the type of paper as cut-sheet or roll.

• Rotation – You can properly print a landscape orientation drawing ona portrait type laser printer or a portrait orientation drawing on alandscape type laser printer.

You can specify the following information concerning the model you areplotting:

• Type of plot – You can select the following plot types:

� Full Plot – Creates a plot of the entire object.

� Clipped – Creates a clipped plot by defining a box around thearea to plot. This area appears on paper in its normal locationrelative to the lower-left corner.

� Based on Zoom – Creates a scaled, clipped plot based on thepaper size and the zoom setting in the graphics window. This isthe default setting.

� Plot Area – Creates a plot by shifting the area inside the clipbox to the lower-left corner of the paper and scaling the clippedarea to match the user-specified scale.

� Model Size – Scales the plot to a specified model scale. Forexample, if you enter 0.25, the system creates a plot of themodel to ¼ scale. This choice is valid only for 3-D objects.

• Plot scale – You can specify the plot scale in a range from 0.01 to 100(2-D only). In addition, you can also generate a segmented plot andcontrol whether or not the system plots it with the drawing. Asegmented plot plots the drawing in real size, breaking it up ontoseparate sheets.

• Layers – You can control whether the system plots all visible layers oronly the one specified by ID.

• Plot quality – You can specify the quality of the output file bycontrolling the amount of checking that Pro/ENGINEER performs foroverlapping lines.



NOTES

Plotting Using the Pro/BATCH UtilityUsing the Pro/BATCH utility, you can process a large number ofPro/ENGINEER files in a batch mode and create output files in a varietyof formats. You can schedule the batch process to run on a delayed starttime utilizing system resources during off-peak hours. The Pro/BATCHutility outputs files as plot files, IGES, DXF, STL, VDA, and any of theformats that you can create interactively from within Pro/ENGINEER.The Pro/BATCH utility retrieves the specified list of objects and createsthe output file without requiring any further interaction with you.

When using the Pro/BATCH utility, you should keep in mind thefollowing:

• License requirements – You must have an available Pro/ENGINEERlicense and access to all modules required for the scheduledoperations.

• Local version numbers – Filenames listed for processing do notrequire the local version number. The system retrieves the latestversion of the object as it normally would in Pro/ENGINEER. If youspecify a local version of the file, Pro/BATCH uses that specificversion of the file.

• Configuration files – Pro/BATCH reads the configuration files fromthe same locations as a Pro/ENGINEER session, including the currentworking directory from which the Pro/BATCH utility is executed.

• Search paths – The Pro/BATCH utility uses the Pro/ENGINEERsearch paths to find the files in the list. The system creates output filesin the current directory unless you specify the destination directory inthe Pro/BATCH interface.

• Log files – The system generates log files for each Pro/BATCHsession listing each command line in the file followed by a success orfailure exit code.

Working in the Pro/BATCH Environment

Pro/BATCH allows you to define the actions that you want the system toperform in the batch session, as well as schedule the job for theappropriate time. When you execute the pro_batch command, thesystem brings you into the Pro/BATCH environment. You can then createbatch files and save them, using the same batch process repeatedly, ifnecessary.

Before you can create a batch file, you must start Pro/BATCH and then setup general preferences. You can then create the batch file, specify the files



NOTES

on which to perform the action, set up the options for each action, andschedule the batch process.

Starting Pro/BATCH and Setting up Preferences

To start the Pro/BATCH utility, type the command [pro_batch] in asystem window. The Pro/BATCH interface should then appear on yourscreen as shown in Figure 3. You should then set up the generalpreferences for the batch file to define the default action that you want thesystem to perform on the files (Figure 4).

Figure 3: Pro/BATCH Dialog Box

Note:

If you include objects for plotting in the batch file, you mustenter the Plotter command on the Plot options page.



NOTES

Figure 4: Option Preference Dialog Box

Creating a New Batch File

After defining the preferences, you can create a new batch file and definethe command used to start Pro/ENGINEER. You should then specify thefiles on which you want the system to perform the actions, as well as theoptions for each action.

• Select the names of the files that you would like to include.

• You can then define the appropriate options for each file using the SETOPTION dialog box. After you finish specifying options for a batchfile, you should save it.

Scheduling the Start of the Batch Process

You can set the exact amount of time that should elapse before the batchprocess starts.

CONFIGURATION FILE OPTIONSThis option lists the Pro/ENGINEER configuration file options that affectplotting. You can add them to the loadpoint configuration file and set themas read-only for other Pro/ENGINEER users. Specific projects mayrequire unique plotter configuration setups. If you place the appropriateconfiguration file in the project directory, the system can read thoseconfiguration settings when you execute it from that directory.



NOTES

Table 1: Configuration File Options Affecting PlottingOption Value Description

delete_after_plotting yes

no (default)

Determines if the systemdeletes a plot file afterplotting. When set to“yes,” the systemautomatically deletes a plotfile after successfullyplotting it.

edge_display_quality very_high

normal (default)

high

low

Controls the edge displayquality for wireframe andhidden line removal. It alsoaffects screen display.

interface_quality value (0-3) Determines the defaultquality check the systemuses to check foroverlapping lines in a plotor 2-D export.

pen#_line_weight (# = 1-8)

value (1-16)

Sets the weights of theentities plotted to pens 1through eight to a value of1 through 16, where 1 isthe thinnest, 16 being thethickest in increments of.0006 in. Default valuesare Pen 1 4, Pen 2 1, Pen 32, Pen 4 3, Pen 5 2, Pen 63, Pen 7 1, Pen 8 4. Thedefault thickness for Pen 1is .0024 in.

pen_slew value Sets the pen speed for bothx and y directions forplotters that are compatiblewith this option.

pen_slew_xy value and value Sets the pen speed for xand y directions separatelyfor plotters that arecompatible with thisoption. The first value isfor the x direction and thesecond is for the ydirection.

pen_table_file path and name Specifies a default penmapping table (table.pnt)file.



NOTES

plotter plot driver name Specifies the plotter driveras shown in the list ofsupported devices in thePlot dialog box.

plotter_command command Specifies a command toinitiate the plot from theoperating system. (forexample, lp, lpr etc.)

plot_file_dir directory name Specifies the directory towhere the system writesplot files.

plot_names yes

no (default)

When set to yes, systemgives plot files extensionsto identify plot format.(.ps, .hp, .hp2, .ver etc.).

use_8_plotter_pens yes

no (default)

Allows full support of 8pens (uses 4 pens bydefault).

use_software_line_

fonts

yes

no (default)

When set to “yes,” plotsthe exact line style used inPro/ENGINEER. Whenset to “no,” the plotterplots lines using its ownfont.



NOTES


To plot a drawing interactively, and by using batch utilities.

Method

In this exercise, you create plot files for drawings. You create plot filesmanually and by using the Pro/BATCH tool.

EXERCISE 1: Creating Plot Files for Drawings

Task 1. Retrieve PLUNGER_BODY.DRW and create a plot file bymanually changing the settings through the PRINT dialog box. Create aplot file for both sheets of the drawing on A-size sheets.

Note:

If you did not finish the plunger body drawing earlier, retrievePLUNGER_BODY_MARKUP.DRW.

1. Set up the print configuration to print to an A-size sheet. Click File> Print. Click Configure…. Click the Page tab and select A fromthe SIZE drop-down list.

2. Ensure that the system plots the entire drawing, regardless ofwhether you zoom in on it. Click Model and select Full Plot fromthe PLOT drop-down list.

3. Confirm the With Format check box is selected and click OK.

4. Select Generic Postscript from the DESTINATION drop-down listto change the destination.

5. Select the TO FILE check box, clear the TO PRINTER check box,and select All for the SHEETS. Click OK.

6. Create a plot file. Accept the defaults Create Single File and[PLUNGER_BODY.PS] as the name of the plot file and click OK.



NOTES

7. Open a system window to make sure that the plot file is in thecurrent directory. Click Window > Open System from the MainMenu.

8. For DOS, type [dir *.ps*] to list all of the postscript files in thedirectory. For UNIX, type [ls *.ps*] to list all of the postcriptfiles. Type [exit] to close the system window.

9. Exit Pro/ENGINEER.

Task 2. Start the Pro/BATCH utility and create a new batch file, thenset up the preferences for plot files.

1. Open up a system window and begin the Pro/BATCH utility. Opena system window and type [pro_batch] at the command line.

2. Create a new batch file. In the PRO/BATCH dialog box type[DRW_PLOT] as the name in the BATCH FILE box.

3. Specify the command to start Pro/ENGINEER. Type the commandused to start Pro/E in the PRO/ENGINEER COMMAND box. (ForWindows make sure to include the .BAT extension.)

4. Define the default option preferences for this file. ClickPreference > Set Preference.

5. Define the default action for this batch file as plotting. Click theGeneral tab and select Plot from the DEFAULT ACTION drop-down list.

6. Define the preferences for plot files. Click the Plot tab. SelectDEFAULT from the PLOTTER drop-down list, select C as thePAPER SIZE, select 3 as the OUTPUT QUALITY, and type [1.0] asthe USER SCALE. Click OK.

Task 3. Specify the files to plot during this batch process. Afterselecting the files, set up the preferences for each action.

1. Specify the list of drawings to plot. Click File > Browse.

2. Navigate to the FUND_DRAW_310 directory in theDIRECTORIES area.

3. Filter for drawings.



NOTES

4. Select the BOLT_REPLACE, screw, and threaded bolt drawings.Holding down the <CTRL> key, select BOLT_REPLACE.DRW,SCREW.DRW, and THREADED_BOLT.DRW.

5. Click Add Objects. Click Close Browser when you havefinished.

6. Change the plot options for the screw and threaded bolt drawingsto plot to an A-size sheet. Select SCREW.DRW andTHREADED_BOLT.DRW.

7. Click Options > Set Option from the pull-down menu. Changeonly the plotting option for the sheet size.

8. Select A from the PAPER SIZE drop-down list and click OK. Theoption column changes from ’default’ to ’userdefined.’

Task 4. Save the batch file and schedule it to start immediately.

1. Click File > Save in the PRO/BATCH dialog box.

2. Execute the batch process. Click Schedule > Start the Task.

3. Specify the task to start immediately. In the SCHEDULE dialogbox, type [0] as the number of hours to delay before starting thebatch process.

4. Click OK to start the task. When the process has finished, click OKto close the dialog box.

5. Exit from batch processing. Click File > Exit > OK from thePRO/BATCH dialog box.

6. Open a system window and list the contents of the batch file savedin the current directory.

7. List the contents of the PRO_BATCH.LOG file in the currentdirectory to view the results of the batch process. For the DOSwindow, type [type pro_batch.log.1]. For UNIX, type[more pro_batch.log.1].

8. After viewing the log file, close the system window.



NOTES


• You can interactively plot drawing, parts, and assemblies.

• You can plot using the Batch utilities.



Page 21-1

Module

Markup ModelIn this module, you learn how to create engineering markups. You

also learn how to superimpose drawings using overlays.

Objectives


• Create markups for different types of objects.

• Save and retrieve markups.

• Superimpose drawings with overlays.



NOTES

ENGINEERING MARKUPSA markup is an informal sketch that you can create in Pro/ENGINEERand superimpose over an object, as shown in Figure 1. Each markup actslike a set of transparent sheets on top of a drawing sheet, enabling you tosuperimpose text and sketched entities in a variety of colors to indicatewhere changes might be required.

Figure 1: Markup Example

Creating a MarkupYou can create a markup for a part, assembly, drawing, report, layout, ormanufacturing model. However, the object that you use for the markup isread-only, which means that you cannot make any changes to your part ordrawing while in Markup mode. You can only indicate the changes thatyou need to make.

To create a markup, you must select an object and then specify a name forthe markup. The default name is your login name. The system creates thefile and attaches a .MRK extension to it to signify that it is a markup. You


Markup Model Page 21-3

NOTES

can then set up the markup by specifying the color, text height, and linewidth to use for the markup entities.

After setting up the markup, you can create notes and sketched entities(sketch, curve, arrow, or line) on the markup, as well as modify, move, ordelete entities. If your drawing contains multiple sheets, you can mark upall of the sheets at the same time and in the same markup. You do not haveto have a separate markup for each sheet.

Saving and Viewing a MarkupWhen you save a markup, Pro/ENGINEER saves the specified markuponly; you must save other markups separately. It saves all of the sketchedentities and notes with the markup file, not the object. Because the objectdoes not change, the system does not save it with the markup.

Retrieving MarkupsWhen you retrieve a drawing that has an associated markup,Pro/ENGINEER does not inform you that a markup exists for it because itconsiders the drawing to be independent of the markup. Therefore, youmay want to implement a notification system for your users using email,voice mail, memos, or a database manager.

When you retrieve a specific markup, Pro/ENGINEER lists the markupname with the related model in brackets; then it automatically retrieves therelated model and the markup. You can then toggle between differentmarkups for that model without having to open each individually.

Naming Conventions

Pro/ENGINEER does not automatically create a new version of a markupwhen you create a new version of the associated drawing. Therefore, youmay want to create a new markup with each version of your drawing tomaintain current markups.

OVERLAYSUsing overlays, you can superimpose the image of one drawing on top ofanother to view changes among the source drawing, the drawing in whichyou created the overlay, and a target drawing. This is a useful tool forviewing the differences between family table drawings in which you havereplaced the views from one instance with another. An overlaid view



NOTES

contains all detail items from the source drawing, and it automaticallyupdates to reflect any changes.

When using overlays, keep in mind the following:

• Overlays are read-only in the target drawing.

• You cannot select an overlay for any drawing operation in the targetdrawing.

• If the size of the target drawing sheet is different from that of thesource drawing, they both consume the same graphics area. Thesystem rescales the model from one size to another.

• You can place overlays from multiple drawings on individual sheetsthat contain no detailing that was originally in the target drawing. Thisallows you to create a master target drawing with multiple sheetscomposed of overlays of the source drawings.



NOTES


To create markups for a drawing.

Method

In this exercise, you create two markups for the plunger body drawing.The first markup specifies the removal of the triangular symbol andmodification of the detailed view scales. The second markup specifies themodification of the scale of the 3-D view.

EXERCISE 1: Creating a Markup on a Drawing

Task 1. Create a new markup for the plunger body drawing. Sketch acircle and an arrow around the triangular symbol

1. Create a new markup for the plunger body drawing. Click File >New > Markup. Type [CHANGE_A] as the name and click OK.

2. Open PLUNGER_BODY.DRW.

Note:

If you did not finish the previous version of the plunger bodydrawing, retrieve PLUNGER_BODY_MARKUP.DRW.

3. Define the settings for the first markup. Change the color, the textheight, and the line width. Click Setup > Color > Green. ClickText Height and type [.3]. Click Line Width and type [.1].

4. Sketch a freehand circle around the triangular symbol in the lowerleft view on Sheet 1. Click Sketch and drag the mouse whilepressing the left mouse button. To finish the sketch, release the leftmouse button.

5. Create an arrow pointing to the freehand sketch that you justcreated. Click Arrow and press the left mouse button to specify theposition of the arrowhead. Move the mouse to another position andpress the left mouse button to create the other end of the arrow.



NOTES

Task 2. Create a note specifying the removal of the symbol from thedrawing. In addition, create a note and two arrows specifying a change inthe scale of the detailed views.

1. Click Note and pick near the end of the arrow for the location ofthe note.

2. Type [REMOVE THIS SYMBOL] as the first line of the note andtype [FROM THE DRAWING] as the second line of the note.

3. Press <ENTER> on a blank line to finish the note, as shown inFigure 2.

Tips & Techniques:

To reposition items, use the Move option.

Figure 2: Remove Symbol

4. Switch to Sheet 2 to add more geometry to this markup. ClickSetup > Switch Sht > Next until Sheet 2 appears.

5. Create a note between the two detailed views to specify theadjustment of the scales. Locate the note between the detailedviews.

6. Type [CHANGE THE SCALE] as the first line of the note, [FORTHESE VIEWS] as the second line, and [TO 5.00] as the thirdline.



NOTES

7. Create arrows pointing from the note to DETAIL 1 and DETAIL 2,as shown in Figure 3.

Figure 3: Change Scales

8. Save this markup.

9. Click Done/Return to finish this markup.

Task 3. Create a new markup that specifies a modification of the scalefor the 3-D view, then change the line width and text style.

1. Click New from the ENTER MARKUP menu. Type [CHANGE_B]as the name of the markup.

2. Switch sheets to Sheet 1 of the drawing.

3. Create a curve surrounding the 3-D view on Sheet 1. Click Curve,then pick points through which the curve should pass (seeFigure 4). Click the middle mouse button to finish.

4. Create an arrow pointing to the curve that you just created.

5. Create a note at the end of the arrow. Type [CHANGE THE SCALE]as the first line of the note and [TO 1.25] as the second line of thenote, as shown in Figure 4.



NOTES

Figure 4: Change View Scale

6. Change the line width of the curve and the arrow that you justcreated. Click Modify > Line Width, pick the curve and the arrow,and click Done Sel. Type [.05] as the new line width.

7. Click Setup > Color > Cyan to change the color of the newmarkup to light blue.

8. Change the justification of the note text and increase the textheight. Click Modify > Note > Text Style. Pick both lines of thenote and click Done Sel.

9. Type [.25] for the HEIGHT and click Center from the JUSTIFYHORIZ drop-down list.

10. Click Apply > Close.

11. Save this markup and close the window.

Task 4. Retrieve the markup for the plunger body drawing and displayboth markups simultaneously.

1. Open the markup CHANGE_A.MRK. At this point, only markupCHANGE_A should appear on the drawing.

2. Display the markups for CHANGE_A and CHANGE_Bsimultaneously. Click Setup > Show > CHANGE_B. The markupCHANGE_B should now appear also.




NOTES


• You can create a markup of a drawing.

• You can display more than one markup simultaneously.

• You can overlay a drawing on top of another.



Page A-1

Appendix

Creating ISO-Standard DrawingsIn this module, you learn how to create a drawing that conforms to

ISO standards.

Objectives


• Use the configuration file and drawing setup options to create anISO standard drawing.

• Create tolerance tables at the part and drawing levels.

• Create ISO standard surface finish symbols.


Page A-2 Fundamenta ls of Drawing

NOTES

CONFIGURATION FILES AND DRAWING SETUPFILES

Configuration file options affect all modes in Pro/ENGINEER globally,while drawing setup file options set drawing parameters that are unique toevery drawing. You must modify both files to create a correct drawing inaccordance with the ISO/DIN standard.

Using Configuration File Options to Create ISO-Standard DrawingsBy setting configuration file options in Drawing mode, you can displaychamfer dimensions and reference dimensions in accordance with the ISOstandard, as well as show 3-D views in an isometric or dimetric projection.

Displaying Chamfer Dimensions

Using the configuration file option chamfer_45deg_dim_text, youcan control the format of the 45-degree chamfer dimension in any mode. Ifyou change the default value ASME/ANSI to ISO/DIN, you can displaychamfer dimensions according to the ISO standard, as shown in Figure 1.

Figure 1: Chamfer_45deg_dim_text

Showing Reference Dimensions in Parentheses

Using the configuration file option parenthesize_ref_dim, you canshow reference dimensions in parentheses in accordance with the ISOstandard to distinguish them from other dimensions. If you set the value toyes, the system encloses reference dimensions in parentheses.

ASME/ANSI ISO/DIN


Append ix A Page A-3

NOTES

Showing 3-D Views in Drawing Mode in an Isometric orDimetric Projection

Using the configuration file options orientation, y_angle, andx_angle, you can display 3-D views in Drawing mode in an isometricprojection or dimetric projection. To create either view type, set the valueof orientation to user_def to add the option User_Def to theENVIRONMENT dialog box, in addition to Trimetric and Isometric. Forthe isometric view, set y_angle to -30, and x_angle to 30. For thedimetric view, set y_angle to -42, and x_angle to 7.

Using Drawing Setup File (.dtl) Options to CreateISO-Standard DrawingsBy setting drawing setup file options, you can create ISO-standarddrawings. Table 1 lists the available drawing setup file options accordingto their function. The first column gives the name of the option, while thesecond column specifies the value.



NOTES

Table 1: Drawing Setup File Options for ISO-StandardDrawings

OPTION NAME OPTION VALUE

Options controlling views and their annotations:

half_view_line symmetry

detail_circle_line_style phantomfont

projection_type first_angle

view_note std_iso

view_scale_format ratio_colon

Options controlling cross-sections and their arrows:

crossec_arrow_style head_online

crossec_arrow_place above_tail

cutting_line std_iso

cutting_line_segment 10

Options controlling solids shown in views:

hlr_for_threads yes

thread_standard std_iso

Options controlling leaders:

draw_arrow_style filled

Options controlling gtol information:

gtol_datums std_iso_jis

new_iso_set_datums yes

Options controlling dimensions:

angdim_text_orientation parallel_fully_outside

chamfer_45deg_leader_style std_iso or std_din

iso_ordinate_delta yes

lead_trail_zero std_metric

ord_dim_standard std_iso

text_orientation parallel

tol_text_height_factor 0.6

tol_text_width_factor 0.6

Miscellaneous options:

decimal_marker comma

line_style_standard std_iso

weld_symbol_standard std_iso



NOTES

TOLERANCE TABLESYou can create dimensional tolerances using a set of tolerance tables thatthe system assigns to each model in either the ANSI or ISO standard.Pro/ENGINEER assigns the ANSI tolerances based on the nominaldimension’s number of digits. However, tolerance tables drive the ISO-standard tolerances.

Using Tolerance Tables for ISO StandardsThe system loads tolerance tables into the part file when you create anISO-standard model if you have set the configuration file optiontolerance_standard to ISO (the default is ANSI). However, youcan also switch the tolerance standard from ANSI to ISO using the TolSetup option in Part mode, Assembly mode, or Drawing mode. Since thetables determine how the model regenerates, the system stores thempermanently with the model and controls only the driving dimensions.

In general, four types of tolerance tables are available. The GeneralDimension and Broken Edge tolerance table exist just once for every model.However, you can have several different holes and shafts tables per model.When you create a dimension, the system assigns it automatically to theGeneral table. You can switch the tolerance table reference of thedimension to any other table using Modify, DimCosmetics, Assign Tol.You can also display or change the tolerance table as illustrated in Table 2.

Table 2: Tolerance TablesParameter Value

TABLE_TYPE GENERAL_DIMS or BROKEN_EDGES

TABLE_NAME DEFAULTS

TABLE_UNIT MILLIMETER

RANGE_UNIT MILLIMETER

DESCRIPTION 0.5 - 3 3 - 6

FINE 0.05 0.05

MEDIUM 0.1 0.1

COARSE 0.2 0.3

VERY COARSE - 0.5



NOTES

Each ISO-standard model also needs an extra attribute called the modelclass, which determines the general coarseness of the model (fine,medium, coarse, or very coarse), as shown in Table 2. The system uses thetolerance class in conjunction with the dimension value when retrievingtolerances for General or Broken Edge dimensions. The configuration fileoption tolerance_class sets the default tolerance class for ISOmodels.

After you load a new table, the system assigns the new dimensiontolerances and you can regenerate the model. If you modify a dimensiontolerance, it deletes the tolerance table reference for that dimension andthe tolerance value remains the same until you modify it again or reassignthe tolerance table. The configuration file optiontolerance_table_dir sets the default directory for a user-definedtolerance table.

Displaying Dimensions Driven by Holes or Shafts Tables

All holes and shafts tables overwrite existing tables. Figure 2 illustrateshow Pro/ENGINEER displays dimensions in ISO models, which aredriven by holes or shafts tables.

\

Figure 2: Display of Dimensions with Tolerances

When changing the tolerance table reference, keep in mind the following:

• If a holes or shafts tolerance table drives a dimension’s tolerances, youcannot show it in a plus-minus symmetric format. The system assumesthat the General and Broken Edge tables have symmetric values.

• If a dimension value falls outside the ranges specified in the table, thesystem uses the closest range to obtain tolerances.

• If you place a dimension tolerance in a family table, the system deletesits tolerance table reference. Also, if you switch a model from ANSI toISO, or vice versa, it preserves the tolerances in the family tables anddoes not assign a table reference to those dimensions.



NOTES

ISO SURFACE FINISH SYMBOLSTo create an ISO-standard surface finish symbol, you must place aninstance of a symbol using a generic ISO surface finish symbol consistingof building blocks, or groups. Table 3 presents a brief overview of groupsthat you can use to create an ISO surface finish symbol (group names arein bold print).

Table 3: ISO Surface Finish Symbol GroupsGROUPS DESCRIPTION ILLUSTRATION

UNSPECIFIED Surface can be produced byany method.

LEADER Used to create a symbolleader.

MACHINED Material removal bymachining is required.

NO_REMOVAL Material removal prohibited.

LAY Designates the direction of lay:

PARALLEL - Approximatelyparallel to the line representingthe surface to which thesymbol is applied.

PERP - Approximatelyperpendicular to the linerepresenting the surface towhich the symbol is applied.

ANGULAR - Angular in bothdirections to the linerepresenting the surface towhich the symbol is applied.

MULTI_DIR - Multi-directional.

CIRCULAR - Approximatelycircular relative to the centerof the surface to which thesymbol is applied.

RADIAL - Approximatelyradial to the center of thesurface to which the symbol isapplied.

NON_DIR - Nondirectional,or protuberant.

ROUGHNESS Indicates permissible



NOTES

GROUPS DESCRIPTION ILLUSTRATIONroughness range (micrometersor inches):

AVERAGE - Roughnessaverage.

MAX_MIN - Maximum andminimum roughness averagevalues.

REMOVALALLOW

Material removal bymachining that is required toproduce the surface(millimeters or inches).

SAMPLE_LEG Roughness sampling length orcutoff rating (millimeters orinches).

OTHER_ROUGH Text used for specifying otherroughness.

PROD_METHOD Text used for specifyingproduction method.



NOTES


GoalTo create a drawing to ISO standards.

Method

In this exercise, you create a drawing that follows the ISO standard bychanging the drawing setup file and defining ISO tolerance tables for holeor shaft dimensions.

EXERCISE 1: Creating a Drawing in Accordancewith the ISO Standard

Task 1. Retrieve the ISO_DRAWING.PRT in Part mode as shown inFigure 3, and obtain information about how the part was created.

Figure 3: Part with Tolerances

1. Turn on the tolerance display using the ENVIRONMENT dialogbox.

2. Check the dimensions of the first protrusion. Click Modify andselect PROTRUSION ID 9 from the MODEL TREE.

3. Continue to use modify to check the dimensions of hole id 465.Notice that the diameter dimension is displayed in plus/minusformat.



NOTES

4. Check the remaining features using the MODEL TREE.

Task 2. The cover part, as shown in Figure 3, was created with metricdimensions and the four dimensions shown were changed from Nominalto the Plus-Minus format. Change the tolerance standard from ANSI toISO. Since the cover will hold bearings, you will change additionaldimensions to display a tolerance.

1. Click Utilities > Preference to change the configuration file.

2. Add the configuration file options.OPTION VALUE

CHAMFER_45DEG_DIM_TEXT ISO/DIN

ORIENTATION USER_DEFAULT

Y_ANGLE -42

X_ANGLE 7

3. Save the file and name it [ISO_CONFIG]. Apply the changes andclose the PREFERENCES dialog box.

4. Change the tolerance standard to ISO. Click Set Up > Tol Setup >> Standard > ISO/DIN. Press <Enter> to regenerate the part.

5. Assign the model to a tolerance class. This part is used in anengine, and the general coarseness is medium. Click Model Class> MEDIUM. Press <Enter> to regenerate the part.

6. The dimensions that had their tolerances displayed have beenadded to the General tolerance table. To view the values inside thetable, click Tol Tables > Show > General Dims. Click File > Exitto close the table.

7. Tolerance two of these four dimensions to a specific hole tolerancetable. Click Tol Tables > Retrieve, select the TOLERANCETABLE DIRECTORY from the LOOK IN drop-down list and selectHOLE_J.

8. Click Open. Press <Enter> to regenerate the part.

9. Repeat step 7 to apply a shaft tolerance table SHAFT_H to themodel. Click Done/Return > Done to return to PART menu.

10. Assign the ∅50 dimensions of the bearing to the J6 hole tolerancetable. Click Modify > DimCosmetics > AssignTol > Holes andtype [j6] in the message area.



NOTES

11. Select HOLE ID465 and HOLE ID 520 from the MODEL TREE toshow the dimensions. Pick the two ∅50 dimensions as shown inFigure 4. Click Done from the MODIFY menu.

Figure 4: Changing the Two Diameter Dimensions

12. Save the changes.


Task 3. Open the ISO_DRAWING, start the conversion to an ISOstandard drawing, and change the drawing setup file in accordance with anISO standard.

1. Open the file ISO_DRAWING.DRW.

2. Modify the existing drawing setup file to reflect the values shownin Table 4.

Tip!

Set the SORT option to As Set to have the options displayedas listed in Table 4.

Table 4: Changing the Drawing Setup File to the ISO Standard

drawing_text_height 3.5text_thickness 0.35detail_circle_line_style PHANTOMFONTprojection_type FIRST_ANGLE



NOTES

view_note STD_ISOview_scale_format RATIO_COLONcrossec_arrow_length 6crossec_arrow_style HEAD_ONLINEcrossec_arrow_width 3.5crossec_text_place ABOVE_TAILcutting_line STD_ISOcutting_line_segment 10hlr_for_threads YESthread_standard STD_ISOangdim_text_orientation PARALLEL_FULLY_OUTSIDEchamfer_45deg_leader_style STD_DINdim_leader_length 5dim_text_gap 1.2iso_ordinate_delta YESlead_trail_zeros STD_METRICord_dim_standard STD_ISOtext_orientation PARALLELtol_display YEStol_text_height_factor 0.6tol_text_width_factor 0.6witness_line_delta 1.0witness_line_offset 1.5draw_arrow_length 3.5draw_arrow_style FILLEDdraw_arrow_width 1.5draw_attach_sym_height DEFAULTdraw_attach_sym_width DEFAULTdraw_dot_diameter 1.0leader_elbow_length 6axis_line_offset 4circle_axis_offset 4radial_pattern_axis_circle YESgtol_datums STD_ISO_JISdecimal_marker COMMAdrawing_units MM

3. Apply the changes then save a copy of the drawing setup file. Type[ISO] for the name.

4. Repaint the screen and notice the changes. Close thePREFERENCES dialog box.

Task 4. Note that the projected view (the one with the cross section) didnot update. You can change the view orientation by changing the viewtype.

1. Click Views> Modify View> View Type to modify the view type.Pick the VIEW RIGHT_2 projected view.

2. Click General> Done to define the type as general.



NOTES

3. Click Done from the MENU MANAGER to leave the existing crosssection definition.

4. Modify the view type again. Click View Type. Pick the VIEWRIGHT_2 projected view again.

5. Click Projection> Done to set the view type back to projected.

6. Press <Enter> to allow the system to reorient the detail view.

7. Click Done from the MENU MANAGER to leave the existing crosssection definition.

8. Resolve the conflict in the views’ parent. Select the general view tothe left of the view you are changing.

Task 5. The cut direction for the cross section is defined by the viewsinitial orientation. Change the orientation for the cross section view so thatit is correct.

1. Click X-Section> Flip and pick the projected views cross-hatchingto redisplay the cross section by modifying it.

2. Return to top level menu. Click Done/Return.

Task 6. Some of the notes on the drawing do not comply with ISOstandards. Change the notes to meet compliance.

1. Modify some of the notes on the drawing. Select Modify> Text >Text Line, then pick DETAIL C. Type [{0:&view_name}] in themessage area.

2. Blank the words SECTION A-A using a layer. Click View>

Layers. Click , type [Note] for layer name and click OK.

3. Associate the note to the layer. Click Item and Add. Select 2DITEMS. Then pick the note SECTION A-A and click Done Sel andDone/Return.

4. Change the display of the layer. Select the NOTE layer from the

list then click . Click Save Status > Close.



NOTES

Task 7. Set the dimension offsets to be correct according to ISOstandards.

1. Click Create > Snap Line > Att View and pick the four cyanedges in the projection view.

2. Click Done Sel to create snap lines in the projected view to controlthe position of the dimensions.

3. Type [10] as the distance of the first snap line, type [5] as thenumber of snap lines, and type [8] as the distance between snaplines.


5. Move the dimension to snap. Click Move and move the dimensionsso that they appear as in Figure 5.

6. Click Delete, pick the extra snap lines to remove, and click DoneSel to delete extra snap lines that you did not use.

Task 8. Add the number of holes to the 60 degree angular dimension asparametric information.

1. Add the pattern parameter of six holes to the 60.0 dimension. ClickModify > Dimension, pick the 60.0 dimension, and click DoneSel.

2. Click Dim Text and type [&p0 X] in the PREFIX text box. ClickOK > Done/Return.

3. Erase the 6 holes note. Click Show/Erase. Click Erase > and pick 6 HOLES. Close the dialog box. The drawing shouldappear as shown in Figure 5.



NOTES

Figure 5: Completely Dimensioned Drawing

Task 9. Change tolerances and the number of decimal places inDrawing mode.

1. Click Modify > Num Digits, then type [3]. Click Pick Many andcreate a box around the entire drawing.

2. Click Done Sel.

3. Apply the tolerance table to the diameter dimension. ClickDimension, pick the ∅130 dimension, and click Done Sel.

4. Select SHAFT from the Tolerance table list. Select H and 6 fromthe TABLE NAME drop down menus.

5. Select LIMITS from the TOLERANCE MODE drop down list thenselect OK to view the exact values of the dimension.

6. Change the tolerance format of the two ∅50 dimensions. ClickModify > Dimension, pick the two ∅50 dimensions, and clickDone Sel.

7. For the Tolerance mode, select Limits to show the exact values inparentheses. Close the dialog box by selecting OK.




NOTES

9. Finish the clean up of the dimensions. Click Move to reposition thesnap lines and dimensions so that they do not intersect, as shown inFigure 6.

Figure 6: Drawing with Tolerances

Task 10. Place surface finish symbols on the drawing according to theISO standard.

1. Click Create > Symbol > Instance to create ISO-standard surfacefinish symbols.

2. On the PLACEMENT tab, click Retrieve to retrieve a pre-definedinstance. Click System Syms from the LOOK IN drop down list.

3. Double click isosurftext then click isosurftext.sym > Open. Thesymbol definition is now ISOSURFTEXT.

4. In the HEIGHT box, type [15].

5. From the PLACEMENT: TO BE PLACED drop down list, selectWITH LEADERS, then pick the lower attachment of the two surfacefinish symbols as shown in Figure 7. Click Done Sel.



NOTES

6. Use Move to move the symbol to a different location, if necessary.

Figure 7: Surface Finish in the Drawing

7. Use the pro-defined groups to change the symbol. Click Groupingand select MACHINED > ROUGHNESS > AVERAGE >PROD_METHOD, and LEADER.

8. Define the values for the symbol. Click Var Text. Type [0,8]under AVER_ROUGHNESS. Type [grind] as thePROD_METHOD.

9. Click New Inst to create another surface finish symbol withoutclosing the dialog box.

10. Define the attachment for the next symbol. Click Placement andthen select PLACE INST from the PLACEMENT: TO BE PLACEDarea of the dialog box.

11. Pick the upper attachment of the two surface finish symbols asshown in Figure 7, then click Done Sel.

12. Move the symbol to the location shown if necessary.

13. Add a third surface finish as the global finish. Select NEW INSTfrom the SYMBOL INSTANCE dialog box.



NOTES

14. Type [30] to change the height of the symbol.

15. Define a free placement. Select FREE NOTE from thePLACEMENT: TO BE PLACED drop down list. Pick in the lowerright corner, as shown in Figure 7.

16. Move the note if necessary.

17. Remove the production method and leader group options. ClickGrouping and clear the PROD_METHOD and LEADER checkboxes.

18. Click New Inst from the SYMBOL INSTANCE dialog box to addthe last surface finish as the global finish.

19. Click Placement > Place Inst to place as a free note. Pick in thelower right corner, next to the previous symbol, as shown inFigure 7.

20. Change the average roughness to 3,2. Click Var Text and changethe aver_roughness value of [3,2].

21. Click OK > Done/Return to finish the symbols.

22. Clean up the symbol leaders. Create a jog on the two surface finishsymbols with leaders, as shown in Figure 7.

Task 11. The configuration file settings effected the display of thechamfer dimension. Change the dimensional text of the chamferdimension to reflect ISO standards.

1. Move the chamfer dimension. Click Move and pick the 1 X 45°dimension. Move it to the other side of the projected view.

2. Click Modify > Dimension, pick the 1 X 45° dimension, and clickDone Sel. Click Dim Text, then type [{2:2 REQ’D}] in theDIMENSION TEXT area as a second line. Click OK.

Task 12. Create a perpendicular gtol placed on the two axes of thebearing holes, in accordance with the ISO standard.

Note:

For the following section you will need the axes tagsdisplayed. If they are not, Click Utilities, Environment thenselect DISP AXIS from the ENVIRONMENT dialog box, thenclick OK.



NOTES

1. Start changing the display of axis A_19. Click Modify >Datum/Axis and pick axis A_19.

2. In the AXIS dialog box type [A] as the name.

3. Set the axis to be used for a geometric tolerance reference. Click >OK.

4. Change the display of axis A_20. Repeat the above steps and type[B] for the name. Click Done/Return to return to the top levelmenu.

5. Move the set tags to the left of the view so that they snap to thefirst snap line. Use Move to arrange the drawing as shown inFigure 8.

Note:

You may also need to move the axis so that they extend to thelocation of the tag.



NOTES

Figure 8: Drawing with Gtols

6. Start the creation of a perpendicular gtol. Click Create > GeomTol > Specify Tol. In the GEOMETRIC TOLERANCE dialog box,click .

7. Define axis A_1 as the reference. Select AXIS from the TYPEdrop-down list in the REFERENCE: TO BE SELECTED area.

8. Click Select Entity and pick axis A_1 located at the center of themodel.

9. Define the placement using a leader associated to the upper arrowof the 130 diameter dimension. From the PLACEMENT: TO BEPLACED area select NORMAL LDR from the drop-down list.

10. Using Query Sel, pick the upper arrow of the ∅130 dimension.Place the gtol as shown in Figure 8.



NOTES

11. Specify the datum references as the A and B axis. Click DatumRefs. Specify the datum references on the primary tab. select Afrom the BASIC drop-down list. Select B from the COMPOUNDdrop-down list.

12. Click Tol Value and type [0.005] in the OVERALL TOLERANCEtext box to define the tolerance value as .005.

13. Show the diameter symbol in the gtol. Click Symbols and clickthe ∅ Diameter Symbol check box.

14. If necessary, use Move or Move Text to change the position of thegtol. Select OK to finish the placement.

15. Save the drawing.

16. Erase the drawing and all associated object models from memory.

Figure 9: Finished Drawing



NOTES


• You can use configuration file and drawing setup options to create anISO standard drawing.

• You can create tolerance tables at the part and drawing levels.

• You can create ISO standard surface finish symbols.


Page B-1

Appendix

Info Bill of Materials MenuIn this module, you learn how to use the Info Menu to incorporate a

Bill of Materials (BOM) report into your drawing, and change the

content and format of the report.


Page B-2 Fundamenta ls of Drawing

NOTES

PLACING A BOM USING THE INFO MENUA Bill of Materials (BOM) is a listing of parts and part parameters that arecontained within the current assembly. When creating an assemblydrawing, it is often necessary to include a table showing the BOM. If youhave a license for Pro/REPORT, you can use repeat regions to automatechanges to the BOM, as described in module 17 “Creating a Bill ofMaterials,“ of this training guide. However, if you do not havePro/REPORT, you can create a BOM file in Assembly mode or Drawingmode using the INFO menu, and then add it to your drawing by entering itas a note from a file. To format or arrange the information in the BOM,you must use the system editor.

When you create a BOM in Assembly mode, you can choose which levelof the model that you want to show in the BOM. Using the BOM dialogbox, you can specify the entire assembly or select an individualsubassembly (Figure 1). In addition, you can specify whether to includeskeleton models or components that have not been fully placed in theassembly.

Figure 1: Bill of Materials


In fo Bi l l o f Mater ia ls Menu Page B-3

NOTES

Note:

A BOM that you add to a drawing is not associated with theBOM file that you used to create the note. If the compositionof the assembly changes, you must create a new BOM and addit to the drawing as a new note. You can fully edit the BOMdisplayed on the drawing as a note without affecting theoriginal BOM file.

Manipulating the Format of a BOM ReportWhen you create a BOM using the INFO menu, Pro/ENGINEER uses adefault format to display the information. You can reconfigure this formatto display information in accordance with your company standard bysetting the configuration file option bom_format. If you specify a user-defined format file as the value for this option in the configuration file, thesystem displays BOMs in your drawings using your customized format.

Dividing a BOM into SectionsWhen you create a user-defined BOM, you can list the members of eachsubassembly, as well as the total quantity of each part in the assembly, bycreating two separate sections within the format file:

• To list the members of each subassembly separately, with a headingfor each assembly breakdown, you can enter the .breakdowncommand within the format file.

• To create a shopping list of all of the parts needed to build theassembly, with a heading for each assembly breakdown, you can usethe .summary file.

You can include one or both sections, but you must specify the columntitles, row content, and display format for each section that you include.

Specifying Information and FormatThe user-defined format file contains a combination of text and formattingcommands.



NOTES

• Specifying Information – Within each section, you can use thefollowing commands to specify information:

� .title – Specifies the title of each column. The title line starts withthis command and then shows the titles as specified, separatingeach column title with a semi-colon.

� .row – Specifies the information to display in the repeating rows ofthe BOM. Pro/ENGINEER prints text that is not part of aparameter name as it appears. For example, to print a dollar signbefore the user-defined attribute price, enter [$%price]. Withineach row, you can use the following parameters:

� %$name – Inserts the name of the part or subassembly.

� %$type – Inserts the type of a model (assembly, subassembly, orpart).

� %$quantity – Inserts the number of times a specific part orsubassembly is used in the assembly.

� %xxx – Inserts any user-defined parameter associated with thecurrent part or subassembly, where xxx is the name of theparameter.

• Specifying format – You can add format specifiers to control thecolumn width, justification, and number of decimal places. The systemencloses three types of format specifiers in brackets as combinations ofnumbers and letters.

• String – A string format specifier is composed of two numbers and aletter. The first number specifies the width of the column, the numberfollowing the decimal point truncates the string at a specific character,and the letter signifies the parameter type. For example, a stringspecifier of [6.6s] specifies the column width as 6, the maximumlength of the string as 6 characters, and the parameter as a string (suchas Precis instead of Precision).

• Integer – An integer specifier is composed of a number and a letter.The number specifies the column width, and the letter specifies theparameter type. For example, an integer specifier of [3d] specifies thecolumn width as 3 and the parameter as an integer (such as 8).

• Floating Point – A floating point format specifier is composed of twonumbers and a letter. The first number specifies the width of thecolumn, the number following the decimal point controls the numberof decimal places, and the letter signifies the parameter type (“f”


In fo Bi l l o f Mater ia ls Menu Page B-5

NOTES

stands for floating point). For example, a floating point specifier of[6.2f] specifies the column width as 6, the number of decimal places as2, and the parameter as a floating point (such as 400.25).

Tips & Techniques

To left-justify the text for a field in each row, enter a minussign before the number. Example: [-4s].

Calculating a Total ValueTo calculate a total value such as cost or quantity, you can use the $total()command. The system calculates the total value for the parameter includedinside the parenthesis. For example, $total(cost) would calculate the totalcost of the components in the assembly.

Example of a BOM Report

Figure 2 shows an example of a customized BOM format file, andFigure 3 shows the output from this file.

Figure 2: BOM Format



NOTES

Figure 3: BOM Output


Page C-1

Appendix

Sketcher BasicsPreviously, you have learned that Pick and Place features allow for

very fast creation of features such as holes and rounds whose

geometry is easily understood as part of standard engineering

operations. For any geometry that involves the definition of more

complex, individual shapes, you will actually sketch them.

To enable this, Pro/ENGINEER provides a Sketcher mode and

includes a built-in Intent Manager to help you capture design intent.

This module starts with the basics of the Sketcher mode.

Objectives


• Describe the functions and tools in the Sketcher mode.

• Explain how Sketcher dimensioning scheme allows you to capturedesign intent.

• Create geometry including lines, centerlines, arcs, circles,rectangles and sketched points.

• Apply geometrical constraints to sketched entities, such as theequal lengths constraint and the perpendicular constraint.

• Employ geometry tools and section tools to change sectionsketches.


Page C-2 Fundamenta ls of Drawing

NOTES

THE SKETCHER ENVIRONMENT

The Sketcher InterfaceThe Sketcher interface consists of:

• A menu bar with the usual Pro/ENGINEER pull-down menus and twoadditional Sketcher-specific menus—EDIT and SKETCH.

• A standard Pro/ENGINEER toolbar.

• An additional Sketcher toolbar, which displays specific Sketcherfunctionality such as Undo, Dimensions On/Off, and Grid On/Off.

• A message area below the toolbars.

• An Intent Manager with fly-out icons on the right to performfrequently used actions.

• An additional Sketcher-specific message area at the bottom left of thewindow describing Intent Manager’s fly-out icons.

Figure 1: Sketcher Interface


Append ix C Page C-3

NOTES

• The color red is used to highlight and select entities. This providesaccurate and easily identifiable entities selections.

• Using the mouse, you can select individual or multiple-specificsketched entities, or all entities that fall within a swept box.

Intent Manager• The Intent Manager with fly-out icons appears automatically on the

right side of the screen when you enter the Sketcher mode.

• These icons are logically grouped together, based on capability.

Figure 2: Intent Manager’s Fly-Out Icons

• With fly-out icons, you can access the most frequently used sketchingtools with a single click without having to go to pull-down menus.

Default cursor topick entities

To create dimensions

To trim Entities

To modify dimensions

To impose constraints

Icons to createdifferent kinds ofgeometry



NOTES

Pop-Up Menus• Additional pop-up menus can be accessed by right clicking in Sketcher

mode.

• These pop-up menus aid ease-of-use.

• They offer short-cut methods for sketching, modifying, dimensioning,deleting, and undoing steps.

Figure 3: A Typical Sketcher Pop-Up Menu



NOTES

SKETCHER MODE FUNCTIONALITY

Sketcher Menus• EDIT and SKETCH are two top-level menus specific to the Sketcher

mode.

• They contain all the commands needed in the sketching environment.They are shown below.

Figure 4: Edit and Sketch Menus

• In addition, all Intent Manager commands are available through thesemenus.

• You can insert Text into the Sketching area using the Text option inthe SKETCH menu.

• With the new EDIT menu, you can manipulate your sketched geometrywith the Modify, Move, Trim, Toggle Construction, and ToggleLock commands.



NOTES

Specifying ReferencesOne of the first things you will be prompted for after beginning a sketch inthe Sketcher mode will be to specify references of the section you areabout to sketch.

You will need to provide references when you:

• Create a new feature.

• Redefine a feature with missing or insufficient references.

• Provide insufficient references to place a section.

It is good practice to reference before sketching. This provides thesketched entities a location to automatically align to and dimension from.

Note:

The references that you select for a section create Parent/Childrelationships.

Creating GeometrySketcher mode enables the creation of a variety of geometrical shapes andentities. The basic ones—lines, arcs, and circles—are discussed below.

Lines

Figure 5: Lines Fly-Out Icons

Using the Line fly-out icons in the Intent Manager, you can create twotypes of sketched lines—straight lines from point to point or centerlinesfor referencing or constraining entities.

Arcs

Figure 6: Arcs Fly-Out Icons



NOTES

Using the Arcs fly-out icons in the Intent Manager, you can create fourtypes of arcs. You can create:

• An arc by 3 points or tangent to an entity at its endpoint.

• A concentric arc.

• An arc by picking its center and endpoints.

• A conic arc.

Circles

Figure 7: Circle Fly-Out Icons

Using the Circle fly-out icons in the Intent Manager, you can create threetypes of circles. You can create:

• A circle by picking the center and a point on the circle.

• A concentric circle.

• A full ellipse.

Figure 8: Sketching a Concentric Circle to an Edge

Sketched circle

Concentric to thisedge



NOTES

DimensioningAfter completing a sketch, you must dimension it. To place dimensions inSketcher, pick the entity with the left mouse button and place thedimension with the middle-mouse button.

The following figure illustrates the simple dimensioning of a rectangle.

Figure 9: Creating Dimensions for a Rectangle

• You can grab a dimension and place it at a more convenient position inthe Sketcher at any point during or after sketching.

• An orderly arrangement of dimensions helps visual clarity, particularlywhen the sketch gets complex.

Figure 10: Grabbing and Moving Dimensions



NOTES

Modifying Dimensions

• Sketcher makes it easy to modify dimensions of geometric entities atany time.

• With the MODIFY DIMENSIONS dialog box, shown below, you canchange the dimension values of multiple entities with just a click of themouse.

Figure 11: Modify Dimensions Dialog Box

• In addition, you can now double-click on an individual dimension tochange its value.

• The SENSITIVITY scrollbar at the bottom right of the dialog box allowsyou to adjust the sensitivity of the control wheels for changingdimensions dynamically.

• You also have the options to dynamically Regenerate and LockScale the sketch.



NOTES

Constraining• Sketcher assumes certain constraints for the geometrical entities you

create.

• You are free to impose your own constraints overriding the system’sdefault constraints to capture your design intent.

• This can be done easily by accessing the CONSTRAINTS dialog boxshown below.

Figure 12: Sketcher Constraints Dialog Box

You can use constraint options to:

1. Make a line or two vertices vertical.

2. Make two entities tangent.

3. Make two points or vertices symmetrical about a centerline.

4. Make a line or two vertices horizontal.

5. Place a point on the middle of the line.

6. Create equal lengths, equal radii or same curvature constraint.

7. Make two entities perpendicular.

8. Create points, points on entities, or collinear constraint.

9. Make two lines parallel.



NOTES

Additional Sketcher ToolsEDGE

The Edge tool has two instances represented by its two fly-out icons in theIntent Manager, as shown below:

Figure 13: Edge Fly-Out Icons

• Use Edge – Uses an existing model edge to create sketched entities.Automatically selects that edge as a specified reference.

Figure 14: Using Existing Model Edge to Create Sketched Entities



NOTES

• Offset Edge – Uses existing model edge to create sketched entities atan offset distance.

Figure 15: Creating Sketched Entities at an Offset Distance

Note:

The Use Edge and Offset Edge options create parent/childrelationships with the referenced feature.

Copy

Copies 2-D draft/imported entities from a drawing. You can dynamicallymove and scale a section, making legacy data easier to manipulate. Thisfunctionality can be accessed by clicking Edit > Copy from the menu bar.

Mirror

This tool mirrors sketched entities from one side of a centerline to theother. This can be accessed by Edit > Mirror.

Move

• Repositions sketched entities. The MOVE ENTITY menu displays thefollowing options:

• Drag Item – Moves an entity or its vertex to a new location.

� Drag Many – Translates picked entities within a sketch.

� Rotate90 – Rotates sketched entities about a specified point bymultiples of 90 degrees.



NOTES

� Dimension – Repositions a dimension within a sketch.

Trim

This can be accessed by clicking Edit > Trim. Trim shortens (or extends)an entity in three different ways corresponding to the three fly-out iconsshown below:

Figure 16: Trim Fly-Out Icons

� The first dynamically trims section entities

� The second cuts or extends entities to other entities orgeometry.

� The third divides an entity at the point of selection, replacingthe original with two new entities.

Replace

Replaces a sketched entity from the original section with a newly sketchedentity.

Section Analysis

To obtain information about a particular section within Sketcher, clickAnalysis > Section Analysis. This option provides you with informationabout

• intersection and tangency points

• angles and distances

• dimensioning references

• entity curvature display

Sketcher Points

� They force coincidence among sketched entities.

� Allow slanted dimensions between sketched entity end-points.



NOTES

Figure 17: Midpoint Definition Using Sketcher Point

Figure 18: Defining Theoretical Sharps Using Sketcher Points

SETTING SKETCHER PREFERENCESYou can now modify the Sketcher environment in the new SKETCHERPREFERENCES dialog box in the UTILITIES menu.



NOTES

Figure 19: Sketcher Preferences Dialog Box

Use the SKETCHER PREFERENCES dialog box to:

• Modify the display options of various sketcher entities.

• Set constraints preferences by enabling or disabling constraintsassumed by Sketcher.

• Set grid, grid spacing, and accuracy parameters.

• Click the Default button to reset the preferences.

Sketching in 3-D

When you select the Use2D Sketcher option from the ENVIRONMENTdialog box. Sketcher starts in 2-D orientation (that is, with the sketchingplane parallel to the computer screen).



NOTES

Figure 20: The Environment Dialog Box

When you do not select this option, Sketcher starts in 3-D orientation. Youmay change the view orientation at any time and sketch in 3-D.



NOTES

SKETCHER PHILOSOPHY

Rules of ThumbCertain rules of thumb must be rigorously adhered to gain maximumadvantage from the power of the Sketcher mode’s diverse capabilities,

1. Keep sketches simple.

� This makes the final model flexible and helps regeneration.

2. Use the Undo option.

� The Undo option restores a sketched section to its prior state.

� This is extremely useful when sketching featuresincrementally.

3. Do not sketch to scale.

� Firstly, concentrate on getting your geometry straight bysketching large.

� Secondly, resolve the sketch by modifying dimensions.

� This rule is particularly helpful when the sketched entities aresmall.

4. Use the grid as an aid.

� Create lines equal, parallel, or perpendicular.

� Align sketched entities.

� Align centers horizontally and vertically.

5. Do not extend the sketch outside of the part.

� There is no need to sketch sections that extend outside the part,as is required with some solid modeling packages.

6. Make effective use of Sketcher accuracy.

� The range for the accuracy is 1.0 e-9 through 1.0 (default).

� To prevent Sketcher from making constraints, you can increaseSketcher accuracy by changing it from 1.0 to a lower number.

7. Use open and closed sections appropriately.

� When sketching an open section, you cannot have more thanone open section per feature.



NOTES

� If you use an open section, you must explicitly align its openends to the part.

� When in doubt over whether you should use an open or closedsection, you should use a closed one since it is easier toregenerate, and is less prone to failure.

Figure 21: Open and Closed Sections

Example 1Protrusion A

Example 1Protrusion B

Example 2Cut



NOTES


By the end of this lab, you will be conversant with basic sketching skills

such as entering sketcher mode, creating straight lines, creating arcs,

applying constraints, dimensioning, and generating solid models.

Method

In Exercise 1, you learn sketching basics.

In Exercise 2, you create a snap ring by sketching in steps.

EXERCISE 1: Sketching Basics

Figure 22: Completed Sketch after Exercise 1

Task 1. Create a new sketch named ROUND_RECTANGLE.

1. Click File > New.

2. In the NEW dialog box, select Sketch.

3. Type [ROUND RECTANGLE].

4. Sketcher mode activates.



NOTES

Task 2. Sketch four lines as shown, the bottom line being horizontal.

Figure 23

Task 3. Apply the constraint to make the lines perpendicular.

1. Click > , then pick two lines to make them perpendicular.

2. Similarly, once again pick the other two lines to make themperpendicular.



NOTES

Figure 24

3. Close the CONSTRAINTS dialog box.

Task 4. Delete the two vertical lines.

1. With the pointer icon pick the left vertical line.

2. Hold shift and pick the right vertical line.

3. Right-click and select Delete from the pop-up menu.

Task 5. Sketch a tangent end arc on the left side of the section.

1. Click .

2. Pick the top left vertex and drag the mouse out of the left quadrantof the circle to get a tangent end arc.

3. Pick the end point to be the bottom left end point, as shown below.



NOTES

Figure 25

Task 6. Repeat the process on the right side of the section.

Figure 26

Task 7. Add the proper dimensions.

1. Click .

2. Pick each arc with the left mouse button, then place the dimensionwhere you would like it to appear with the middle button.

3. Select Tangent and Horizontal for type and orientation.



NOTES

Figure 27

Task 8. Create a diameter dimension on the left arc.

1. Click .

2. Pick the left arc twice with the left mouse button and place it withthe middle.

Figure 28



NOTES

Task 9. Modify both dimensions.

1. Pick both the horizontal dimension and the diameter dimension

using the <SHIFT> key and click icon.

Figure 29: Modify Dimensions Dialog Box

2. Modify the diameter to [2] and the linear dim to [4].

Figure 30

3. Save and close



NOTES

EXERCISE 2: Sketching in Steps

Figure 31: Completed Snap Ring after Exercise 2

Task 1. Create a new sketch called SNAP_RING.

1. Click File > New.

2. Select Sketch.

3. Type [SNAP_RING] as the name of the sketch.

Task 2. Create two offset circles aligned horizontally.

1. Click and draw two circles as shown below.



NOTES

Figure 32

Task 3. Create a rectangle that snaps to the inside circle on both uppervertices.

Figure 33

1. For the rectangle, click . Just click once to start and then clickagain to end sketching.

2. Then use the dynamic trim to create intersections. Click , Putyour cursor below the bottom horizontal line and drag it to abovethe top horizontal line.

Start dynamictrim here

Stop cursor here

Delete



NOTES

3. Then delete the items that you just crossed out. The result is shownin the figure below.

Figure 34

Task 4. Sketch another rectangle.

1. This time snapping to the outside circle and the bottom of the twovertical lines as shown below.

2. Make sure not to snap through any of the arc’s vertices.



NOTES

Figure 35

Task 5. Use the dynamic trim to remove the final lines and arc.

1. Click to trim the unwanted entities.

2. The result is shown below.

Figure 36



NOTES

Task 6. Dimension the entities.

1. Click to create the dimensions.

2. Pick each entity with the left mouse button and place thedimension with the middle mouse button.

3. Click to modify the six dimension values.

Figure 37

4. Save and close.



NOTES

EXERCISE 3: Sketching a Hexagon

Task 1. Create a new sketch called HEX.

1. Click File > New. Select Sketch and type [HEX] as the name.

Task 2. Create a sketcher point

1. Click the point button.

2. Place a point in the center of the screen.

Task 3. Add vertical centerlines passing through the Sketcher Point.

1. Click on the centerline button in the line fly-out icons.

2. Create a vertical centerline that passes through the point.

3. Create two additional centerlines that pass through the point at anangle.

Task 4. Modify the angles to 60°.

1. Modify the angle between centerlines to 60° as shown below.

Figure 38



NOTES

Task 5. Create a circle centered on the point.

1. Pick on the circle to highlight in red.

2. Right-click on the circle.

3. Click Toggle Construction to convert it to a construction circle.

Figure 39

Task 6. Create a hexagon by sketching 6 lines from the intersectionpoints of the circle and the centerlines.

Figure 40



NOTES

1. Add a diameter dimension to the construction circle and modify it’svalue to [1.0]

2. Save and close.



NOTES

MODULE SUMMARYIn this module, you learned that:

• The Sketcher interface consists of the main sketcher area, pull-downmenus, toolbars, message areas, the INTENT MANAGER with fly-outicons, and pop-up menus.

• All geometry has to be sketched, dimensioned, and constrained.

• When sketching, one of the first tasks to be performed is to specifyreferences.

• You can create lines, arcs, circles, rectangles, splines, and many othergeometrical entities using the Intent Manager.

• The EDIT and SKETCH menus contain most of the tools that areunique to Sketcher mode such as Copy, Mirror, Move, and Trim.

• System dimensions can be over-ridden and dimensions can always bemodified at any stage of model generation.

• It is possible to over-constrain a model. The system notifies you whenthere is a clash of constraints though.

• Sketcher preferences can be set using the SKETCHER PREFERENCESdialog box.


Documents

NOTES- PROE DRAWING & SKETCHER